IDC - 1600ServiceManual901 0005 026v1.0jun0607

1600 SERIES
SERVICE MANUAL
SYSTEM MODELS:
X3C, X4C, AND X3G
Manual Number: 901-0005-026 v1.0 • June 6, 2007 • PN: 902-0017-001 v1.0

This page is intentionally left blank.
iii
Important Notice
IMPORTANT NOTICE
This equipment must be installed and serviced in accordance with the procedures
described in this product integration manual.
Only those individuals trained by Imaging Dynamics Company are authorized to
perform installation and service procedures on this equipment.
Authorized service personnel are responsible to ensure that all test equipment used during
installation and service of this equipment are properly calibrated and the test equipment
calibration records are properly maintained.
Imaging Dynamics Company accepts no responsibility for damages arising from failure
to follow the integration procedures, installation/service done by unqualified individuals
or the use of improperly maintained test equipment.
Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0001-001 v2.0 • June 6, 2007

v
Copyrights and Trademarks

Copyright © 2007 Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
IDC X3C, IDC X4C, IDC X3G, and IDC 1600 Series are copyrights of IDC. IDC
MagellanTM is a registered trademark and the IDC logo is a trademark of Imaging
Dynamics Company, Ltd. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks
or trademarks of their respective holders and are used only for reference where
specifically needed without any intent to infringe.
All patient information used in this manual is fictitious. The information does not refer to
any persons either living or deceased.
Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd. (IDC) assumes no responsibility for the use or
suitability of software or other equipment not provided by IDC or its affiliated companies.
Although IDC strives to ensure the accuracy of the provided instructions, neither IDC nor
its affiliated companies accepts any liability or damages for omissions contained in this
manual. This document does not imply a legal contract. Readers assume responsibility
for the use and interpretation of the information contained herein.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, in any form or by any
means without permission in writing from Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd.
IDC Corporate Address

Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd.
151, 2340 Pegasus Way N.E.
Calgary, Alberta, Canada T2E 8M5
Telephone: 403.251.9939, Fax: 403.251.1771
www.imagingdynamics.com
IDC European Address
EC REP
IDC Europe B.V.

Victorialaan 15, 5213 JG 's-Hertogenbosch
The Netherlands
Tel: +31(0)73 751.1742
Fax: +31(0)73 751.1744
IDC Asian Address

IDC Beijing Rep. Office
Room 1007A China Resource
No. 8 Jianguomenwai Bei Avenue
Beijing 100005, China
Tel: 00 86 10 85192196
Fax: 00 86 10 85192198

vi
IDC Customer Service

Original documentation was written in English.
For Local Service please call your local dealer:
Dealer Name
Dealer Phone Number
IDC Dealer Technical Support

Call toll-free:
IDC Help Desk 1.866.975.6737 (1.866.XPLORER)
After Hours (holidays and after 5pm MST, 1.877.275.9399

Monday through Friday)
or e-mail: service@imagingdynamics.com

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Indications for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Regulatory Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1600 Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1600 Radiographic Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Detector Head Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
X3C Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
X4C Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
X3G Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Power Distribution (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
HV Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
X-ray Tube and Collimator Asseembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Lock-out Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
High Voltage Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Radiation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Monitoring of Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Electrostatic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Scintillator Safety for the X3C and X4C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

viii
Patient Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Environmental Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Reporting Serious Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Avoiding Serious Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Legal Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Reporting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Advisory Labels and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Automatic Exposure Control Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
IDC Magellan 3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Indications For Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration. . . . 1-29
Pre-Installation Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Safety Warnings and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Equipment Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Environment Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Site Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Storage and Shipping Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Safe Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Generator Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
1600 Site Planning Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
1600 Weights and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Facility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
1600 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Site Preparation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Room Dimension Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Data Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Ordering information:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
1600 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Service Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Equipment Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Electrostatic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

ix
Radiation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Scintillator Safety for X3C and X4C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Quick Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1600 Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Unpacking the Column and Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Equipment Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Unpacking the Compact Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Pre-installation Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Stand Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Stand Control Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
To Install the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Generator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Generator Cabinet Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Generator Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Power Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Compact Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Generator Final Installation and Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
HV Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Cable Fastening and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
X-Ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
High Voltage Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Stator Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
GND and/or Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Virtual Console (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Door Interlock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Warning Light Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Collimator Lamp and System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ION Chambers (AEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
To Wire the Stand and Control Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
To Cable the Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Detector Head Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Routing the Detector Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Preparing to Install the Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Installing and Connecting the Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Power Distribution Module (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Understanding the PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Installing the PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Cabling the Detector Head and PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

x
Connecting the Detector Head and PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Connecting the PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Connecting the Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Computer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Powering up the 1600 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Trigger Board Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Setting up the Trigger Board Electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Checking the Trigger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Checking Movements and Installing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Leveling Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
1600 Configuration and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Configuration and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Configuration and Calibration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
CalibrationTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
General Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Configuration Step by Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Configuration of C11 - Inches / CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Configuration of C12 - Maximum Height of the Room . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Configuration of C13 - Chest Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Configuration of C14 - Under-table Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Configuration of C15 - Table Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Configuration of C16 - Detector Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Configuration of C17 - Detector Width Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Configuration of C18 - Detector Width Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Configuration of C19 - Optional Third SID Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Configuration of C21 - Safety Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Configuration of C22 - Chest SID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Configuration of C31 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position . . . 4-14
Configuration of C32 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position . . . 4-15
Configuration of C33 - Mid Height in Horizontal Position . . . . . . . . 4-15
Configuration of C4.0 and C5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Configuration of C61 - Minimum Angle for Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Configuration of C62 - Detector Detent at 0° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Configuration of C63 - Maximum Angle for Detector . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Common Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Undertable Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Chest Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Calibration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
General Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Calibration Step by Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Calibration of P11 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position . . . . . . 4-20
Calibration of P12 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position . . . . . 4-20
Calibration of P13 - Half Way Height in Horizontal Position . . . . . . 4-20
Calibration of P21 - Minimum Angle CCW (-30°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Calibration of P22 - Vertical Angle (0°). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

xi
Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle (90°). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Calibration of P24 - Minimum Angle CW (120°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Calibration of P31 - Minimum SID (100 cm / 39 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Calibration of P32 - Maximum SID (180 cm / 70.86 in) . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Calibration of P41 - Minimum Detector Angle (-45°) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Calibration of P42 - 0° Detector Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Calibration of P43 - Maximum Detector Angle (+20°) . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Adjustment Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Balance Test of the C-arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
C-arm Balance in Horizontal Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
To Align of X-ray Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Alignment of Light Field with X-ray Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Perpendicularity Adjustment of X-ray Beam with Image Receptor. 4-31
Generator Configuration
and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Installation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Initial Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Configuration and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Self-running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Filament and Anode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Filament Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Focal Spots Configuration and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Generator Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
GSM Program Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Customized Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Extended Memory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory. . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
X-Ray Tube Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
X-Ray Tube Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Auto-Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Generator Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Detector Calibration And Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adjustments on the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Half Value Layer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

xii
Procedure for Half Value Layer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Example Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Detector Head Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Gain and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Procedure for Determining Gain and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table of Gain Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Procedure for Measuring Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
To Measure the Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Dark Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Configuring Dark Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Flat Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Configuring Flat Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Running the f# Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Geometric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Cropping ROI Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Artefact Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Artefact Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
AEC Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
CPI Generator – AEC Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Detector Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
The AEC Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Equipment Needed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Assignment of Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Balancing of the AEC Ion Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
AEC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Sedecal Generator – AEC Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Equipment Needed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Assignment of Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Balancing the Ion Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
To Perform the AEC Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
System Acceptance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Acceptance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Acceptance Testing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Physical Inspection/Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Gain and Offset, Flat Field and Dark Field Corrections . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

xiii
Exposure Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Dark Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Uniformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Response Linearity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Readout Linearity Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Geometric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
High-Contrast Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Erasure Thoroughness and Artefact/Defect Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Noise/Low-Contrast Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Procedure for Measuring Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Procedure for Measuring Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Reference Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Detector Head Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Magellan 3 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Detector Head and PDM Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Storage Commitment Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Send Queue (Storage SCU) Request for Storage Verification . . . . . . 8-6
Scenario #1–Successful, Immediate Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Scenario #2–Successful, Delayed Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Scenario #3–Failed, Immediate Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Scenario #4–Failed, Delayed Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
AutoDeleting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Starting the Magellan 3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Magellan 3 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Using the Help Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Connecting to the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Sedecal Generator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
CPI Generator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
The Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
To Add a New Security Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Modifying a Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Configuring the User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
To Create a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Modifying the User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
To Change Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Detector Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Generator and Imaging Station Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Configuring the X-ray Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Adding or Removing a Non-DR Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

xiv
Setting up the Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Naming the Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Configuring the Detector Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Configuring the TECC/PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Detector Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Disk Space Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
To Change the Disk Space Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
The Worklist Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Worklist Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Configuring the Worklist Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
To Change the Application Entity Title for the Worklist Manager . . 8-37
To Add or Change a Worklist Provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
To Remove a Worklist Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
To Configure the Worklist Query Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
To Test the Connection to a Worklist Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Managing the Scheduled Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Moving the Scheduled Study Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Resizing the Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
To Configure Other Settings in the Worklist Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
The Send Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
To Configure the Send Destination List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Configuring Film Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Configuring Sending Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
The Print Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
To Configure Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
To Change the AE Title for Magellan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Choosing Active and Default Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Adding or Changing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Film Layout Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
To Remove a Printer from the Printer List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
To Copy the Settings of a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
To Test the Printer’s Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Study/Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
To Configure Xporter FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Grid Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
To Enable Grid Detect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
To Open the Visual Parameter Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
To Edit the Parameters in the Visual Parameter Editor . . . . . . . . . 8-78
The Parameter Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Managing the Anatomies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
To Add a New Anatomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
Modifying an Anatomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
To Modify the Activity or Details of an Anatomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
Managing the Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89

xv
About Anatomy/Projection Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92

To Create or Remove a Anatomy/Projection Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
To Add a New Level to an Anatomy/Projection Pair. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
To Copy Parameter Values from Other Anatomy/Projection Pairs. 8-96
To Modify Parameter Details for Existing Anatomy/Projection Pairs8-98
Managing the Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
To Add an Anatomy/Projection Step to an Existing Procedure . . 8-102
Activating or Deactivating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
To Activate or Deactivate a Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
To Delete Procedures and Import Procedures from a Worklist . . 8-104
To Remove or Duplicate an Anatomy/Procedure Step. . . . . . . . . 8-105
To Change the Order of Procedure Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
To Create a New Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
Configuring the Arcoma CMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109
To Set the COM Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109
To Configure AutoPosition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109
To Test the AutoPosition # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
Detector Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Failed Focus Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Resolution Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Typical Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Additional Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Safety Warnings and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Service Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Resetting the EEPROM (U27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Unit Movements Blocked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Inverters Factory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Anticrushing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Bearings Gap Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Trigger Board Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Issue Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Resolution Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

xvi
Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Create an Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Saving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Uncorrected Dark Noise Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Uncorrected X-ray Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Flat Field and Dark Field Corrected Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Flat Field, Dark Field, and Geometric Corrected X-ray Image . . . 10-24
Uploading Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Record the Investigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Grid Detect Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Replacement of Height Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Replacement of Height Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replacement of SID Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Replacement of Detector Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Replacement of Detector Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Replacement of Steel Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Replacement of the X-Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

xvii
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Replacement of the Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Replacement of the High Voltage Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic) . . . . . 10-49
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Replacement of Limit Switches: Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Adjustment of the Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position . . . . . . 10-56
Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Software Update in Control PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Lock-out Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Scanning for Volume Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Running the Windows Disk Defragmenter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Care and Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Preventative Maintenance Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Scheduled Maintenance Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

xviii
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Stand Preventative Maintenance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Optional 80 KW Generator Preventative Maintenance Procedure11-12
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Material Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Placing an Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Order Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Warranty Parts Return Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Detector Head Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
IDC Support and Hours of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

INTRODUCTION
The following information is included:

1.1 “Preface”
1.2 “Regulatory Information”
1.3 “1600 Component Details”
1.4 “Safety Precautions”
1.5 “Automatic Exposure Control Device”
1.6 “IDC Magellan 3 Software”
1.7 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration”

1 - 2 • Introduction •
Revision Information
Version Date Description
0.1 March 15, 2007 Module created using existing information.
1.0 June 6, 2007 First release.

Introduction • Preface • 1-3
1.1 Preface
1.1.1 Who Should Use This Manual
Service technicians may use this manual as a guide for pre-installation planning,
installing, calibrating and daily servicing of the Imaging Dynamics' 1600 digital x-ray
machine.
The user must be aware of what system model they are using to correctly install and
service the system.
Users are required to retain all manuals shipped with this unit.
1.1.2 Manual Conventions
DANGER! Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided will cause
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING! Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause
serious personal injury, or catastrophic damage of equipment or data.
CAUTION! Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause
personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
NOTE: Alerts users of facts and conditions that are important to know but do not relate to
possible injury or damage to equipment.

1 - 4 • Introduction • Regulatory Information
1.2 Regulatory Information
1.2.1 Standards Compliance
This system meets the following requirements

Standard for Medical electrical systems:
Part 1-1: General requirements for IEC 60601-1-1: 2000

safety
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1-1: 2002

(Second Edition)
Medical electrical systems:
Part 1-3: General Requirements For IEC 60601-1-3: 1994 (First Edition)
Radiation Protection In Diagnostic
x-ray Equipment
Medical electric equipment:
Part 1-4: General requirements for IEC 60601-1-4:1996 + A1: 1999

safety: Programmable electrical
medical systems CAN/CSAC22.2 No. 60601-1-4: 2002
(First Edition)
Part 2: Particular requirements for the IEC 60601-2-32: 1994, with regard to the
safety of associated equipment of x-ray risks of fire, shock and mechanical only.
equipment
The system complies with IEC 60601-1-2
(2001) for medical electrical equipment,
including the electromagnetic emissions
requirements of CISPR II, Group I, Class A
as specified in IEC 60601-1-2 (2001)
This system has been certified by:

Introduction • Regulatory Information • 1-5
1.2.2 Indications for Use
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requires the following statement to appear
in this manual:
“The 1600 system is intended for use by a qualified/trained doctor or technologist on
both adult and pediatric patients for taking diagnostic radiographic exposures of the
skull, spinal column, chest, abdomen, extremities, and other body parts but not
mammography. Applications can be performed with patient sitting, standing, or lying
in the prone or supine positions.”
FDA 510(k) for the X4C 1600: K042041
FDA 510(k) for the X3C 1600: to be assigned by FDA
FDA 510(k) for the X3C Detector Head: K070079
• The 1600 digital radiography system is not to be used for mammography.
• The 1600 digital radiography system should only be operated in conjunction with
specified medical x-ray equipment and by trained and licensed personnel.
WARNING! Only certified and properly trained, authorized personnel should be

permitted to take x-ray exposures. No practical design can incorporate
complete protection for personnel who do not follow proper safety
precautions.
WARNING! The appropriate x-ray imaging exposure parameters should be consistent

with established Federal and Provincial/State radiation protection practices
and medical imaging standards in your institution.
1.2.3 Regulatory Forms
It is the responsibility of the installer to complete and submit the FDA 2579 form and/or
any other regional/provincial regulatory installation requirements applicable to the
location. The copies of these documents shall be retained by the installer’s firm for the life
time of the device.

1 - 6 • Introduction • 1600 Component Details
1.3 1600 Component Details
CAUTION! Some portions of the 1600 are very heavy and must be lifted with the specified
equipment or with proper lifting techniques to prevent injury.
Table 1-1 : Component Table
Component Name Manufacturer Model/Part Number Manuals
RadiographicStand Sedecal X Plus LP

Detector Head rated 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5.6 A
Digital Radiographic Detector Imaging Dynamics • X4C/740-0008-001
• X3C/740-0008-009
• X3G/740-0008-008
Power Distribution Module Imaging Dynamics 740-0007-005
HV Generator Sedecal Sedecal SHF 635 (64 kW) See Sedecal Manual
X-ray Tube Varian Rad 92 See Varian Manual
Collimator Ralco 302 L/A See Ralco Manual
Workstation Dell Precision 390 See Dell Reference

Guide
1600 Administration Manual 901-0002-018
1600 Operator’s Manual 901-0001-018
1600 Service Manual 901-0005-026
1600 Site Planning Guide 901-0004-004
1.3.1 1600 Radiographic Stand
The following labels indicates relevant equipment and regulation information for the 1600.
The type of label will depend on the type of Detector Head. See Figure and Figure 1-2.

Introduction • 1600 Component Details • 1-7
Figure 1-1

5(9,6,216
35,17(''5$:,1*)255()(5(1&(21/<35,17('21(/(&7521,&&23<)281'$7 5(9 &&)12 '(6&5,37,21 '$7( %< $33529('
(?'UDZLQJV?:RUNLQJ'LUHFWRU\?6.:RUNLQJ'LUHFWRU\?2OG?;SORUHU'LJLWDO5DGLRJUDSKLF6\VWHPIRUPDQXDOV
,'&6<67(0%5$1',1*/2*272%(&(17(5('
1 - 8 • Introduction
' 217+()5217)$&(2)7+(67$1'723&$3 '

& &

• 1600 Component Details
Figure 1-2

% %
127(66<67(0/$%(/3/$&('217+(
5($52)&2//$5
6<67(0/$%(/:,//63(&,)<
;6(5,(6'(7(&725+($'
'(6,*1$7,21

&$'*(1(5$7(''5$:,1*
$
',0(16,216,1PP>,1&+(6@
72/(5$1&(6$5( '21270$18$//<83'$7(
$ ',67$1&( 25,*,1$7,1*(&5 ;;;;;
! >@
! >@ $33529$/6 '$7(
! >@ '5$:1
0$7(5,$/
$1*/(6! 67(3+(1. /$%(/3/$&(0(17',$*5$0
)5$&7,216! &+(&.('
9DULRXV
-(11,)(5/
),1,6+ 5(63(1*
9DULRXV
1$
0)*(1*
7+(,1)250$7,21&217$,1(',17+,6'5$:,1*,67+(62/(3523(57<2) 6,=( 3$5712 5(9
,0$*,1*'<1$0,&6&2/7'$1<5(352'8&7,21,13$5725:+2/(:,7+287
% 1$
48$/(1*
7+(:5,77(13(50,66,212),0$*,1*'<1$0,&6&2/7',6352+,%,7(' 6&$/( 6+((7 2)

Introduction • 1600 Component Details • 1-9
The following product labels are located on the back of the 1600 column (Figure 1-3). For
more information about these labels see Figure 1-4, “Sedecal X Plus” and
Figure 1-5, “UL Classification” .
Figure 1-3
Sedecal Plus and UL Classification
Figure 1-4 Sedecal X Plus

Product Sedecal X Plus
Model No A8117-01
Voltage 208/230/240 v~, 1 ph.
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Input Power 1.5 kVa
Manufactured Date
Serial Number xxxxxx

Figure 1-5 UL Classification
Medical Equipment
with respect to Electric,
Shock, Fire and Mechanical
Hazards
only in accordance with UL
60601-1
<14 NN>
Table 1-2 1600 Radiographic Stand Dimensional Specifications
Maximum SID 1800 mm.
Minimum SID 1000 mm.
Total vertical travel range 1290 mm.
Rotation of Swivel Arm +120°/ -30°
Rotation or Tube-Collimator Assembly ±180°

Rotation of Detector +20°/-45°

Introduction • 1600 Component Details • 1 - 11
1.3.2 Detector Head Models
This manual contains information for three IDC Detector Heads: X3C, X4C, and X3G.
Sections in the manual that are Detector Head specific can be identified by their
appropriate headings. The user must be aware of what system model they are using to
correctly install and service the system.
1.3.2.1 X3C Detector Head

The following tables list the specifications of the X3C Detector Head. See Table 1-3 and
Table 1-4 below.
Table 1-3 Image Receptor Dimensional Specifications
Imaging area 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17 in)
Effective pixel pitch 144μm
Limiting spatial resolution 3.4 lp/mm
Nominal resolution 3.2 lp/mm
Scintillator Cesium Iodide
Grid (stationary) Optional 13:1 70 lines/cm
Photo-timer Optional 3-field ion chamber
Detector Head Weight including support 47.75 kg (105.25 lbs)

frame
Table 1-4 CCD Camera Dimensional Specifications
Matrix 3072 x 3072
Pixels 9 million
Pixel size 12 x 12μm
1.3.2.2 X4C Detector Head

The following tables list the specifications of the X4C Detector Head. See Table 1-5 and
Table 1-6 below.
Imaging area 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17 in)

Scintillator Cesium Iodide
Grid (stationary) 13:1 70 lines/cm
Photo-timer 3-field ion chamber (AID)
Matrix 4000 x 4000
Pixels 16 million
Pixel size 9 x 9μm
1.3.2.3 X3G Detector Head

The following tables list the specifications of the X3G Detector Head. See Table 1-7 and
Table 1-8 below.
Imaging area 43 cm x 43 cm (17 in x 17 in)
Scintillator Gadolinium Oxysulfide (GadOx)
Grid (stationary) Optional 13:1 70 lines/cm
Photo-timer Optional 3-field ion chamber
Detector Head Weight including 47.75 kg (105.25 lbs)

support frame
Matrix 3072 x 3072
Pixels 9 million
Pixel size 12μm x 12μm

1.3.3 Power Distribution (PDM)
The following product labels are located on the Power Distribution Module (Figure 1-6).
Figure 1-6
PDM
Label
Warranty
Void Seal
• Figure 1-7 is located on the Power Distribution Module.
Figure 1-7

• Figure 1-8 indicates the warranty is void if the seal is broken.
Figure 1-8
1.3.4 HV Generator
Table 1-9 X-Ray Generator Components
X-ray Generator with AEC capability
Universal Interface provided for Photo-timer
64 kW (80 kW optional) High Frequency Inverter Generator
Table 1-10 Range and Accuracy of Radiographic Parameters
Parameter Range Accuracy
kV From 40 kV to 125 kV or 150 ± (3 % + 1 kV)

kV in 1 kV steps
mA From 10 mA to 800 mA ± (4 % + 1 mA)

through the following mA
stations: 10, 12.5, 16, 20,
25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100,
125, 160, 200, 250, 320,
400, 500, 640, 800
mAs Product of mA x Time Product of mA x Time values from 0.1

values from 0.1 mAs to 500 mAs to 500 mAs
mAs

Table 1-10 Range and Accuracy of Radiographic Parameters
Exposure Time From 1 millisecond to 10 ± (2 % + 0.1 ms)

seconds through the
following Time stations:
Milliseconds: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,
50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160,
200, 250, 320, 400, 500,
640, 800
Seconds: 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2,

2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.4, 8, 10
NOTE: Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.
1.3.5 X-ray Tube and Collimator Asseembly
The following product label is located on the back of the manual collimator
(Figure 1-9). For more information about this label see Figure 1-10, “Ralco” .
Figure 1-9
Ralco Label

Figure 1-10 Ralco
Ralco
Beam Limiting Device Min inherent filtration Al equivalent
Collimator X-ray rating up to 150 kVp
Type R 302L/A DHHS Supply 24 v AC/DC 6.5 A 50/60 HZ
S/N 170/5975
Date of Manufacture: mm/yy
!
Table 1-11 X-Ray Tube Crane Components
X-ray Tube and Manual Collimator
1.3.6 Workstation
Table 1-12 Acquisition Workstation Components
Microsoft Windows XP
Intel Pentium 4, 3.2 gig processor
AGP Video Card (DVI or VGA capable)
2 gigabyte of system RAM
2 x 120 GB Mirrored Hard Drives (minimum)
21” Colour (.22 dot pitch) Display, 1600 X 1200
Built in 10/100/1000 mbits/s NIC (network

interface card)

Introduction • Safety Precautions • 1 - 17
1.4 Safety Precautions

All personnel associated with x-radiation must become familiar with the safety and
regulatory instructions within this manual, and its related component manuals. These
instructions should be thoroughly read and understood before operating the equipment.
X-ray equipment does not pose any danger when used properly. Ensure that all service
and operating personnel are properly trained and understand the hazards of radiation.
Those responsible for the system must understand the safety requirements for x-ray
operation.
1.4.1 Lock-out Procedures
Emergency stop buttons shall not to be used during maintenance or servicing operations in
place of required lock-out procedures. The equipment shall only be serviced by trained
service personnel. Service personnel shall be knowledgeable of and follow their
organizations required lock-out procedure. This procedure should state that the equipment
shall not be serviced without locking the electrical disconnect in the open position.
1.4.2 High Voltage Safety
The 1600 system is a very complex and potentially dangerous device and should only be
operated and serviced by trained professionals. Failure to follow the following service
guidelines may expose operators, service personnel, and patients to severe risk.
The complete system, including the generator, is capable of producing voltage levels near
150,000 volts. Proper care must be taken to prevent exposure to these voltages.
Portions of the system pose a pinch or crush hazard. Proper precautions must be used to
prevent injury. Such hazards are identified by universal symbols shown below.
The following symbol (Figure 1-11) shown on a label indicates “Attention, consult
accompanying documents – as applicable.”
Figure 1-11
Intermittent Use

1 - 18 • Introduction • Safety Precautions
1.4.3 Radiation Safety
WARNING! This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure
and operating instructions are observed.
The Detector Head produces no x-radiation. The unit produces digital medical images when
coupled with specified medical x-ray equipment. All appropriate safety precautions should be
taken when working with x-ray equipment.
X-ray exposure may be damaging to health with some effects being cumulative and extending
over months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any exposure to the
primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation. Scatter
radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam.
An effective protective measure is the use of lead shielding. To minimize dangerous exposure,
use such items as lead screens, lead impregnated gloves, aprons, thyroid collars, etc. The lead
screen should contain aminimum of 2.0 mm of lead or equivalent and personal protective
devices (aprons, gloves, etc.) must contain a minimum of 0.25 mm of lead or equivalent. For
confirmation of the local requirements at your site, please refer to your “Local Radiation
Protection Rules” as provided by your Radiation Protection Advisor.
Only certified and properly trained, authorized personnel should be permitted to take
x-ray exposures. No practical design can incorporate complete protection for personnel who
do not follow proper safety precautions.
1.4.4 Monitoring of Personnel
Radiation exposure should be measured to determine whether or not protective

measures are adequate. Monitoring may reveal inadequate or improper radiation
protection practices and potentially serious situations of radiation exposure.
The most effective method of measuring radiation exposure may involve use of an
exposure measuring instrument. Measurements should be taken in any location
where the operator or any portion of the body is exposed. Exposure must never
exceed the accepted tolerable dose.
It is also a common practice to measure radiation exposure using personal
radiation dosimeters. These instruments consist of x-ray sensitive film, thermoluminiscent
material, and optically stimulated material enclosed within a holder that may be worn on the
body. Although this instrument only measures the radiation in the body’s general
vicinity, it does provide a reasonable indication of radiation exposure.
1.4.5 Electrostatic Safety
Electronic components are static sensitive and easily damaged. Before handling, move to an
anti-static area, wear anti-static wrist straps and preferably wear anti-static footwear.

1.4.6 Scintillator Safety for the X3C and X4C
WARNING! The scintillator used in the X3C and X4C units uses thallium doped cesium
iodide with a protective coating layer. It is not hazardous in its normal form.
When handling the material, use lint free gloves, and treat it as you would a
delicate glass lens. Do not touch nor attempt to clean the yellow surface. If
the detector head is dropped, check to see if the scintillator is broken. If the
scintillator is broken or burned, hazardous dust or vapour may be formed.
Use a protective mask and gloves before handling material and limit
exposure to the minimum necessary to allow for bagging. Seal broken parts
in a sturdy non-porous bag, label contents as containing thallium doped
cesium iodide, and contact Imaging Dynamics or local authorities for
direction regarding safe disposal.
1.4.7 Patient Safety
CAUTION! Do not allow operations or service personnel to pull themselves up from a

sitting or lying position with the patient handles or any part of the unit.
The patient environment refers to the space under, above, and around the patient table top.
System components, such as the generator and computer workstation, must be installed
outside the patient environment. See Table 1-13 and Figure 1-12 for patient environment
dimensions.
Table 1-13
Radius around patient table 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
From floor beneath patient table to top of patient table 2.5 m (8.2 ft)

Figure 1-12
1.4.8 Environmental Safety
This equipment or system contains environmentally dangerous components and materials,

such as PCB’s, electronic components, used dielectric oil, lead, and batteries. Once the life-
cycle of the equipment or system comes to an end, becomes dangerous and need to be
considered as harmful waste according to the international, domestic and local regulations.
To minimize the risks involved in disposing of these waste products, please contact an
authorized representative of the manufacturer or an authorized waste management company
for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
1.4.9 Reporting Serious Incidents
1.4.9.1 Definition
Serious incidents involve failure of equipment causing serious injury, death, or potential for
injury. Reporting serious incidents is a liability and regulatory requirement.
NOTE: When used in a safe and responsible manner, any equipment manufactured or sold as
IDC equipment is the responsibility of IDC.

1.4.9.2 Avoiding Serious Incidents

Most serious incidents can be avoided with proper installation of heavy equipment, such
as C-arms, tube mounts and collimators, used for positioning.
NOTE: Only certified and trained service personnel may install the system.
To avoid serious incidents and anticipate any potential equipment failures, regular
maintenance should be performed as outlined in both the Operator’s Manual and Service
Manual.
Because serious incidents can include reoccuring equipment failures that may potentially
cause an injury, equipment failures must be reported and handled immediately.
1.4.9.3 Legal Responsibility

IDC’s primary responsibility is to ensure safety and well-being of patients, customers, and
staff. Regulatory action may be required after IDC is informed of a serious incident and
IDC has verified an equipment failure. Depending on the severity of the incident,
regulatory authorities must be notified within 24 to 48 hours.
1.4.9.4 Reporting Procedure

Immediately report a serious incident by:
1. Clearly and explicitly notifying your IDC contact. The IDC contact will notify his
manager and the IDC Quality Department.
2. Notify your manager. Your manager will spread awareness of the incident and ensure a
proper response from senior staff.
3. Send an e-mail to the IDC Help Desk (service@imagingdynamics.com) and/or submit
an entry into the IDC tracking system. Include the names and dates of people you have
notified.
NOTE: It is the reporting service technician’s responsibility to ensure the proper people
are notified of the serious incident.
1.4.9.5 Records
Section 1.4.9, “Reporting Serious Incidents applies to:
TECBUL-006-002 Reporting Serious Incidents

1.4.10 Advisory Labels and Symbols
The following labels and symbols are used on the systems.

• Figure 1-13 indicates “Attention, consult accompanying documents - as applicable.”
Figure 1-13
• Figure 1-14 indicates there are no user serviceable parts on this medical device.
Figure 1-14
• Figure 1-15 indicates the collimator should not be open beyond 43 cm x 43 cm

(17 in x 17 in).
Figure 1-15
DO NOT OPEN COLLIMATOR

ABOVE 43 cm x 43 cm
(17 in x 17 in)
• Figure 1-16 is the Hazardous Voltage label and indicates that there is hazardous voltage
inside. Disconnect power before opening. Service by trained personnel only. Consult man-
ual.
Figure 1-16

• Figure 1-17 is the Radiation Safety label and indicates that the x-ray unit may be dan-
gerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure factors and operating instructions
are observed.
Figure 1-17
• Figure 1-18 is the Electrostatic Sensitive Devices label and indicates that proper
grounding techniques must be used to prevent damage to the equipment.
Figure 1-18
• Figure 1-19 is the Power supply Notice label and indicates to avoid equipment dam-
age, set the transformer and/or power supply to proper voltage before powering.
Figure 1-19

• Figure 1-20 indicates that sitting is prohibited.
Figure 1-20
• Figure 1-21 indicates the equipment is Class I Type B equipment.
Figure 1-21
TYPE B
• Figure 1-22 indicates functional earth ground.
Figure 1-22

• Figure 1-23 indicates protective earth ground.
Figure 1-23
• Figure 1-24 indicates the neutral power supply conductor.
Figure 1-24
• Figure 1-25 indicates the AC power source.
Figure 1-25
• Figure 1-26 indicates Ionizing Radiation.
Figure 1-26

• Figure 1-27 indicates waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. To minimize the risks involved
in disposing of these waste products, please contact an authorized representative of the
manufacturer or an authorized waste management company for information concerning
the decommissioning of your equipment.
Figure 1-27
• Figure 1-28 indicates Dangerous Voltage.
Figure 1-28

Introduction • Automatic Exposure Control Device • 1 - 27
1.5 Automatic Exposure Control Device

The AEC (automatic exposure control) device used in the unit is a three-field ionization
chamber device.
The selection of the ionization cell location may vary for differing patient size or
pathology, as it does with film-screen systems.
WARNING! The appropriate x-ray imaging exposure parameters should be consistent

with established Federal and Provincial/State radiation protection practices
and medical imaging standards in your institution.

1 - 28 • Introduction • IDC Magellan 3 Software
1.6 IDC Magellan 3 Software

IDC Magellan 3 is a software program that uses the latest digital imaging and processing
techniques to acquire, store, retrieve, transmit, and print medical images for immediate review
and disposition.
1.6.1 Indications For Use
The IDC Magellan 3 Application is an accessory to IDC units used for patients undergoing
x-ray examinations.
The IDC Magellan 3 Application is intended to acquire images from an IDC unit, display the
images for viewing or reviewing, and transmit the images to a PACS (Picture Archiving and
Communications System) for image archiving or to a DICOM (Digital Imaging and
Communications in Medicine) compliant printer. It is intended for use by radiation
technologists, physicians, and other medical personnel qualified to perform medical
examinations.
To avoid unintentional loss of data, it is recommended that the contents of the workstation's
hard drive be backed up nightly. The amount of data on the system may vary from 5 GB to
160 GB; therefore, it is important to select an appropriate back-up medium. For facilities
using a PACS, the PACS acts a back-up for image data; however, an appropriate back-up to
tape or external hard-drive must be used for applications or configuration files. Facilities not
using a PACS should back-up all data to a tape or external hard drive.

Introduction • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration • 1 - 29
1.7 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration
CAUTION! Mobile telephones or other radiating equipment can interfere with the
function of the 1600 and can, therefore, be safety hazards.
To prevent interference, surrounding equipment should comply with the standard IEC
60601-1-2.
X4C Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration

The X4C is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the X4C should assure that it is used in such an environment.
X4C Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)

The X4C Digital Radiography Unit is intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms)
Electromagnetic Environment –
Emission Test Compliance
Guidance
Radiated Emissions Class A The X4C uses RF energy only for its
internal function. Therefore, its RF
EN 55011/CISPR 11 emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.
Harmonic Emissions Class A The X4C is suitable for use in all

establishments other than domestic
EN 61000-3-2 and those directly connected to the
public low-voltage.
Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker Class A
Emissions
EN 61000-3-3
Conducted Emissions Class A
EN 55011/CISPR 11

The X4C Digital Radiography Unit is intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms)
IEC 60601 Compliance
Immunity Test Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
Test Level Level
Electrostatic Discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile.If
floors are covered with synthetic material, the
EN 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±8 kV air relative humidity should be at least 30%.

1 - 30 • Introduction • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration
Electrical Fast Level 3 Level 3 Mains power quality should be that of a typical
Transient/Burst commercial or hospital environment.
±2 Declaration ±2 kV for power
EN 61000-4-4 for power supply supply
±1 kV for I/O ±1 kV for I/O

lines lines
Surge Level 2 Level 2 Mains power quality should be that of a typical

commercial or hospital environment.
EN 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line-to-line ±1 kV line-to-line
±2 kV line-to- ±2 kV line-to-
ground ground
Voltage dips, short Class 1 N/A Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions and commercial or hospital environment. If the user of
voltage variations on NOTE: Unit the X4C requires continued operation during
power supply input complies when power mains interruptions, it is recommended that
lines. used with an the X4C be powered from an uninterruptible power
uninterruptible supply or battery.
EN 61000-4-11 power supply.
Power Frequency (50/ 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
60 Hz) Magnetic Field levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical
EN 61000-4-8

Conducted RF Level 2 Level 2 Portable and mobile RF communications

equipment should be used no closer to any part of
EN 61000-4-6 3 Vrms 150 kHz 3 Vrms 150 kHz the X4C, including cables, than the recommended
to 80 MHz to 80 MHz separation distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance:
d = 1.17 p
d = 0.35 p 80 MHz to 800 MHz

Level 2 Level 2
Radiated RF d = 0.7 p 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/ms 80 MHz 3 V/ms 80 MHz
EN 61000-4-3/ to 2.5 GHz to 2.5 GHz where p is the maximum output power rating of the
EN 50204 transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer, and d is the
recommended separation distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
¹should be within range. ²Interference may occur in
the vicinity of equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected
by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
3
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the X4C should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the X4C. 4Over a frequency
range of 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

Recommended Separation Distances Between Portable and Mobile RF Communications Equipment and the
X4C
The X4C is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled.
The customer or the user of the X4C can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum
distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the X4C as
recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter
Rated Maximum Output [m]
Power of Transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
[W]
d = 1.17 p d = 0.35 p d = 0.7 p
0.01 0.12 0.04 0.07
0.1 0.37 0.11 0.22
1 1.17 0.35 0.7
10 3.69 1.11 2.21
100 11.67 3.5 7
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in
metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where p is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 3: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
X3C and X3G Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration

The X3C and X3G are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the X3C or X3G should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)

The X3C are X3G Digital Radiography Unit are intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms).
Emission Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
Radiated Emissions Class A The X3C and X3G use RF energy only for its internal function.
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to
EN 55011/CISPR 11 cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.


Harmonic Emissions Class A The X3C and X3G are suitable for use in all establishments
other than domestic and those directly connected to the public
EN 61000-3-2 low-voltage.
Voltage Fluctuations/ Class A
Flicker Emissions
EN 61000-3-3
Conducted Emissions Class A
EN 55011/CISPR 11

The X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit are intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms).
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
Test Level Level
Electrostatic Discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile.If
floors are covered with synthetic material, the
EN 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±8 kV air relative humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical Fast Level 3 Level 3 Mains power quality should be that of a typical
Transient/Burst commercial or hospital environment.
±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power
EN 61000-4-4 supply supply
±1 kV for I/O ±1 kV for I/O

lines lines
Surge Level 2 Level 2 Mains power quality should be that of a typical

EN 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line-to-line ±1 kV line-to-line
±2 kV line-to- ±2 kV line-to-
ground ground
Voltage dips, short Class 1 N/A Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions and commercial or hospital environment. If the user of
voltage variations on NOTE: Unit the X3C or X3G require continued operation during
power supply input complies when power mains interruptions, it is recommended that
lines. used with an the X3C or X3G be powered from an
uninterruptible uninterruptible power supply or battery.
EN 61000-4-11 power supply.
Power Frequency (50/ 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
60 Hz) Magnetic Field levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical
EN 61000-4-8


Conducted RF Level 2 Level 2 Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part of
EN 61000-4-6 3 Vrms 150 kHz 3 Vrms 150 kHz the X3C or X3G, including cables, than the
to 80 MHz to 80 MHz recommended separation distance calculated from
the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter. Recommended separation distance:
and and
and
d = 1.17 p
d = 0.35 p 80 MHz to 800 MHz

Level 2 Level 2
Radiated RF d = 0.7 p 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m 80 kHz to 3 V/m 80 MHz to
EN 61000-4-3/EN 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz where p is the maximum output power rating of the
50204 transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer, and d is the
recommended separation distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
¹should be within range. ²Interference may occur in
the vicinity of equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: 80 MHz and 800MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
3
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the X3C or X3G is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance level above, the X3C or X3G should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the X3C or
X3G. 4Over a frequency range of 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

Recommended Separation Distances Between Portable and Mobile RF Communications Equipment and
the X3C and X3G
The X3C and X3G are intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the X3C and X3G can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and
the X3C and X3G as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter
[m]
Rated Maximum Output Power of Transmitter
[W] 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 1.17 p d = 0.35 p d = 0.7 p
0.01 0.12 0.04 0.07
0.1 0.37 0.11 0.22
1 1.17 0.35 0.7
10 3.69 1.11 2.21
100 11.67 3.5 7
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in
metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where p is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 3: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE 4: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.

NOTES
PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDE
Included is the following

2.1 “Safety Warnings and Notices”
2.2 “Environment Planning”
2.3 “Electrical Requirements”
2.4 “Mounting Requirements”
2.5 “1600 Site Planning Guide”
2.6 “Data Connections”
2.7 “Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements”
2.8 “Required Tools”

2 - 2 • Pre-Installation Guide •
0.1 February 28, 2007 Module created using existing information.

Pre-Installation Guide • Safety Warnings and Notices • 2-3
2.1 Safety Warnings and Notices
2.1.1 Electrical Safety
DANGER! According to MDD/93/42/CEE, this unit is equipped with EMC filters.

Improper grounding may produce electrical shock to the user.
WARNING! Ensure the voltage switch at the back of the computer is set to the appropriate
setting prior to the connection of the equipment.
NOTE: All equipment supplied by IDC (excluding computer workstations) shall be

electrically hardwired at the customer site. The customer shall provide an
electrical disconnect that can be locked in the open position to allow the
equipment to be safely locked out for servicing. Failure to provide a lockable
disconnect will prevent the equipment from being serviced and maintained in a
safe fashion.
NOTE: Neutral is required for proper functioning of the unit.
2.1.2 Equipment Safety
WARNING! Before anchoring the unit, check that the wall and the anchoring system are
strong enough (750 lbs of pull force) to ensure a safe installation. Some non-
brick walls may require additional anchorage installation.
NOTE: The Detector Head must sit for 24 hours in the room if there is a ±5.5°C (±10°F)
difference in temperature from transporting or storaging. This must be done prior
to turning on the unit. The Detector Head is shipped in its own crate and should
remain crated until time of installation.
NOTE: The Detector Head is shipped separately in it’s own crate. To prevent accidental
damage, the Detector Head should remain crated until the time of installation.
NOTE: To fully operate the 1600 unit, the room must have a ceiling height of at least
274.32 cm (9 ft).

2 - 4 • Pre-Installation Guide • Environment Planning
2.2 Environment Planning

Before installing the 1600 system, the site must meet specific environmental conditions as
outlined below.
2.2.1 Site Inspection
Before installation
• Verify the loading dock has proper equipment and storage space to receive the equipment.
• Review any paperwork requirements for shipping and receiving.
• Verify the presence of crate disposal facilities.
• Verify all doorways, hallways, and elevators between the receiving dock and the x-ray
room can physically accommodate all the equipment and crates.
• Verify the room meets the minimum size requirements.
• Verify that the selected room has a floor of sufficient structural strength to support the
unit. Check local building codes for seismic or other conditions that may apply.
2.2.2 Temperature and Humidity
The 1600 is based upon CCD technology and must be operated in a stable temperature
environment. The environment must be maintained within the limits specified in this section
so the equipment does not exhibit image quality control problems or equipment failure.
2.2.2.1 Operating Conditions

The 16001600 requires no additional air conditioning when installed in a modern commercial
structure.
The temperature range for the control system is 15–30°C (60–86°F).
The operating humidity range is 0 to 70% non-condensing relative humidity.
The 1600 emits approximately 850 BTU per hour (250 W) under maximum operating
conditions.
The maximum continues heat dissipation 216 W (without air circulator)
The maximum continues heat dissipation 432 W (with air circulator)
Loading factors for leakage radiation 150 kV, 4.0 mA
NOTE: Neutral is required for proper functioning of the unit.
2.2.2.2 Storage and Shipping Conditions

The proper storage and transportation temperature range for the equipment is limited to
between -40°C and +50°C (-40°F and 122°F). The non-condensing relative humidity for the
equipment must remain between 0 and 70% during storage and transportation.

Pre-Installation Guide • Environment Planning • 2-5
NOTE: The Detector Head is shipped separately in it’s own crate. To prevent accidental
damage, the Detector Head should remain crated until the time of installation.
2.2.3 Safe Disposal
The 1600 does not contain any materials considered to be dangerous goods under U.S.
Federal Transportation Regulations. The X3C and X4C, does however, contain a sealed
Cesium Iodide Scintillator. Comply with local regulations to dispose of the system.

2 - 6 • Pre-Installation Guide • Electrical Requirements
2.3 Electrical Requirements

The following electrical requirements are required before installation can be completed.
2.3.1 Stand
The 1600 tower requires the following dedicated power supplies:

Line Voltage 240 VAC 2.5 kVa
Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Momentary (surge) current 4 A (240 VAC only)
Standby current 3 A (240 VAC only)
Signal and power cables exit the back of the tower through two conduits located at the base of
the unit. One conduit that houses the incoming AC power cable is a 1” cable connector. The
second connector allows for all signal cables for digital input and output.
Fuses
Fuses are integrated with power supply modules.
Camera Power Supply: F1 = 4 A/125 VAC
F3 = 4 A/125 VAC
F4/F6 = 2.5 A/250 VAC
TEC Power Supply: F1 = 1.5 A /50 VAC
The main power cable for the 1600 must be permanently connected (hard wired) to the power
source. The unit may not be connected by means of a plug/receptacle.
2.3.2 Generator Power
Systems ordered with the 80 kW generator require a dedicated AC power supply. These units
are ordered with a 480 VAC configuration.
Line Voltage 480 VAC +/- 10% Three phase
Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Momentary current 150 A
Standby current 3A
2.3.3 Workstation
The image acquisition workstation can be powered from either a 100 - 120 V approx 11.4 A at
50 - 60 Hz or 200-240 V approx 6.1 A at 50 - 60 Hz. The UPS (Uninterruptable Power
Supply) and power protection for the workstation are provided with the system only if the
acquisition computer is purchased from Imaging Dynamics.

Pre-Installation Guide • Mounting Requirements • 2-7
2.4 Mounting Requirements

The 1600 is anchored to the floor with drilled-in floor anchors and anchored to the wall
with supportive backing (minimum of 1.5 inch of wood backing).
This equipment is supplied with bolt holes for anchoring it to the floor and/or wall. Each
installation shall be evaluated by a qualified engineer to ensure the type of anchoring
system used complies with local codes and regulations. Imaging Dynamics Company,
Ltd. (IDC) does not assume any responsibility for the anchoring system used to affix the
equipment to the floor and/or wall regardless of its geographical location, floor/wall
structure or anchoring technique used. However, IDC will supply critical information with
this equipment such as the location of the centre of gravity and other critical dimensions
required to perform the engineering analysis.
The tower requires a level location that is free of dirt and contamination.
The tower requires a minimum of 6 inches of rear clearance for service access.

2 - 8 • Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide
2.5 1600 Site Planning Guide
2.5.1 1600 Weights and Dimensions

Table 2-1
Dimensions Container Content

Crate or
L x W x H cm Contents Weight kg Weight kg
Carton #
(in) (lbs) (lbs)
Sedecal x Plus LP System (includes the stand,

236 x 87 x 109 481 kg 443 kg
1 mounting bracket, stand covers, collimator, high
(93 x 35 x 43) (1060 lbs) (976 lbs)
tension cables, display assembly)
95 x 64 x 69 Control Box 80 kg 73 kg
2
(38 x 25 x 27) (176 lbs) (161 lbs)
124 x 66 x 99 101 kg
(49 x 26 x 39) (222 lbs)
Detector Head (weight and dimensions vary 75 kg
3 or or
depending on crate construction) (165 lbs)
119 x 76 x 74 88 kg
(47 x 30 x 29) (194 lbs)
122 x 82 x73 Generator, HT Cables, Pedestal 136 kg 113 kg
4
(48 x 32 x 29) (299 lbs) (248 lbs)
119 x 60 x 79 Skins, Grids, and Control Pad Bracket 53 kg 44 kg
5
(47 x 24 x 31) (117 lbs) (97 lbs)
121 x 60 x 76 Computer, UPS, Grid Holder Kits, X-ray Tube, 87 kg 78 kg
6
(48 x 24 x 30) Accessories (192 lbs) (172 lbs)
243 x 88 x 15 Carbon Fibre Transparent Table (Sedecal) 43 kg 34 kg
7 (optional)
(96 x 35 x 6) (95 lbs) (75 lbs)
2.5.2 Facility Requirements
All requirements in the Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements checklist must be complete.
See Section 2.7, “Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements” Exceptions must be approved by
IDC Service Management.
2.5.2.1 1600 Power Requirements
NOTE: All equipment supplied by IDC (excluding computer workstations) shall be

electrically hardwired at the customer site. The customer shall provide an electrical
disconnect that can be locked in the open position to allow the equipment to be safely
locked out for servicing. Failure to provide a lockable disconnect will prevent the
equipment from being serviced and maintained in a safe fashion.

Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide • 2-9

Table 2-2
Stand Power Box 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 15 A
Detector Head Power Jerome Power Supply:

Distribution Module
• Input: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A
• Output: 16 VDC, 5.0 A
Generator 480 VAC 3 phase 110 A (for standard 64 kW generators)
Technologist Workstation • 100/120 VAC 11.4 A at 50/60 Hz

• 200/240 VAC 6.1 A at 50/60 Hz
Highspeed access via VPN or equivalent to facilitate remote technical support
VPN is required before installation begins.
100 Base-T Ethernet Service with Internet and Incoming and Outgoing Ftp Service
2.5.2.2 Site Preparation Requirements

The unit must be installed in a dust-free environment. All site renovations and
preparations, such as interior decorating, heating and plumbing must be completed before
installation.

2 - 10 • Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide
2.5.3 Room Dimension Requirements
Figure 2-1
286 cm (113 in)

3
130 cm (51 in)

2
198 cm (78 in) 217 cm (85 in)

420 cm (165 in)
1 Generator and Control Box
2 Patient Room
3 Exam Room
4 Control Room
NOTE: To fully operate the 1600 unit, the room must have a ceiling height of at least 274.32
cm (9 ft).
WARNING! Before anchoring the unit, check that the wall and the anchoring system are
strong enough (750 lbs of pull force) to ensure a safe installation. Some non-
brick walls may require additional anchorage installation.

Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide • 2 - 11
Figure 2-2
31 cm (+/- 2.5 cm)
30º 12 in (+/- 1 in)
45º 25º 90º
264.5 cm (104 in)

30º
224 cm (88 in)

129 cm (50.8 in)
Reception Area
70 cm (27.5 in)
Reference Axis 40 cm (15.7 in)
125 cm (49 in)
155 cm (61 in)
SID = 100 cm (39 in)

SID = 180 cm (71 in)
245 cm (96.5 in)

2 - 12 • Pre-Installation Guide • Data Connections
2.6 Data Connections

The 1600 system is based upon a Windows XP operating system and uses DICOM 3.0
transport protocols for connection to external printing, storage, and viewing devices..
The image acquisition station can be serviced through optional remote diagnostics
capabilities. This feature requires a data link (Ethernet connection) for accessing the
computer.
Communication with the hospital network is accomplished through a 10/100/1000 mbit/s
Ethernet network interface card (NIC) connected with a CAT 5 patch cable using a RJ-45
connector.
The image acquisition computer is a standard mid-tower chassis configuration, approximately
43 cm high x 18 cm wide x 44 cm deep (17 in x 7 in x 17 in).
2.6.1 Computer
WARNING! Ensure the voltage switch at the back of the computer is set to the appropriate
setting prior to the connection of the equipment.
The 1600 is shipped with a computer that meets the following specifications:
• Intel Pentium 4
• 3.2 GHz processor
• 2GB RAM minimum
• 2 x 120 GB mirrored hard drives
• AGP video card (DVI or VGA capable)
• 21” colour flat panel screen with 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution.
• 10/100/1000 mbit/s NIC (network interface card)
• Windows XP operating system
It is recommended that a Dell Computer that has been certified to an IEC 60950 standard be
connected for operation of the IDC equipment. Equivalent computers are acceptable provided
they have been tested against the appropriate country specific IEC 60950 equivalent.
It is recommended that a Liebert Powersure PSA be connected for operation of the computer
system. An equivalent UPS is acceptable provided it has been tested against the appropriate
country specific standards; e.g., UL 1778, CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 107.1, EN 50091-1-1.

Pre-Installation Guide • Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements • 2 - 13
2.7 Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements

(Prior to installation commencement)
Interior Requirements
_____ Walls painted or covered.
_____ Floors tiled or carpeted.
_____ Baseboards installed.
_____ Grid tiles on ceiling.
Electrical, Heating, and Plumbing Requirements

_____ Lighting fixtures installed and operational.
_____ All electrical convenience, conduit, raceway, and junction boxes installed.
_____ Incoming mains power operational and available at the room disconnect.
_____ 115 VAC convenience outlets operational.
_____ All contractor supplied cables pulled and terminated.
_____ All plumbing installed and finished.
_____ All HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air conditioning) installed and operational
as per specifications.
Structural and Architectural Requirements

_____ All channels, pipes, beams, and/or other supporting devices should be level,
parallel, and free of lateral or longitudinal movements.
_____ Computer floor, wood floor, casework, and bulkheads are installed and
finished.
Environmental Requirements
_____ A dust-free environment in and around the procedure room.
_____ Site is free of asbestos, dry wall dust, and other toxic substances.
_____ Radiation protection has been certified.
Communication Requirements
_____ Network drop for IDC workstation.
_____ VPN access.
_____ Network operational with connection to PACS (send destinations) and printers
as required.

2 - 14 • Pre-Installation Guide • Required Tools
2.8 Required Tools

Supplies:
• Tie wraps
• X-ray tube grease (Wacker P4, Dow Corning #4, or equivalent)
• Masking tape
• Alcohol cleaning agent
Equipment required for an IDC installation:

• Standard hand tool kit (assorted screwdrivers, pliers, wrenches, wire cutters, measuring
tape, etc)
• Steel ruler (18 inch or longer)
• Metric and imperial allen keys
• Four foot digital level (spirit level or inclinometer)
• 1/2” Hammer drill
• Digital Multimeter
• Unfors Dose Meter
•Model: Mult-o-meter, Type 577L or equivalent
• Cordless drill with assorted bits
• Compressed air (non-residue)
• Line pair target
•Nuclear Associates/Fluke Biomedical: Part No. 07-538-1000
• Copper/aluminum filters
•The purity required is: Copper 99.9% Aluminum 90.0%
•Goodfellow:
•1 mm Copper: Part No. CU000747/35
•0.5 mm Copper: Part No. CU000743/33
•1 mm Aluminum: Part No. AL000700/11
•0.5 mm Aluminum: Part No. AL000645/7
• Plastic Container with 23 cm water (collapsible water jug)
• Low contrast phantom
•Nuclear Associates/Fluke Biomedical: Part No. 07-649-1169
• Genware software and a 9-pin female-female null modem cable (CPI generator only)
• Flathead precision screwdriver
• Appropriate wall and floor anchors (dependent on local code)
• Certificate of Calibration for all test equipment brought on site
• FDA-2579 form (USA only)

Pre-Installation Guide • Required Tools • 2 - 15
• Anti-static strap, Bystat BWS 3000 or equivalent
2.8.1 Ordering information:
1. Nuclear Associates/Fluke Biomedical

100 Voice Road
Carle Place, NY
11514-0349
USA
Tel: 1-888-466-8257
Website: http://www.flukebiomedical.com
2. Goodfellow
237 Lancaster Ave.
Suite 252
Devon Pennsylvania
19333-1594
Tel: 1-610-688-6131
Website: http://www.goodfellow.com/csp/active/gfHome.csp
3. Unfors Instruments (US office)
123 Litchfield Road
New Milford, CT
06776
Tel: 1-866-4UNFORS
Website: http://www.unfors.com

NOTES
1600 INSTALLATION

3.2 “Quick Installation Overview”
3.3 “1600 Installation Checklist”
3.4 “Unpacking”
3.5 “Pre-installation Check”
3.6 “Stand Installation”
3.7 “Stand Control Box Installation”
3.8 “Generator Installation”
3.9 “Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet”
3.10 “X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation”
3.11 “To Cable the Stand”
3.12 “Detector Head Installation”
3.13 “Power Distribution Module (PDM)”
3.14 “Cabling the Detector Head and PDM”
3.15 “Computer Installation”
3.16 “Powering up the 1600 System”
3.17 “Trigger Board Adjustments”
3.18 “Checking Movements and Installing the Covers”
3.19 “Leveling Checks”

3 - 2 • 1600 Installation •

1600 Installation • Safety Warnings and Notices • 3-3
3.1.1 Service Personnel Safety
DANGER! Undertable and chest positioning are provided with automatic movement of
the C-arm. Ensure there are no obstructions within range of the C-arm.
WARNING! Service must only be carried out by qualified, trained service personnel.
Physical injury or damage to the equipment can result from untrained
personnel attempting maintenance without supervision.
WARNING! The installer is responsible for system installation and set up which will
allow the operator to optimally use the system.
WARNING! Ensure the x-ray tube is placed into the appropriate working position with the
reference axis (x-ray beam) directed towards the reception area.
WARNING! Ensure there are no objects on the C-arm and Detector Head surface before
powering on the unit.
WARNING! Operators and/or patients may not be in the room if equipment covers are
removed for routine maintenance.
WARNING! Routine maintenance may not be performed on medical or non-medical

equipment by service personnel if the operator and/or patient is within the
room.
WARNING! At least four people are required to remove all heavy components from the
shipping pallet.
CAUTION! Do not allow service personnel to pull themselves up from a sitting or lying
position with the patient handles or any part of the unit.
NOTE: All mains supply cables are allowed to be changed only by service personnel
trained by the supplier.
NOTE: The x-ray equipment, when installed shall permit the use of the focal spot to skin
distances to be 45 cm or more in normal use.
3.1.2 Equipment Safety
WARNING! Although there are times when the camera stack will need to be removed, do
not attempt to remove the camera, lens, or scintillator from the Detector
Head. Attempting to tamper with the camera, lens or scintillator will void the
warranty.

3 - 4 • 1600 Installation • Safety Warnings and Notices
WARNING! Do not connect any Ion Chamber to the generator cabinet until you verify and
adjust the high voltage to the values required. Other voltage could damage the
Ion Chambers.
WARNING! The computer system must be located at least 1.5 meters away from the digital x-
ray detector.
WARNING! Do not supply the main power or turn on the Column/Stand Control Cabinet until
specifically instructed in this document.
WARNING! Verify that inverter configurations are in accordance to the installation

requirements. If not, refer to the inverter documentation to modify the
parameters.
CAUTION! The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely delicate and easily
damaged. Handle them carefully. Ensure the pins are straight and the splits in the
pins are open (parallel to sides).
CAUTION! Front LED Display can be damaged if not handled carefully.
NOTE: Power supply connections must be in compliance with Local Codes.
NOTE: Leave a working area around the equipment until installation is complete.
NOTE: Cables must be installed covered and should not be placed on the floor.
NOTE: Usually the Generator Cabinet is installed on the Control Box. If this is not the case,
refer to the Generator Service Manual.
NOTE: Use caution when handling the Fibre Optic Cable.
difference in temperature from transporting or storaging. This must be done prior to
turning on the unit. The Detector Head is shipped in its own crate and should remain
crated until time of installation.
NOTE: Ensure there are no cables in the imaging area.
NOTE: The Automatic Chest and Automatic Table buttons will require pressing and holding.
NOTE: Special care must be taken when handling and transporting of the Detector Head.
Critical alignments and focusing may be disturbed if the unit is handled improperly.
The detector head is very heavy; if positioning the Detector Head by hand, two
installers should support the head, while a third installer performs the connection.


WARNING! Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) are not to be used.
WARNING! Ensure any additional Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) or

extension cords are not connected to the system.
WARNING! Connect items as specified in the following installation procedures. Do not

connect any extraneous items, except for testing equipment to the system.
WARNING! The main power cable must be permanently connected (hard-wired) to the
power source. The unit may not be connected by means of a plug/receptacle.
WARNING! The Canadian Electrical Code require all external flexible cords to use hard
usage cabling.
WARNING! Remaining energy may exist when the equipment is switched off. Always
wait at least 15 seconds before working on the system.
WARNING! Ensure voltage switch is set to the appropriate setting prior to connection of
the equipment.
WARNING! In generators equipped with LV-DRAC, the LV_DRAC output can be as high
as 1000 Vrms. For safety reasons (to avoid electrical shocks), the Stator
Cable must be shielded and both ends of the shield must be connected to the
ground.
WARNING! Due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) problems, the IGBT’s heat sink is
not grounded. It is connected to the negative terminal of the input rectifier.
To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the input line is disconnected and the
capacitor bank is properly discharged before manipulating in the LV-DRAC.
CAUTION! After complete installation or service, measure protective earth.
CAUTION! Incoming line voltage is present on Terminal Strip TS4.
CAUTION! Ensure that the Stator Wires are properly connected. Before making any
exposure, check that the anode rotates correctly.
NOTE: Use system parts as specified in installation instructions and parts list.
NOTE: The computer must have the supplied ground strap connected to a reliable earth
point.

3 - 6 • 1600 Installation • Safety Warnings and Notices
3.1.4 Electrostatic Safety
CAUTION! Printed circuit boards contain highly sensitive electrostatic components requiring
special care in handling. Be sure to ground before making contact and place the
printed circuit boards only on a conductive surface.
CAUTION! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can occur
when handling any of its exposed electronic components if proper electro-static
discharge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that wrist straps are worn
and that these are properly connected to a suitable ground in the wall. Be
cautious when moving around to ensure the ESD protection does not become
disconnected. Damage from ESD may not be immediately apparent but will have
a serious affect on the images from the unit and may completely prevent
operation.
3.1.5 Radiation Safety
WARNING! When using x-ray accessories or other items that do not form part of the system,
possible adverse effects may arise. See Table 3-1 for the maximum attenuation
equivalent of possible materials located in the x-ray beam.
Table 3-1
Maximum Attenuation Equivalent

Item
mm Al
FRONT PANEL (POLYCARBONATE PAINTED) 1.2
PATIENT SUPPORT, MOVABLE, WITHOUT ARTICULATED JOINTS 1.7

(CARBON FIBER TABLETOP OF PATIENT SUPPORT WITH
WHEELS)
WARNING! The system is sold with the understanding that IDC, its agents, and
representatives are not liable for injury or damage that may result from the
overexposure of individuals to x-radiation.
IDC does not accept any responsibility for equipment that has not been serviced
and maintained in accordance with the instructions provided, including any
instructions that have been altered or modified.
CAUTION! Mobile telephones or other radiating equipment can interfere with the function of
the system, and can, therefore, be safety hazards.

3.1.6 Scintillator Safety for X3C and X4C
WARNING! The scintillator used in the X3C and X4C 1600 uses thallium doped cesium
iodide with a protective coating layer. It is not hazardous in its normal form.
When handling the material, use lint free gloves and treat it as you would a
delicate glass lens. Do not touch nor attempt to clean the yellow surface. If
the detector head is dropped, check to see if the scintillator is broken. If the
scintillator is broken or burned, hazardous dust or vapour may be formed.
Use a protective mask and gloves before handling material and limit
exposure to the minimum necessary to allow for bagging. Seal broken parts
in a sturdy, non-porous bag, label contents as containing thallium doped
cesium iodide, and contact Imaging Dynamics or local authorities for
direction regarding safe disposal.

3 - 8 • 1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview
3.2 Quick Installation Overview
IDC does not accept any responsibility for equipment that has not been serviced
and maintained in accordance with the instructions provided, including any
instructions that have been altered or modified.
WARNING! Service must only be carried out by qualified, trained service personnel. Physical
injury or damage to the equipment can result from untrained personnel
attempting maintenance without supervision.
CAUTION! Mobile telephones or other radiating equipment can interfere with the function of
the system, and can, therefore, be safety hazards.
1. Install Tube-collimator Support and Control Panel

(column laid on the pallet).
2. Install Column Upper Support in top rear of the

column. Mark and drill the anchoring holes, install the
Wall Support, and anchor the column to the wall and
floor. Wall Support
Column Upper Support
3. Install the Control Box and the Generator on it (if

applicable).
4. Perform cable connections from the Column harness
to the Control box as per schematics 54302080.
5. Install the X-ray tube and the Collimator. Then remove

the Safety Locking Rod.

1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview • 3-9
6. Turn on the column and position the C-arm in

horizontal position to ease the Detector Head
installation. Route the Detector Head cables through
the Arm and Column.
7. Install the Detector Head on the C-arm.
8. Perform the cable routing and connections as per

schematics 54302080 and IM--353.
3.2.1 Cable Routing

WARNING! The main power cable must be permanently connected (hard-wired) to the
power source. The unit may not be connected by means of a plug/receptacle.
WARNING! The Canadian Electrical Code require all external flexible cords to use hard
usage cabling.
NOTE: All mains supply cables are allowed to be changed only by service personnel
trained by the supplier.
NOTE: Ensure that all signal output and input parts are only used for connection with
their specified equipment.
NOTE: Cables must be installed covered and should not be placed on the floor.
Table 3-2
Cable Number From To Function
A8127-XX Column Harness J1 - URS PLUS Interface Cable

Interface BD A8124-07
(Interface Cable) (Control Box)
A8136--XX) Column Harness J3 - URS PLUS Supply Cable

(Supply Cable) (Control Box)
A8143-01 Column Harness J4 - URS PLUS Detec. Mot cable

Emergency Cable (Control Box)

3 - 10 • 1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview
Table 3-2
A3153--02 Power Line TS1-L1-L2/N, GND Power Supply Cable
Power Supply Cable (Control Box)
A338-XX Collimator TS1-2, TS1-1 and Collimator Lamp

GND power
Collimator Cable
URS PLUS Interface
BD A8124-07 (Control
Box)
A8183--XX Column Harness TS3 (TS3-1, TS3-2) Fans power supply.
Tube Fans Cable (Control Box) (optional)
Figure 3-1
J1 J3 TS1 J4
TS 3 TS1
Table 3-3
A8131-XX) Column Harness J1 (Connector Panel at Rot Motor Cable

Control Box)
Rot Motor Cable
(A8129-XX) Column Harness J2 (Connector Panel at Sid Motor Cable

Control Box)
Sid Motor Cable

1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview • 3 - 11
Table 3-3
A8160-XX) Column Harness J3 (Connector Panel at Brake-Height Motor

Control Box) Cable
Brake-H Motor Cable
A8143-01 Column Harness J4 (Connector Panel at Detec. Mot cable

Control Box)
Emergency Cable
A8155-01 Column Harness J5 (Connector Panel at Detec. Mot cable

Control Box)
Detec. Rot cable (only Motorized
Detector)
A8149-01 Column Harness J6 (Connector Panel at Detec. Mot cable (only

Control Box) Motorized Detector)
Detec. Mot cable
A8121-02 Back of Receptor J2 to J2 Receptor Overlay Cable

Back
Overlay Cable
Other
Emergency Stop wires located at the Back of the Receptor are bridged (3/6 and 4/5 to allow
motion during installation), remove bridge and connect wires in Terminal Strip TS4 (at the Back of
the Receptor).
GND cable from Control Box to GND stud of the Column.
HV Cables to be connected to HV Tank.
If Applicable AEC and/or Bucky Cables connected to Generator.
Special Receptor Signals: For Receptor Signals to be connected to Image System or to Control
Box refer to Schematics Section.
Figure 3-2

3 - 12 • 1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist
3.3 1600 Installation Checklist
WARNING! The installer is responsible for system installation and set up which will allow the
operator to optimally use the system.
CAUTION! Do not allow service personnel to pull themselves up from a sitting or lying
position with the patient handles or any part of the unit.
NOTE: Use system parts as specified in installation instructions and parts list.
1. Unpacking
_____Column
_____Control Box
_____Mobile Table
_____Compact Generator
_____Unpacking Computer
_____Skins
2. Stand Installation
_____Install the Support of the Tube-Collimator Assembly
_____Drill the Column anchoring holes
_____Connect both connectors marked J2
_____Place the Wall Support
3. Stand Control Box Installation
_____Complete
4. Generator Cabinet Installation
_____Mount High Tension Transformer
_____Mount cabinet
_____P2-Shield (2 thin wires)
_____P1 and P3
_____Ground wire
_____Connector J1
5. Generator Installation
_____Connect Mains Power
_____Console Console data
_____Connect console power
_____Connect AEC cable

1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist • 3 - 13
_____Route and connect door interface

_____Route and connect rotor wire
_____Connect High Tension
6. Wiring the Stand to Stand Control Cabinet. Refer to schematics 54302080 and IM-358
_____Verify Inverter Configuration
_____Connect the ground cables
_____Terminal Strip TS1 Power cables
7. X-ray Tube and Collimator Installation
_____Mount Xray tube
_____Mount ring
_____Loosen collimator mounting screws
_____Center collimator
_____Tighten collimator mounting screws
8. Cabling of the Stand
_____Remove collimator and tube covers
_____Connect the Stator / Thermostat wires
_____Connect collimator power
_____Reinstall the X-Ray Tube and Collimator covers
_____Install the Front Housing
_____Connect the HV Cables of the X-ray Tube
_____Fasten the Stator and HV cables to the Upper Carriage of the C-arm
9. Detector Head Installation
_____Power up Stand
_____Remove shipping bolt
_____Position Arm
_____Attach Head
_____If installing an X3C Detector Head, reverse the camera stack and Detector
Head support frame.
10. Installing the PDM (Power Distribution Module)
_____Vertically mount the PDM on the mounting plate, ensuring the fan is on the top
of the unit.
_____Connect TEC cable
_____Connect computer serial cable
_____Connect Grid Detect cable

3 - 14 • 1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist
_____Connect computer cable to PC RS232

_____Connect power cable to PDM power supply
11. Route the Detector Cables
_____Identify the cable ends
_____Tie the cables
_____Check both cable ends pass through the cable access
_____Route through the cable access of the Detector Assembly
_____Remove the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex)
_____Attach all the Detector Cables to the cable guide.
_____Route the Detector Cables through lower side of the C-arm
_____Route the Detector Cables towards the Control Box
_____Check cable hose length to enable movements
_____Reinstall the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex)
12. Wire Detector Head
_____Remove the covers of the Detector Assembly.
_____Handle Panel cables
_____Emergency Stop wires
_____Connect the camera Cables
_____Connect Fiber Optic cable
_____Camera Power
_____TEC Power
_____TEC Sensor
_____Grid cable
_____AEC cable
13. Install Computer
_____Connect Computer components
_____Connect Fiber Optic Cable
_____Connect Cat 5 (TEC/Grid) Cable
14. Power Up 1600 Head and Stand
_____Turn on computer
_____Turn on Stand Power
_____Turn on Head Power
_____Check Link Lights
_____Check that all controls and movements

1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist • 3 - 15
15. Trigger Board Adjustments

_____Complete
16. Install the Detector Covers
_____Complete
17. Install the Base and Top Covers of the Column
_____Complete
18. Apply power to generator
_____Complete

3 - 16 • 1600 Installation • Unpacking
3.4 Unpacking
The system is shipped in several crates to facilitate transportion and installation. Inspect all
shipping containers for signs of damage. If damage is found, notify the carrier or his agent
immediately.
3.4.1 Unpacking the Column and Control Box
Place the shipping pallet near its final site in the room and remove the laterals. See Figure 3-3.
Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes, and bags until all parts are
accounted for, as listed on the packing list. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-3
WARNING! At least four people are required to remove all heavy components from the
shipping pallet.
Figure 3-4

1600 Installation • Unpacking • 3 - 17
3.4.2 Equipment Verification
• When the equipment is unpacked, verify that all items on the customer order are
present, and ensure the hardware and internal wiring is firmly connected.
• Check the part number / serial number of each component with its identification label.
• Inspect all pieces for visible damages. If any damaged parts are found, repair or order
replacement parts to prevent unnecessary delays in installation.
3.4.3 Unpacking the Compact Generator
1. Open the Generator shipping box and remove the Interconnection Cables, Cabinet
Cover and other furnished parts. Do not discard any packing material such as
envelopes, boxes, and bags until all parts are accounted for, as listed on the packing list.
WARNING! At least two people are required to remove all heavy components from the
shipping pallet.
2. Remove the Generator Cabinet from the shipping pallet and place it near its site in the
room.
3. Verify all items are present and undamaged.

3 - 18 • 1600 Installation • Pre-installation Check
3.5 Pre-installation Check
WARNING! Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) are not to be used.
WARNING! Ensure any additional Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) or extension

cords are not connected to the system.
WARNING! Connect items as specified in the following installation procedures. Do not

connect any extraneous items, except for testing equipment to the system.
Before beginning installation, inspect the site and verify the x-ray room complies with Pre-
installation requirements, such as
• Incoming Line.
• Main Switch and Safety Devices.
• Conduits.
• Space Requirements
See “1600 Site Planning Guide” on page 2 - 8.

1600 Installation • Stand Installation • 3 - 19
3.6 Stand Installation
NOTE: Leave a working area around the equipment until installation is complete.
NOTE: Perform the installation in the order described below.
WARNING! Do not remove the Safety Locking Rod from the central carriage until
specifically instructed in this document. See Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5
Safety Locking Rod

(Central Carriage)
WARNING! Do not supply the main power or turn on the column / control box until
specifically instructed in this document.
1. With the Column laid on the Pallet, install the Support of the Tube-Collimator
Assembly / Control Panel to the Upper Carriage of the C-arm using the four Safety
Screws installed in the carriage. All the Control Panel wires, except the SID Cable
(A8128-02), are factory connected. Connect both connectors marked J2.
See Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6
Support of
Tube-Collimator
Assembly
SID Cable (A8128-02)

(Connector J2-J2)
Safety Screws
Upper Carriage of the C-arm

3 - 20 • 1600 Installation • Stand Installation
2. Carefully mark and drill the Column anchoring holes on the floor and wall. See Figure .
The Shipping Bracket may be used for marking floor anchorages.
10.5 cm (4.13 in)
17 cm (6.69 in)
217.5 cm (85.63 in)
B
30 cm (11.85 in)
20 cm (8.03 in) 22 cm (8.66 in)
30 cm (11.73 in)
A 6 Wall Anchoring Holes for Screws (Diameter 0.8 cm [0.31 in])
B 4 Wall Anchoring Holes for Screws (Diameter 0.8 cm [0.31 in])

1600 Installation • Stand Installation • 3 - 21
Figure 3-7

3 - 22 • 1600 Installation • Stand Installation
3. Install the Wall Support on the wall with the screws, washers, and nuts provided. See
Figure 3-8.
4. With the Column laid flat, install the Column Upper Support in the top of the Column with
the screws, washers, and nuts provided.
Figure 3-8
Wall Support
Stand Upper Support
5. Stand the Column vertically and position it at its final site in the room. It is important to
place the Wall Support above the Column Upper Support. Using a post level, ensure the
stand is level horizontally and vertically.
WARNING! At least four people are required to perform this action.
6. Anchor the Column Upper Support to the Wall Support with the bolts, washers, and nuts
supplied.
7. Perform the leveling adjustments on the Column Base and on the Column Upper Support.
Ensure that the Column is correctly leveled and firmly tighten the Column. Once the
Column is leveled, firmly tighten the Column Upper Support to the wall support.
8. Anchor the Column Base to the floor. Ensure that the Column is firmly anchored.

1600 Installation • Stand Control Box Installation • 3 - 23
3.7 Stand Control Box Installation

Figure 3-9
Back Cover
Upper Cable Access
(HV cables,
stator cables)
69 cm (27 in)
Compact Generator
60 cm (24 in)
Stand Control Cabinet
Lateral Cable Access

Floor Cable Access
(Raceway)
59 c 9 in)
m (23 ( 1
in) cm 6.5 cm (2.5 in)
49
46 cm (18 in)
5.2 cm (2 in)
3.7 cm (1.4 in)
2.1 cm (0.8 in)
Radius
0.95 cm (0.37 in)
2.1 cm (0.8 in)

2.8 cm (1.1 in)
5 cm (2 in) Anchoring holes

3 - 24 • 1600 Installation • Stand Control Box Installation
3.7.1 To Install the Control Box
1. Place the Control Box in its final position in the room, considering
• the length of the Column Harness (approximately 1.5 m) running from the Column to the
Control Box
• the length of the High Voltage Cables (X-Ray Tube -- HV Transformer in the Generator
Cabinet)
• the C-arm movements
2. Level the Control Box using the adjustable leveling legs. Keep the base at the maximum
distance from the floor.
Seismic areas and other conditions require the Control Box to be firmly secured to the floor
through the mounting holes at its base. In this case, place the four spacers (provided) under
the base and secure them to the floor. Keep the four Leveling Legs at the same height as the
spacers. See Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10
Spacers of use in seismic areas
Cable Access
Adjustable leveling legs

1600 Installation • Generator Installation • 3 - 25
3.8 Generator Installation
3.8.1 Generator Cabinet Installation
NOTE: Usually the Generator Cabinet is installed on the Control Box. If this is not the
case, refer to the Generator Service Manual.
1. Assemble the Back Cover for the Generator Cabinet to the upper side of the Control
Box using two M6x20 screws (supplied). See Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11
Back Cover
Fixing Screws
2. Remove the four Adjustable Leveling Legs from the base of the Generator Cabinet.
NOTE: At least two people are required for this operation.
3. Hang the Generator Cabinet on the Back Cover and secure it to the Control Box using
four M6x20 screws (supplied). Fix the two screws that join the rear side of the Cabinet
to the Back Cover. See Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.

3 - 26 • 1600 Installation • Generator Installation
Figure 3-12
Back Cover
Hook
Generator Cabinet
Fixing Screws
Figure 3-13
Cable Access to the Generator Cabinet

(HV Cables, Stator/Thermostat, AEC)
Emergency Switch –Off Button
ON/OFF Switch

WARNING! The High Voltage Transformer must be secured with its anchoring plates inside
the cabinet to prevent P1, P2 and P3 from shorting to the cabinet’s frame.
4. In some cases, due to transportation safety requirements, the HV Transformer is shipped

out of the Generator Cabinet. Install it inside the Cabinet (upper area) and secure it with the
respective anchors or plates.
5. Connect the following cables from the Power Module to the corresponding terminals on the
HV Transformer:
• P2-Shield (2 thin wires), P1 and P3. Take care to connect these cables to the stud-brass ter-
minals. Use two wrenches to tighten the nuts and avoid twisting the studs.
• Ground wire to Ground stud.
• Connector J1.
WARNING! Do not supply the main power until specifically instructed to do so in this
manual.
The main storage capacitors retain a large portion of their charge for
approximately three minutes after the unit is turned off.
3.8.2 Generator Cable Connections
NOTE: For more information about electrical requirements and cable connections, refer to
the 3.5 “Pre-installation Check” on page 3-18.
NOTE: See “System Interconnections” at the end of this document. Identification of some
terminal connections (TB, TS), boards, etc. in this document (text and schematics)
may have a prefix number which indicates the module number in the equipment (e.g.,
TS2 as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2).
Some safety devices such as Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door
Interlock Switch are supplied and installed by the customer. Verify that safety devices have
been properly installed and routed.

3.8.3 Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet
Before connecting the cables inside the Generator Cabinet, route and secure the cables as
follows:
1. Route all cables over the Fastening Bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet Frame and
through the Cable Outlet at the rear of Cabinet Cover. See Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14
Cables Outlet
2. Route the Power Line Cables internally along the rear of the Cabinet before connecting
the cables to the Ground Terminals and Input Line Fuses.
3. Route the Stator and Interconnections Cables internally through the Cabinet near the
Input Transformer. See Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16.
4. Interface the Generator with the Workstation. See Figure 3-25.
5. Connect all cables as indicated. See 3.8.11 “Virtual Console (PC)” on page 3-34.
6. Secure all cables to the Fastening Bar using cable ties. See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-15
Stator and Interconnections
Cable Entrance
Cable Ties
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer Power Line Cables
Ground Terminals HV Cables
Input Line Fuses Stator and

Power Line Cables Interconnections Cables
Entrance

Figure 3-16
Input Transformer
Stator and Interconnections
Cable Entrances
Power Line
Cables Entrance
Line Input Fuses
Figure 3-17
Power Line Cord
in Compact-ESM Genrator Cable Ties
Cable Ties
Line Terminal in 1 TB-1

Cable Entrance
3.8.4 Power Line Connection
3.8.4.1 Compact Generators
CAUTION! The generator is permanently connected to the power line and powered on unless
the safety switch installed in the room’s electrical cabinet is off. When the
generator is powered, the neon (green) light located on the transformer 6T2
(generator cabinet) is on.
Internal parts of the generator (line fuses, etc.) are permanently powered on
through the power line, although the control console is off. Ensure the safety

switch is off before handling any internal part of the equipment. Do not
power on the generator until specifically instructed in this manual.
1. Verify that the power supply line is OFF in the Room Electrical Cabinet.
2. The power supply line should be sized in accordance with specifications for the
Generator model defined in the Site Planning Guide. Feeder wire sizes are specified in
this document relative to the power supply requirements and the wire length. Verify
that the power line voltage is correct. Verify the phase connections between the
Generator and the Room Electrical Cabinet are correct.
3. Cut the cable to the appropriate length and remove the insulation from both ends of the
power and ground wires.
4. Make the following connections:
For Three Phase generators, connect the power wires L1, L2 and L3 to the fuse holders
of F3, F4 and F5 (right side of the cabinet) and the ground wire to the Ground terminal
in the cabinet (above these fuses).
For 80 kW generators, the power supply line should be 480VAC. If the generator is
supplied with an external step-up autotransformer, it will include cables to connect the
autotransformer to the generator cabinet. The power line should be connected to the
autotransformer terminals. (Verify the phases are correct.) See Figure 3-18.
Figure 3-18
480 V
415 V
400 V
380 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
480 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
480 V

Step-up Transformer
Input: 380 / 400 / 415 VAC. Three-phase with Neutral
Output: 480 VAC. Three-phase
Maximum Power Output: 80 kW. 10% duty cycle (approx. 5 seconds / minute)
Rising Temperature: 40° C
1. Verify that the Emergency Switch has been connected to the Room Electrical Cabinet so
that it cuts the power to the generator when it is switched off.
2. Depending on the nominal line voltage, verify or connect the wire “*” to the indicated
Transformer 6T2-TBs. See Figure 3-19. This wire is factory connected to 400 VAC for 80
kW 3-Phase generators. See Generator Manual. Refer to Compact LV DRAC/LFRAC
Generator drawing 54302010.
NOTE: For 380 VAC power line connect the generator to the 400 VAC terminals.
Figure 3-19
HV Transformer
Input
Transformers 6T2
Front Panel
Input Line Fuses
3.8.5 Generator Final Installation and Checks
3.8.5.1 HV Transformer
NOTE: This point does not apply to Aluminium HV Transformers (black).
The HV Transformer contains Shell Diala Oil. Check that there is no oil leakage. If there is,
open the Ventilation Screw on the top of the HV Transformer. Check that the oil level is
approximately 20 mm (3/4”) of the top surface of the HV Transformer.

3.8.5.2 Cable Fastening and Covers
NOTE: Before re-installing all cabinet covers, perform the rest of the Calibration
procedures (AEC, Fluoro, ABC) if required.
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and all cables are correctly
routed. Remove the ferrite blocks factory clamped to the cables when it is required to
carry out a correct routing, then re-install the ferrites blocks at the same place around the
cables. See 3.8.3 “Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet” for more information.
CAUTION! In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly recommended to fold and

fasten close to Generator Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see Figure
3-20). Never wrap in circles.
Figure 3-20
Re-install the cabinet covers and connect its internal ground wires. The Power line, High
Voltage and Interconnections cables must go through the cover cable outlet.
3.8.6 X-Ray Tube Connection
3.8.6.1 High Voltage Cables
CAUTION! The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely delicate and
easily damaged. Handle them carefully. Ensure the pins are straight and the
splits in the pins are open (parallel to sides).
Anode and Cathode cables are furnished according to the room layout (length of the
cables).
1. Grease the high tension electrodes with high tension grease.
2. Connect the Anode and Cathode cables from the HV Transformer into the X-ray Tube
receptacle. Ensure that all connections are made correctly, maintaining correct Anode
and Cathode orientation. Tighten the cable nuts securely.
3. Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV Transformer receptacles.

4. Carefully connect the Anode and Cathode cables from the X-ray Tube into the respective
HV Transformer receptacles. Ensure that all connections are made correctly, maintaining
correct Anode and Cathode orientation. Tighten the cable nuts securely.
3.8.6.2 Stator Cable

X-ray Tubes are equipped with the Stator cable installed.
A LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotatory Anode Controller) is required for High Speed
X-ray Tubes. Connections between LV-DRAC and Power Module are factory made.
Route the Stator cable together with the HV cables to the Generator Cabinet. Connect the
Stator cable terminals to the indicated Terminal Block TS2. See Table 3-4.
Table 3-4
Varian Terminal TS2

Stator Wires
RAD92 Tube Tube 1
Main Black TS2-1
AUX (Shift) Red TS2-2
Common White TS2-3
NOTE: Terminal Block TS2 can be marked with a prefix number as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2,
depending on the Generator model.
CAUTION! Ensure that the stator wires are properly connected. Before making any exposure,
check that the anode rotates correctly.
WARNING! In generators equipped with LV-DRAC, the LV_DRAC output can be as high as
1000 Vrms. For safety reasons (to avoid electrical shocks) the stator cable must
be shielded and both ends of the shield must be connected to the ground.
WARNING! Due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) problems, the IGBT’s heat sink is not
grounded. It is connected to the negative terminal of the input rectifier. To avoid
electrical shock, be sure that the input line is disconnected and the capacitor bank
is properly discharged before manipulating in the LV-DRAC.
3.8.7 Fans
Wires from fans should be routed with the Stator Cables and connected to the indicated
terminal of the generator cabinet. Depending on the X-ray Tube, the fans are powered at 115
VAC or 220 VAC.
For Compact Generators with the High Speed Starter LV-DRAC located on a shelf at the

bottom of the Generator (module-11), connect the wires from the fans as shown in
Table 3-5.
Table 3-5
Generator with HV Transformer and High Speed Starter for X-ray Tube
Tube Connection
Wires to Fans 115 VAC 220 VAC
X-ray Tube 11TS2-6 and 11TS2-7 on Jump 11TS2-6 and 11TS2- Jump 11TS2-6 and 11TS2-
the LV-DRAC Module 17 on the LV-DRAC 18 on the LV-DRAC
Module Module
3.8.8 Thermostat
The X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65°C). The two wires
should be routed to the Terminal Block TS2 in the Generator Cabinet and connected to the
following Terminals:
Table 3-6 - Thermostat Connections
Thermostat Wires X-ray Tube

Thermostat Signal TS2-4
Thermostat Common TS2-5
NOTE: Terminal Block TS2 can be marked with a prefix number as 4TS2, 10TS2 or
11TS2 depending on the Generator model.
3.8.9 GND and/or Shield
For Compact Generators with the Starter LV-DRAC located on a shelf at the bottom of the
generator (module-11), connect the GND and/or Shield wire of the Stator cables to the
Terminals 11TS2-8 for the X-ray Tube.
3.8.10 Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422
Serial Console
For systems using a Serial Console, only a Serial Interconnection Cable (A7066--xx or
A3149--xx) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet must be connected to the J1 of the Serial
Console. (Refer to Maps 54301052, A6188--02).
3.8.11 Virtual Console (PC)
For systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC it is required to install a PC Interface

Box between the PC and Generator. See Figure 3-21. (Refer to Maps 54301052, A6188--
02 and I/F-036).

To install the Interface Box do the following:

1. Turn off the workstation and remove the power connection.
2. Remove the Back Cover of the Interface Box.
3. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet to
J1 of the PC Interface Box.
4. Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the Interface Box.
5. Connect the Interface Box - Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the Interface Box and
the other end (2 connectors) to COM1 (Communication). Do not connect the power
detection.
6. The other end has two connectors labelled COM1 and J1. Connect COM 1 to PC Comport.
7. Remove a convenient expansion slot backplate and install the Sedecal Power Detention
Interface Board.
8. Connect the pigtail to the Power Detection Interface Board and to a free 12V plug inside
the PC.
9. Re-install the Back Cover of the Interface Box.
10.Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable of Computer to a 110
VAC or 230 VAC socket.
Figure 3-21
1 2
J5 J1 J1
J2 COM 1
J3 3 COM 2
Generator Cabinet PC Interface Box PC (Computer) Keyboard

Handswitch
Connections
1 Serial Cable (A3352-01)
2 PC Box/PC Cable / Integration Cable
3 Power Line Cable to 110/230 VAC Socket

3.8.12 Door Interlock Signal
Connect the two wires from the Room Door Interlock Switch(es) to Terminal Block
3TS1-22 (Door signal) and 3TS1-23 (Door Rtn - gnd). If the X-ray Room is not provided
with a Door signal, place a jumper between both connections in the Terminal Block 3TS1.
CAUTION! At this point, perform the complete Configuration and Calibration

procedures except the AEC. Once Configuration and Calibration are
performed, proceed with the rest of the Installation and Calibration. See
Generator Chapter.
3.8.13 Warning Light Signal
The Room Lamp(s) can be externally powered or internally powered through the Terminal
Block 3TS1. The Room Lamp(s) must be connected through the Terminal Block 3TS1-47
and 3TS1-48 (internal relay on Interface Control PCB), so the generator switches on/off
the lamps (Refer to -- I/F-008).
3.8.14 Collimator Lamp and System Locks
The generator can supply power to the Manual Collimator Lamp and System Locks
(Table, Vertical Bucky, etc.)
Connect wires from the Collimator Lamp to Terminal Block TB7-3 (24 VAC) and TB7-4
(0 VAC) of the Lock Board.
Connect wires from the Locks to Terminal Block TB7-5 (+24 VDC) and TB7-6 (0 VDC)
of the Lock Board.
NOTE: When required, voltages (VAC and VDC) on TB7 can be changed connecting the
respective wires to other terminals in the Input Transformer 6T2. (Refer to
Schematics 543020XX).
3.8.15 ION Chambers (AEC)
WARNING! Do not connect any Ion Chamber to the generator cabinet until you verify
and adjust the high voltage to the values required. Other voltage could
damage the Ion Chambers.

WARNING! Do not turn on the generator until the input signals of all the Ion Chambers are
connected to the required voltage. Other voltage could damage the Ion
Chambers.
1. Turn the Generator ON and verify the voltage in TB1-9 is correct for the ion chamber being
installed. If necessary adjust the High Voltage at Potentiometer R29 of the Interface
Control Board. After adjustment turn the Generator OFF.
2. Connect the Ion Chamber cable to J1 (IC1) of the AEC Adaptation Board. The Ion
Chamber cable is supplied by the Generator manufacturer. The code is A3253--01. See
Figure 3-22.
NOTE: The same type of Ion Chambers have to be installed in consecutive order starting at
J1 (IC1).
NOTE: The cable connection for the Vacutec or the AID is made directly to AEC Adaptation
Board.
Figure 3-22 - Connections without IC Adaptation Cables
Generator
1 3
TS1 TB1 J1
J2
ATP Console Board

J3 IC 1 Preamplifier
J5
J5
J4
2 AEC Adaption Board
(A3263-03)
Connections
1 Power Interface Cable
2 AEC Interface Cable
3 Ion Chamber Cable

Figure 3-23 - Connections with IC Adaption Cables
1
TB1
AEC Adaption PCB

TS1 Generator Cabinet
3 Ion Chamber 1
AID or Vacutec
ION Chamber
J1
3 Ion Chamber 2
(not used)
J2
(not used)
TB1-9
3 Ion Chamber 3
(not used)
AEC Input J3
3 Ion Chamber 4
(not used)
J5
2
J5 J4
ATP Console CPU Board
AEC Output
1 Power Interface Cable
2 AEC Interface Cable
3 Connections with IC Adaptation Cables
3. On the AEC adaptation board ensure that TB 1-10 and TB 1-7 are jumpered together.
Also check that all jumpers on the AEC adaptation board are set to B as in Table 3-7.
Table 3-7
Jumpers Position
Ion Chamber Type
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8 JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 B B B

1600 Installation • Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet • 3 - 39
3.9 Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet

The following illustration (Figure 3-24) shows the cable connections to perform during
installation.
Figure 3-24
Generator/Stand
Control Cabinet
J2
X-ray tube
5 1 346
2
C-arm Control panel
Column Collimator
Collimator lamp
Detector Head
J2 TS4 GND
Connections
1 Column Main Harness to be connected to the Stand Control Cabinet
2 Detector Harness from the C-arm to be connected to the Stand Control Cabinet (Detector Area)
3 Power Line Cable to Stand Control Cabinet
4 Detector Harness from the Detector Control (Computer Workstation)
Cables from the Column to the Generator Cabinet:
5 HV Cables to HV Transformer
Stator/Thermostat

3 - 40 • 1600 Installation • Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet
Cables to the Generator Cabinet:
Power Line
6 Door Interlock Switches
Warning Room Lamps
other cables
3.9.1 To Wire the Stand and Control Box
1. Install the lateral access cover of the Control Box. Perform the corresponding
connections from the Column (Main Harness) in the Control Box as per schematics
54302080 and IM-353 in the service manual. See Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25
Lateral Access Cover

Main Harness
2. Inverters located inside the Control Box control the Motor parameters. These Inverters
are factory pre-configured. See Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26
Height Inverter SID Inverter Rotation Inverter
L1 L2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
There are two conductors in each of the L1 and L2 connectors on the vertical inverter.
WARNING! Verify that inverter configurations are in accordance to the installation

requirements. If not, refer to the Section 10.6, “Inverters Factory Configuration
or the inverter documentation to modify the parameters.
3. Connect the wires labeled T1, T2 and T3 to their respective Inverters.

4. Connect the brake cable to the Height Inverter terminals L1 and L2. See Figure 3-26.
5. Connect A1 and A2 to the Relay K1. Do not remove the diode across A1 and A2.
NOTE: The cathode of the diode goes to A1.
6. Connect J1, J3 and J4. See Figure 3-27.

7. Connect TS1 CI and TS2 CI. See Figure 3-27.
8. Connect the Brake Power Cable.

3 - 42 • 1600 Installation • Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet
Figure 3-27
TS2 C1
J1
J3
J4 TS1 C1
9. Connect the ground cables (GND) from the Column to the Main Ground Stud (GND)
of the Control Box.
10.Verify that the wire “*” of Transformer TR1 and the fuses of the Control Box are
correct (sized) for the Power Line.
11.Connect the power cables of the Control Box to the Terminal Strip TS1.
WARNING! The unit is factory delivered to operate on phase and neutral. In case the
equipment is connected to a two phase system, replace the neutral cartridge
(F2/N in the Control Box) by the fuse supplied with the unit (supplied in
plastic bag with extra fuses).
NOTE: Power supply connections must be in compliance with Local Codes.
DANGER! Exposed contacts with line voltage. See Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28

3 - 44 • 1600 Installation • X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation
3.10 X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation
NOTE: The x-ray equipment, when installed shall permit the use of the focal spot to skin
distances to be 45 cm or more in normal use.
1. Install the X-ray Tube in the Support of the Tube-Collimator Assembly using the
Collimator Adaptation Ring and the four Safety Screws (Allen). See Figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29
X-Ray Tube
Support of the Tube-
Collimator Assembly
2. Before installing the Collimator, equally unscrew the four Centering Adjustment and
Safety Screws to allow the Collimator installation in the Collimator Adaptation Ring.
Adjust the Collimator Blades to their narrowest setting and carefully install the
Collimator, centering it with the X-ray Tube window.
3. Equally tighten (same number of turns) the four Centering Adjustment and Safety
Screws (Allen) until the Collimator is centered and held firmly on the Coupling Ring
(support). See Figure 3-30. (Also, refer to Collimator and Tube Manual supplied with
equipment.)
Figure 3-30
X-ray tube Cover
Centering and Safety Screws
Stator/Thermostat Cable
Collimator Cover
Collimator Cable

1600 Installation • X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation • 3 - 45
4. Remove the X-ray Tube and Collimator covers. Connect the Stator / Thermostat wires to
the X-ray Tube (white = common, black = main, red = shift/aux) and the Collimator Lamp
cable (A3388--02) from the Upper Harness of the Column, accordingly to their
identification. The Collimator Lamp is powered through its connection on the Control Box
(refer to schematic 54302080). Do not power the Collimator Lamp through the Generator
Cabinet.
5. Reinstall the X-ray Tube and Collimator covers.
6. Install the Front Housing (cover of the Control Panel and Tube-Collimator Assembly) by
snapping it in place and securing it with the two screws at the back of the cover.
WARNING! When using x-ray accessories or other items that do not form part of the system,
possible adverse effects may arise. See Table 3-8 for the maximum attenuation
equivalent of possible materials located in the x-ray beam.
Table 3-8
Maximum Attenuation Equivalent

Item
mm Al
FRONT PANEL (POLYCARBONATE PAINTED) 1.2

(CARBON FIBER TABLETOP OF PATIENT SUPPORT WITH
WHEELS)

3 - 46 • 1600 Installation • To Cable the Stand
3.11 To Cable the Stand

1. Connect the HV Cables of the X-ray Tube.
CAUTION! Terminal Pins of the HV Cables are extremely delicate and easily damaged.
Handle them carefully. Ensure they are all straight and the splits in the pins
are open (parallel to sides).
2. Prepare the High Voltage terminals to be installed in the X-ray Tube receptacles. Apply
Silicone Paste over the entire surfaces of the Plug and Pins.
3. Connect the cables to the related receptors of the Tube and tighten the nuts.
4. Leaving enough cable to allow arm movements, clamp the Stator Cable and the HV
Cables to the lateral side of the Upper Carriage of the C-arm. Also fasten the cables
together with the cable harness to the Cable Support on the upper lateral side of the
column. See Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31
Cable support at lateral side

of the column
Stator and HV cables

Detector Harness
5. Remove the Safety Locking Rod from the Central Carriage. See Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32
Safety Locking Rod

(Central Carriage)
6. Turn the Unit ON with the Switch located on the Stand Control Box door.

1600 Installation • Detector Head Installation • 3 - 47
3.12 Detector Head Installation

Figure 3-33 : 1600 System Diagram
,17(51$/*5281'7267$1'
'(7(&725+($'
9+]
),%5(237,&&20
*5,''(7(&79'&
$(&9'&
7(&9'&
&$0(5$32:(5 9'& *(1(5$725
-
&$75-7(& 72

*5,''(7(&79'& (/(&75,&$/%2;
&$7+2'(0$;.9
$12'(0$;.9
67$7259$&
'(7(&725
7*3'0 9'&+($'
:25.67$7,21 32:(56833/<
9
+] 9 ,17(51$//<
+] 32:(5('
9
;67$1'
(/(&7521,&6%2;
9'&
,17(5)$&(%2;&$%/(
9'&
&21752/&$%,1(7
560)
9'& 67$1'&21752/
9$& &$%/(6
9'&
3&,17(5)$&(%2;
0,1,&2162/(
9'&
+$1'6:,7&+
;67$1'
&2/801
+$1'6:,7&+&$%/(
9$&
&2//,0$725
127(32:(56833/<$1'3'0
$5(&217$,1(':,7+67$1'(/(&7521,&6%2;
;5$<78%(
*5281'&$%/(

3 - 48 • 1600 Installation • Detector Head Installation
WARNING! Although there are times when the camera stack will need to be removed, do
not attempt to remove the camera, lens, or scintillator from the Detector
Head. Attempting to tamper with the camera, lens or scintillator will void the
warranty.
WARNING! During this procedure you will be making connections to high voltage
terminals.
NOTE: Special care must be taken when handling and transporting of the Detector Head.
Critical alignments and focusing may be disturbed if the unit is handled
improperly. The detector head is very heavy; if positioning the Detector Head by
hand, two installers should support the head, while a third installer performs the
connection.
Prior to Detector Head installation:

1. Position the C-arm at a horizontal position close to the floor.
2. Turn the unit OFF with the Switch at the Control Box door.
3.12.1 Routing the Detector Cables
Route the Detector Cables through the C-arm as indicated below:
NOTE: Use caution when handling the Fibre Optic Cable.
1. Gather the Detector Cables and identify which cable ends connect to the Detector
Assembly and which cable ends connect to the Control Box. Tie the cables to get a
single harness to ease the routing through the C-arm.
2. Ensure all the connectors pass through the cable access or cable hoses (Vacuflex). If
not, remove the connectors.
3. Route the Detector Cables through the cable access of the Detector Assembly Support
(lower side of the C-arm) towards the Detector Assembly. See Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34
Detector assembly support
Cable access
Cable access
Detector cables
C-arm

4. Remove the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex) located close to the Central Carriage in the
C-arm. A wire is provided from factory as a cable guide to ease the routing of the Detector
Cables through the C-arm. The other end of this wire is at the cable access of the lower
side. See Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35
Cable guide wire Cable hose cover

(remove)
Cable guide wire

Cable guide wire
Cable access Cable access
5. Attach all the Detector Cables to the cable guide. Route the Detector Cables through the
cable access at the lower side of the C-arm towards the central cable access on the C-arm.
See Figure 3-36.
Figure 3-36
Cable access
Detector cables
C-arm

6. Route the Detector Cables through the cable hose (Vacuflex) towards the Control Box.
7. This cable hose (Vacuflex) must be routed and attached to the Cable Support at the
upper lateral side of the column. See Figure 3-37. The cable hose length must be long
enough to enable movement of the C-arm.
Figure 3-37
Cable Support at Lateral

Side of the Column
Detector Harness
8. Reinstall the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex) and install the other end of the cable
hose to the Control Box (lateral cable access).
3.12.1.1 Preparing to Install the Detector Head
NOTE: This procedure can be completed while the Detector Head is sitting in the crate.
Turn the Detector Head vertically such that the end of the support frame is facing
up.
When the Detector Head is received, the shipped configuration of the support frame face
plate is set to face the front of the Detector Head. The support frame must be rotated 180°
before the Detector Head is installed on a front mounted system. See Figure 3-38.
The following procedures will must be completed when preparing to mount a front
mounted Detector Head:
• Removing and configuring the support frame
• Rotating the camera stack assembly
• Reversing the fan orientation
• Re-assembling the support frame

Figure 3-38
Before After
CAUTION! Gound straps must be used when completing the procedure.

3.12.1.1.1 Removing and Configuring the Support Frame

1. Remove the support frame face plate from the support frame by loosening and
removing the 12 M8 bolts. See Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40.
Figure 3-39
face plate cover

bolt
support frame face

plate
Figure 3-40

2. Remove the 2 support frame side covers by loosening the bottom 2 fasteners and removing
the top 2 bolts from each of the side covers. See Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41
loosen
remove
3. Unplug both fan cables. See Figure 3-42.
Figure 3-42

NOTE: Do not plug the red temperature sensor cable into the camera stack plug as shown
in Figure 3-43. The temperature sensor cable must not be plugged into any part of
the camera stack assembly.
CAUTION! The temperature probe is pigtailed with the two fan cables. Do not remove
the red insulation. It does not require any handling.
Figure 3-43
Do not plug the

temperature sensor
cable into the camera
stack plug
4. Disconnect the trigger cable from the Detector Head trigger board and from the camera
stack. See Figure 3-44 and Figure 3-45.
Figure 3-44

Figure 3-45
Disconnect
5. Cut the tie wraps. See Figure 3-46.
Figure 3-46
6. Remove the fan wires from the side covers by removing the grommets from the fan cables.
See Figure 3-47.
Figure 3-47
Remove grommets

7. Loosen and remove the 3 M10 bolts on each side that connect the Detector Head to the
support frame. This includes the bolts on the inside of the support frame. See Figure 3-
48 and Figure 3-49.
Figure 3-48
See Figure 3-49
Figure 3-49

8. Carefully remove the Detector Head support frame. See Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50

9. Remove the end plate of the support frame by removing the 4 M10 bolts and reverse
the orientation. The 3 skin bracket holes on the end plate should be facing towards the
closed end of the support frame. See Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-51 Before
skin bracket holes

facing the open end of
the support frame
Figure 3-52 After

skin bracket holes
facing the closed end
of the support frame

10.Reinstall the end plate to the support frame and tighten the 4 M10 bolts on each corner of
the end plate to 10-14 Nm (90-125 in*lbs).
3.12.1.1.2 Rotating the Camera Stack Assembly
WARNING! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can occur
discharge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that antistatic wrist
straps are worn and that these are properly connected to a suitable ground in the
wall. Be cautious when moving around to ensure the ESD protection does not
become disconnected. Damage from ESD may not be immediately apparent, but
it will have a serious effect on the images and may completely prevent operation.
When the Detector Head is front mounted, the camera stack should face the open side of the
support frame.
1. Remove the two screws on both sides of the camera protective cover. See Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53
screws on camera
stack assembly
CAUTION! When moving the camera stack assembly, ensure the ribbon cable underneath the
camera stack assembly is handled delicately to prevent damage. It must not be
forced into position.

2. Carefully lift the camera stack assembly and rotate 180°. See Figure 3-54.
Figure 3-54
3. When rotating the camera stack assembly, the ribbon cable must also be turned. When
turning the ribbon, ensure the ribbon is not creased and does not touch the camera stack
assembly components above. See Figure 3-55 and Figure 3-56. Any contact between
the camera stack assembly components and the ribbon may affect image quality.
Figure 3-55
camera components
ribbon cable

Figure 3-56
4. Once the ribbon is in place, reinstall the screws on the camera protective covering.
3.12.1.1.3 Re-assembling the Support Frame

1. Rotate the support frame 180° and reinstall the support frame on the Detector Head such
that the open end of the support frame faces the back of the Detector Head.
2. When rotating the support frame, move the Trigger Board cable so the end of the cable will
come out from the side of the support frame closest to the Trigger Board. This will ensure
the length of the cable will reach the Trigger Board.
3. Remove the side bolt connecting the elbow connector to the support frame. Move the
elbow connector to the closed end of the support frame. See Figure 3-57 and Figure 3-58.
Figure 3-57

Figure 3-58
4. The 2 bolts on the corner of the support frame must be tightened at the same time to
ensure the support frame is properly bolted to the Detector Head. Tighten the bolts to
the support frame to 26-27 Nm (230-240 in*lbs). See Figure 3-58 above.
5. Reconnect the trigger board cable to the trigger board and to the camera stack.
6. The orientation of the fans must be reversed so the input fan blows directly into the
cooling fins of the camera stack assembly. See Figure 3-59. To reverse the orientation
of the fan, remove the 4 screws that attach each of the fans to the support frame.
Figure 3-59
cooling fins

7. Reverse the orientation of the fan closest to the cooling fins so the arrow on the fan points
towards the inside of cooling fins. See Figure 3-60.
Figure 3-60
filter
8. Switch the covers of the fans so the filter is attached to the input fan. See Figure 3-60
above.
9. Re-attach the input fan using the 4 screws on each of the fan corners.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the fan ends, do not over tighten the screws.
10. Reverse the orientation of the other fan so the arrow on the fan points outwards from the
support frame. See Figure 3-61.
Figure 3-61
finger guard

11. Attach the finger guard to the output fan using the 4 screws on each corner of the fan.
See Figure 3-61 above.
12.Thread the fan cables through the side covers and re-attach the grommets.
13.Reconnect the fan cables.
14.Loosely re-attach the support frame side cover. The side covers are not re-attached
completely until the Detector Head is installed. See Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62
3.12.2 Installing and Connecting the Detector Head
1. Bring the stand to table position, and lower the C-arm to install the Detector Head
Assembly.
2. Install the Detector Head Assembly on the Detector Plate Support of the C-arm using
the six safety screws. See Figure 3-63.

Figure 3-63
Detector plate support
Detector assembly
Terminal strip TS4
Safety screws (6)
3. Install the AEC Pre-amp on the Detector Assembly. See Figure 3-64.
Figure 3-64
4. Perform the following connections at the Detector Assembly:

a. Control Pad Cables with connector marked J2 to J2 socket.
CAUTION! Incoming line voltage is present on Terminal Strip TS4.
b. Emergency Stop wires 5 and 6 are bridged to allow motion during installation.
Remove the bridge and connect the Emergency stop wires from the Detector Cover
in the Terminal Strip TS4.
5. Install the cover over the x-ray tube.

3 - 66 • 1600 Installation • Power Distribution Module (PDM)
3.13 Power Distribution Module (PDM)

The PDM is controlled and monitored by the workstation and the Magellan 3 software.
Figure 3-65
3.13.1 Understanding the PDM
The PDM is used for the following functions:

• The TEC cable controls the temperature of the Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC). The
TEC controller is used to set and maintain the temperature of the camera CCD at
-10 C.
• Senses and analyzes the power consumption on TEC and monitors for cable
connection.
• Controls the ON/OFF status of the camera power.
• Senses the temperature of the camera housing.
• Controls and monitors the Camera fans.
• Controls the Grid Detect function (optional).
3.13.2 Installing the PDM
NOTE: When considering mounting location of the PDM, the PDM display does not
have to be visible to the technologist.

1600 Installation • Power Distribution Module (PDM) • 3 - 67
NOTE: To provide proper air flow, the PDM must be mounted vertically.
1. Using the appropriate hardware, vertically mount the PDM such that the fans are at the
top of the unit. The PDM and PDM power supply is mounted on a mounting plate
inside the stand control cabinet. See Figure 3-66.
Figure 3-66
PDM power
supply
PDM
2. Ensure there is enough cable length to allow movement of the Detector Head when it is
attached to the stand or table.

3 - 68 • 1600 Installation • Cabling the Detector Head and PDM
3.14 Cabling the Detector Head and PDM
WARNING! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can occur
discharge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that antistatic wrist
straps are worn and that these are properly connected to a suitable ground in the
wall. Be cautious when moving around to ensure the ESD protection does not
become disconnected. Damage from ESD may not be immediately apparent, but
it will have a serious effect on the images and may completely prevent operation.
NOTE: The power to the camera should be provided via an uninterrupted power supply
(UPS) to meet EMI requirements.
The Detector Head has the following cables (see Figure 3-63):
• Camera Power cable – Allows communication of monitoring of the cavity fans, the cav-
ity’s ambient temperature, and provides power to the camera.
• TEC cable – Allows communication to set and maintain the temperature of the camera
CCD at -10°C.
• Trigger Board cable – Communicates the start of image acquisition between the trigger
board and the camera.
• Fibre Optic cable – Communicates image data from the camera to the computer
• Grid Detect cable (optional) – Communicates the status of the Radiographic Grid.
Figure 3-67
Trigger Board Cable
TEC Cable
Camera Power Cable
Fibre Optic Cable
Figure 3-68

1600 Installation • Cabling the Detector Head and PDM • 3 - 69
3.14.1 Connecting the Detector Head and PDM
WARNING! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can
occur when handling any of its exposed electronic components if proper
electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that
antistatic wrist straps are worn and that these are properly connected to a
suitable ground in the wall. Be cautious when moving around to ensure the
ESD protection does not become disconnected. Damage from ESD may not
be immediately apparent, but it will have a serious effect on the images and
may completely prevent operation.
3.14.1.1 Connecting the PDM

1. Run the Fibre Optic cable through the stand or table back to the computer. Connect the
Fibre Optic cable to the computer’s fibre optic port. If you are supplying the computer
you must install the hotlink card.
2. The Camera Power cable is pre-installed in the Detector Head with external plugs to
allow interconnection to the PDM. Connect the TEC cable to the PDM and run it
through the stand or table to the Detector Head. If the end is not terminated, you may
cut the cable to length and install the plug. If it is terminated, connect to the matching
plug in the Detector Head.
3. The TEC cable is pre-installed in the Detector Head with external plugs to allow
interconnection to the PDM. Connect the Camera Power cable to the PDM and run it
through the stand or table to the Detector Head. If the end is not terminated, you may
cut the cable to length and install the plug. If it is terminated, connect to the matching
plug in the Detector Head.
4. Run the grid detect cable from the Detector Head though the stand or table to the PDM
and connect the Grid Detect cable to the PDM.
5. Connect the computer cable to PC RS232 on the PDM, and run the computer cable
from the PDM through the stand or table and back to the computer. Connect the
computer cable to PC RS232, standard serial port on the computer.
6. Connect the PDM’s power cable to the PDM power supply.
7. Connect the PDM power supply input to AC power.
NOTE: The PDM has a Remote (REM) input for ON/OFF contact. This connection is for
future development.
3.14.1.2 Connecting the Detector Head
CAUTION! The temperature probe is pigtailed with the two fan cables. Do not remove
the red insulation. It does not require any handling. See Figure 3-69.

Figure 3-69
Temperature Probe
Fan Cables
1. Install the fibre optic cable. See Figure 3-70. To do this remove the side panel of the
support frame, connect the fibre optic cable to the fibre optic receptacle (U3) on the top
board on the camera stack and reinstall the side panel.
Figure 3-70
Fibre Optic Cable
2. Connect the Trigger Board cable to the J2 on the Trigger board. See Figure 3-71.
Figure 3-71
Trigger Board cable

3. Install the AEC paddle by removing the four grub screws on the mate plate. Discard
these screws.
4. Slide the AEC paddle into the plate’s slots. See Figure 3-72.
Figure 3-72
5. Centre the AEC over the scintillator.

6. Secure the AEC paddle’s cables to the mate plate with tie wraps. See Figure 3-73.
Figure 3-73
7. Secure the AEC paddle onto the mate plate with the four black grub screws shipped
with the ion chamber.
CAUTION! Do not overtighten the black grub screws. The screws may puncture the ion
chamber causing the Detector Head to ground out.

8. Connect the 8 pin Molex camera cable to the camera stack’s camera cable. See Figure 3-74.
Figure 3-74
9. Connect the 12 pin Molex TEC cable to the camera stack’s TEC cable. See Figure 3-75.
Figure 3-75

10.Replace the support frame top cover with the 12 bolts.

11.Mount the AEC pre-amp to the support frame top cover. See Figure 3-76.
Figure 3-76
WARNING! Ensure the generator is off before connecting the AEC cables.
12.Connect the stand’s AEC cable to the AEC pre-amp. See Figure 3-77.
Figure 3-77
13.Plug in JP1 to the back of the Grid Detect Board. Ensure the cable is secured to the
PCB with tie wraps. See Figure 3-78.

Figure 3-78
Grid cable to back of grid board
Tie wraps to secure cable
14.The Detector Head body should be grounded using a part number 430-0117-003 and a star
washer ground conductor. See Figure 3-79.
Figure 3-79
15. Mount the face plate. See Figure 3-80.

Figure 3-80
16.At the opposite end of the Grid Drawer, check the clearance between the AEC panel
and the Grid Detect Board. Slowly open the Grid Drawer to determine if there are any
collisions.
NOTE: Ensure there are no cables in the imaging area.
17. Connect the ribbon cable, ensuring the correct orientation of the cable.
See Figure 3-81.
Figure 3-81

Figure 3-82 - Detector Head Wiring

1600 Installation • Computer Installation • 3 - 77
3.15 Computer Installation
WARNING! Ensure voltage switch is set to the appropriate setting prior to connection of
the equipment.
NOTE: The computer system must be located at least 1.5 meters away from the digital
x-ray detector.
To install the computer

1. Plug the computer into the UPS.
2. Plug the mouse and the keyboard into the back of the computer as indicated (See Dell’s
Workstation Manual).
3. Connect the computer to the Hospital Network Drop with a CAT 5 network cable.
4. Connect the monitor video cable (white DVI-D cable) to the back of the computer.
5. Connect the Camera Communication Cable (Fibre optic) into the hotlink card on the
back of the computer.
6. Connect the TEC Cable into COM1 Port with a RJ-45 to DB9 conversion plug on the
back of the computer.
7. Plug the monitor power cable into the UPS Battery Protected Receptable.
8. Plug the UPS into the designated wall outlet (dedicated line).
NOTE: The computer must have the supplied ground strap connected to a reliable earth
point.
For more information on the workstation, refer to the Dell Reference Guide.

3 - 78 • 1600 Installation • Powering up the 1600 System
3.16 Powering up the 1600 System
DANGER! Undertable and chest positioning are provided with automatic movement of the
C-arm. Ensure there are no obstructions within range of the C-arm.
WARNING! Ensure the x-ray tube is placed into the appropriate working position with the
reference axis (x-ray beam) directed towards the reception area.
WARNING! Ensure there are no objects on the C-arm and Detector Head surface before
powering on the unit
WARNING! Remaining energy may exist when the equipment is switched off. Always wait at
least 15 seconds before working on the system.
CAUTION! After complete installation or service, measure protective earth.
NOTE: The Automatic Chest and Automatic Table buttons will require pressing and holding.
1. Turn on the UPS.

2. Turn on the PDM.
3. Turn on the 1600 contol box.
4. Turn on the generator.
5. Wait for everything to power up.
6. Turn on the computer and monitor.
7. Ensure the red link light is OFF on both the camera fibre board and the computer interface
board.

1600 Installation • Trigger Board Adjustments • 3 - 79
3.17 Trigger Board Adjustments

Figure 3-83
VR1
Trigger Cable J2
VR2
TP1
TP4
PMT Cable J1 TP6 L1 L2
3.17.1 Setting up the Trigger Board Electronics
Setup of the PMT trigger circuit is to be completed before final focus testing. This will
ensure the cavity is light tight; therefore, preventing the PMT from being destroyed by
excess ambient light.
1. Apply power to the camera. This will supply 15 volts to the PMT trigger board. See
Figure 3-83.
2. Connect the DMM black lead to the trigger board at TP6. Use the red lead and check
for 15 volts, ± 0.5 volts, on the lower end of L1 next to J2.
3. Leave the black lead on TP6 and touch the red lead to the single pad on the top side of
VR1.
4. Adjust VR 1 to read 0.9 volts, ± 0.02 volts. This will set the PMT sensitivity.
5. Remove the DMM red and black leads.
6. Connect the black lead to TP1 (yellow).
7. Connect the red lead to TP4 (white).
8. Adjust VR2 for a meter reading of not lower than 0.060 volts or greater than 0.065
volts.
9. Reconnect the black test lead to TP6 and check for approximately 0.15 volts on L2.

3 - 80 • 1600 Installation • Trigger Board Adjustments
3.17.2 Checking the Trigger Settings
1. Set the SID to 180 cm.

2. Set the x-ray factors to 50 kVp and 0.5 mAs.
3. Collimate to an exposed area of 5 cm by 5 cm. If the built in collimators will not close to
such a small area, use the lead bricks to further reduce the exposed area.
4. Start the unit and its software. Check to see that the system is not triggering in the absence
of an x-ray exposure. If it is, the trigger is too sensitive and sensitivity must be decreased.
To decrease the sensitivity, adjust the voltage measured in Step 7 of Section 3.17.1,
“Setting up the Trigger Board Electronics above to 0.070 volts.
5. Fire the x-ray machine and note whether the system is triggered. The trigger is adequately
sensitive and calibration is complete when the system triggers to the above x-ray factors.

1600 Installation • Checking Movements and Installing the Covers • 3 - 81
3.18 Checking Movements and Installing the Covers
WARNING! Operators and/or patients may not be in the room if equipment covers are
removed for routine maintenance.
WARNING! Routine maintenance may not be performed on medical or non-medical

equipment by service personnel if the operator and/or patient is within the
room.
1. Turn the Unit ON.

2. Check that all controls and movements operate correctly.
3. Turn the Unit OFF.
4. Install the Detector Head Covers. See Figure 3-84.
Figure 3-84
5. Install the Base and Top Covers of the Column with the supplied screws.
See Figure 3-85.

3 - 82 • 1600 Installation • Checking Movements and Installing the Covers
Figure 3-85
Column Upper Cover
Column Base Cover
6. Route the cables from the Column to be connected in the Generator (HV Cables, Stator/
Thermostat) through the upper cable access of the Generator Cabinet.
7. Cables to be connected to the Generator Cabinet, such as Power Line and Door Interlock,
must be routed through the lateral cable access (or floor cable access when using a floor
raceway) of the Control Box, across the Control Box and along the back side of the
Generator Cabinet to be clamped at the Fastening Bar at the top of the Generator Cabinet.
8. Connect the Power Line Cable, HV Cables in the HV Transformer, Stator / Thermostat,
Door Interlock Switches, Warning Room Lamps, etc as indicated in the Installation
document of the Generator Service Manual.
9. Complete the Generator Cabinet installation (configuration, calibration, covers, etc) as
indicated in the Generator Service Manual.

1600 Installation • Leveling Checks • 3 - 83
3.19 Leveling Checks

After the System is connected, perform the following leveling checks in the Column/Arm,
the Tube-Collimator Assembly and the Detector Assembly. Leveling of the system will
result in a better installation.
1. Check the vertical/horizontal position of the Column. Modify the position of the
Column with the screws attached to the Column Upper Support. See Figure 3-86.
Figure 3-86
Levels
2. Verify the Tube-Collimator Assembly is level and parallel to the Detector Head. If
necessary reinstall the Tube-Collimator Assembly. See 3.10 “X-Ray Tube and
Collimator Installation” on page 3-44.
3. Verify the Detector Head is level, in chest and under table positions. Use the four
Detector Assembly leveling screws to adjust. See Figure 3-87.
Figure 3-87
Detector
Leveling
Screws

NOTES
1600 CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

4.1 “Configuration and Calibration”
4.2 “Configuration and Calibration Guide”
4.3 “Configuration Details”
4.4 “Common Configuration Errors”
4.5 “Calibration Details”
4.6 “Adjustments”

4 - 2 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration •

1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration • 4-3
4.1 Configuration and Calibration
NOTE: This unit is factory configured and calibrated. These procedures may only be
required in case a modification in the system movements or a malfunction is
detected. See See Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1
8 10
1 4
2 5
3 6
9 11
12
ENTER IN SERVICE MODE: Turn On the Unit and press and hold (9) while “Vxx” is being
displayed on the Angle display until “CAL” appears, release all buttons and wait five seconds
until the real angle degree appears on Angle display.
Configuration and Calibration Buttons Operation Buttons
9 Enter in Service Mode 1 Motorized Vertical UP Movement of

C-arm
1+2+3 Enter Calibration / Exit Configuration 2 Motorized Vertical Down Movement

or Calibration of C-arm
4+5+6 Enter Calibration 3 Motorized Rotation Movement of C-

arm CCW
1 Increase value 4 Motorized SID Adjustment PLUS
2 Save value 5 Motorized SID Adjustment MINUS
3 Decrease value 6 Motorized Rotation Movement of C-

arm CCW

4 - 4 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration
Configuration and Calibration Buttons Operation Buttons
4 Level / Sublevel up 7 Angle Display
5 Enter / Exit Level / Sublevel 8 Automatic Under-table Position
6 Level / Sublevel down 9 Safety Lock
7 Values / Level display 10 Automatic chest Position
1+3 Allow movement 11 Low Speed
8 Return to calibration 12 SID / Information Display

1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration Guide • 4-5
4.2 Configuration and Calibration Guide

The following is a guide the configuration and calibration of the Unit. See Figure 4-2 and
See Figure 4-3 for a diagram of the configuration and calibration values.
Figure 4-2 Configuration
(110 cm -- 43.3”)
Tube Arm
C12: Max. height of he room
66”)
C32: Max. Height of carriage (168 cm --
(350 cm -- 138”)
(90 cm -- 35.4”)
Detector Arm
C16: Detector Height (45 cm - 17.7”)
Height (63 cm -- 24.8”)

C16
C14: Undertable
C21:
Safety Height (10 cm - 4”)
30 cm 30 cm (11.8”)
3
C17 C18 2
1
1 C31 45 cm (17.7 in)
2 C33 105 cm (41.3 in)
3 C13 120 cm (47 in) chest height all models
4 C32 168 cm (68 in)

4 - 6 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration Guide
Figure 4-3 Calibration

P21 (-30 )
30° P22 (0° )
90°
P41 (-45 °)
P42 (0°) P23 (90° )
30°
P24 (+120°)
P43 (+20 °)
P12
P31 (100 cm/39 in) P13
P11
P32 (180 cm/71 in)

4.2.1 Configuration Table
The following is a guiding table for the configuration of the Unit (see Table 4-1). Write
down the values configured in the Set Value column. Usually C03 and C04 are not to be
modified as they correspond to Standard values. See Figure 4-2 for a diagram of the
configuration values.
Table 4-1
Level Sub-Level Item Standard Value Set Value
C11 Centimeters (Inches) cm (in)
Maximum height of the Room (from ceiling to

C12 350 cm (37.79 in)
floor)
C13 Chest height 120 cm (47.24 in)
Undertable height (position detector under the

C14 table and measure from the central point of the 65 cm (25.59 in)
carriage to the floor)
Table height (measure height from floor to table

C15 75 cm (29.52 in)
top)
Detector height (measure from the Detector

panel to the outer limit of the Detector)
10 cm (3.93 in)
C16 Although this value is set at 10 cm, it is 45 cm (17.72 in)
C01 necessary to change the value to 45 cm (17.72

in) to prevent damage to the Detector Head.
Detector width left. Measure from the central

axis of the Detector (the detector must be in
C17 horizontal position) to the end of the detector in 50 cm (19.68 in) 50 cm (19.68 in)
its left side. If the distance is less than 50 cm
(19.68 in), leave a minimum of 50 cm (19.68 in).
Detector width right. Measure from the central

axis of the Detector (the detector must be in
C18 50 cm (19.68 in) 30 cm (11.81 in)
horizontal position) to the end of the detector in
its right side.
190 cm (74.80 in)

Third SID position. (this configuration applies an
configure at a
optional third detent for SID between C41
C19 range between
(minimum SID) and C42 (maximum SID). Refer
100 and 180, if
to C04.
applicable

4 - 8 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration Guide
Table 4-1
Level Sub-Level Item Standard Value Set Value
Safety Height (This value corresponds to the

C21 minimum height from floor to detector with arm 15 cm (5.9 in) 10 cm (3.93 in)
in vertical position)
C02
Chest SID (This value corresponds to the SID to
C22 be applied when using the automatic chest 180 cm
position).
C31 Minimum Height in horizontal position 45 cm (17.71 in)
C03 C32 Maximum Height in horizontal position 163 cm (64.17 in)
C33 Half way Height 105 cm (41.33 in)
C41 Minimum angle CCW (-30°) -30°
C42 Vertical Angle (0°) 0°

C04
C43 Horizontal Angle (90°) 90°
C44 Minimum Angle CW (+120°) +120°
C51 Minimum SID (100) 100 cm (39.37 in)

C05
C52 Maximum SID (180) 180 cm (70.86 in)
Minimum Rotation Angle of Detector CCW

C61 -45°
(-45°)
C06 0° Detent of Detector Rotation (Perpendicular to

C62 0°
X-ray Beam)
Maximum Rotation Angle of Detector CW

C63 +20°
(+20°)

4.2.2 CalibrationTable
The following is a guiding table for the calibration of the Unit (see Table 4-1). Write down
the values configured in the Set Value column. Also See Figure 4-3 for a diagram of the
calibration values.
Table 4-2
Level Sub-Level Item Instructions Set Value
Minimum Height in horizontal position

P11
(configured in C31)
Maximum Height in horizontal position Measure with

P01 P12
(configured in C32) metric tape.
Half way Height in horizontal position

P13
(configured in C33)
P21 Minimum Angle CCW (configured in C41)

Measure the
P22 Vertical Angle (0°) (Configured in C42) angles with an
P02 Inclinometer.
P23 Horizontal Angle (90°) (Configured in C43)
P24 Minimum Angle CW (+120°) (Configured in C44)
P31 Minimum SID (100) Measure with

Collimator metric
tape. Take into
P03 account 3 cm (1
P32 Maximum SID (180) in) of faceplate
Detector distance.
P41 Minimum Angle CCW -45° (configured in C61) Arm in vertical

position. Measure
P04 --
P42 Vertical Angle 0° (configured in C62) the angles with an
Inclinometer.
P43 Horizontal Angle CW +20° (configured in C63)

4 - 10 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration Details
4.3 Configuration Details
4.3.1 General Configuration Procedure
1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration / Calibration Mode.
2. Simultaneously press 4, 5 and 6 to enter into Configuration Mode.
3. Press 5 to enter or exit from Sub-levels inside a level.
4. Press 4 or 6 to go up or down a level or Sub-level.
5. Press 1 or 3 to modify values in a sub-level.
6. Press 2 to save the data. Angle Display shows OK.
7. Press 6 or 4 to go to CXX or press 5 to exit submenu.
NOTE: To exit from the Configuration Mode simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3.
4.3.2 Configuration Step by Step
4.3.2.1 Configuration of C11 - Inches / CM

1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration/Calibration Mode.
2. Simultaneously press time 4, 5 and 6 to enter into Configuration Mode.
3. C01 appears on the Angle Display. Press 5 to enter in Sub-level C11.
4. Press 4 or 6 to go up or down a level or Sub-level.
5. Press 1 or 3 to modify the values in a sub-level: in this case to toggle between CM/INC. Set
the desired value.
6. Press 2 to save the data. The Angle Display shows OK.
7. Press 4 to go to C12 or press 5 to exit the submenu.
4.3.2.2 Configuration of C12 - Maximum Height of the Room

The standard height of the room for normal functioning of the Unit corresponds to a
configuration value of 350 cm (137.79 in).
1. Once C12 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you are not
coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration
Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)
2. Press 2 to save the data.

1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration Details • 4 - 11
4.3.2.3 Configuration of C13 - Chest Height

The standard height of the chest position corresponds to a configuration value of 120 cm
(47.24 in).
1. Once C13 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. If you are
not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration
Procedure in Section 4.3.1.
4.3.2.4 Configuration of C14 - Under-table Height

The standard height of the Under-table position corresponds to a configuration value of 65
cm (25.59 in) or 10 cm (3.9 in) less than the table height.
4.3.2.5 Configuration of C15 - Table Height

The standard height of the table corresponds to a configuration value of 75 cm (29.52 in).
4.3.2.6 Configuration of C16 - Detector Height

This value provides information to the Unit to avoid collision of the Detector Head on the
floor when it is going into the vertical position. Depending on the height of the Detector,
this value is measured in the horizontal position of the Detector from the Detector Support
to the end of the Detector in its maximum height. This value is factory set at 10 cm (3.93
in).

WARNING! This 10 cm value must be changed to 45 cm (17.72 in) to accommodate the IDC
Detector Head. Failure to do so could result in serious damage to the Detector.
1. Using a metric (imperial) tape, measure the height of the detector, that is, from the Detector
Panel to the base of the detector. Refer to See Figure 4-4. Write the data obtained in the
table below.
2. Once C16 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the value to 45 cm (17.72 in). If
you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General
Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.
Figure 4-4
XX cm
(XX in)
Measure from detector front to end of detector
4.3.2.7 Configuration of C17 - Detector Width Left

This value provides information to the Unit to avoid collision of the detector when going to
the vertical position. Depending on the width of the Detector, this value is measured in the
horizontal position of the Detector from the Detector half to the left of the Detector in its

maximum point. In this case the Standard value is 50 cm (19.68 in).

1. Using a metric (imperial) tape, measure the width of the detector, that is, from the
center axis of the detector to the left end (if C17) or to the right end (if C18). Refer to
See Figure 4-5. Write the data obtained in the table below.
2. Once C17 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you
are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General
Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)
4.3.2.8 Configuration of C18 - Detector Width Right

This value provides information to the Unit to avoid collision of the Detector Head when
going to vertical position. Depending on the width of the Detector, this value is measured
in horizontal position of the Detector from the Detector half to the right of the Detector in
its maximum point. In this case the Standard value is 50 cm (19.68 in).
Figure 4-5
C17 - Measure from the Detector Center to

left of the Detector or as in this case, if the
distance is less than 50 cm (19.7 in), apply
minimum of 50 cm (19.7 in).
C18 - Measure form Detector Center to

right limit of Detector.
C17 C18
50 cm (19.68 in) XX cm (XX in)
4.3.2.9 Configuration of C19 - Optional Third SID Point

This value provides information to the Unit of a third SID detent point. In case it is not

needed, set 190 cm (74.80 in).

1. Once C19 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you are not
coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration
Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)
3. Press 5. C01 appears on the display.
4. Press 4 to go to C02.
4.3.2.10 Configuration of C21 - Safety Height

This value provides information to the Unit of the minimum height allowable of the Arm in
the vertical position. In this case the standard value is 15 cm ( 5.9 in) measured from the
bottom of the Detector relative to the floor.
1. Press 5 to enter in Sub-level C21. Once C21 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to
set the desired value. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4
of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)
3. Press 5 to exit the submenu.
4.3.2.11 Configuration of C22 - Chest SID

This value provides information to the Unit of the SID to be applied when using the automatic
chest positioning. In this case the standard value is 180 cm. If the operator requires to modify
this values proceed in the following way:
1. Once C2.2 appears on Angle Display (follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of General
2. Configuration Procedure in case you are not coming from previous step), press 1 or 3 to set
the desired value.
4. Press 4 to go to C03 and press 5 again to enter in C31.
4.3.2.12 Configuration of C31 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position

This value provides information to the Unit of the minimum height allowable of the Arm in
horizontal position. In this case the standard value is 45 cm (17.71 in) measured from the arm
central axis to the floor.
1. Press 5 to enter in Sub-level C31. Once C31 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to
set the desired value. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4
of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)

4.3.2.13 Configuration of C32 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position

This value provides information to the Unit of the maximum height allowable of the Arm
in horizontal position. In this case the standard value is 163 cm (64.17 in) measured from
the Arm Central Axis to the floor.
4.3.2.14 Configuration of C33 - Mid Height in Horizontal Position

This value provides information to the Unit of the middle height of the Arm in horizontal
position. In this case the standard value is 105 cm (41.33 in) measured from the Arm
Central Axis to the floor.
4. Press 4 three times to go to C60 and press 5 again to enter C61.
4.3.2.15 Configuration of C4.0 and C5.0

These values do not need to be modified as they are part of the standard radiographic
exams. In case these need to be modified, follow the same procedure as before.
4.3.2.16 Configuration of C61 - Minimum Angle for Detector

This value provides information to the Unit of the detector angle when turned
counterclockwise. In this case the standard value is -45°.
1. Once C61 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set -45°. (If you are not coming
from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure
in Section 4.3.1.)
4.3.2.17 Configuration of C62 - Detector Detent at 0°

This value provides information to the Unit of the detector angle when turned to 0°. Then

rotational movement will stop in this position. The standard value is 0°.
1. Once C62 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set 0°. (If you are not coming from
the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section
4.3.1.)
4.3.2.18 Configuration of C63 - Maximum Angle for Detector

This value provides information to the Unit of the detector angle when turned clockwise. The
standard value is +20°.
1. Once C63 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set 20°. (If you are not coming
from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in
Section 4.3.1).

1600 Configuration and Calibration • Common Configuration Errors • 4 - 17
4.4 Common Configuration Errors

The following is a set of tips that may help to solve/understand some common errors
found during the Configuration process. See Figure 4-6 for distances and standard values
during Configuration.
4.4.1 Undertable Configuration Errors
Error will appear if:

• The maximum height value (C32) is less than the Undertable height (C14) + Receptor
arm length (90 cm - 35.4 in).
• The maximum room height value (C12) is less than the Tube Arm length (110 cm/
43.3 in) + Receptor Arm length (90 cm/35.4 in) + Undertable height (C14).
• The Undertable height (C14) is less than the Receptor height (C16 + Safety Distance
C21).
4.4.2 Chest Configuration Errors
Error will appear if:

• The maximum height value (C32) is less than the chest height (C13).
• The maximum room height value (C12) is less than the Tube Arm length (110 cm/
43.3 in) + chest height (C13).

4 - 18 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Common Configuration Errors
Figure 4-6
(110 cm -- 43.3”)
Tube Arm
C12: Max. height of he room
C32: Max. Height of carriage (168 cm -- 66”)

(350 cm -- 138”)
(90 cm -- 35.4”)
Detector Arm
C16: Detector Height (45 cm -- 17.7”)
Height (63 cm -- 24.8”)

C16
C14: Undertable
C21:
Safety Height (10 cm -- 4”)
30 cm 30 cm (11.8”)
3
C17 C18
2
1
1 C31 45 cm (17.7 in)
2 C33 105 cm (41.3 in)
3 C13 120 cm (47 in) chest height all models
4 C32 168 cm (68 in)

1600 Configuration and Calibration • Calibration Details • 4 - 19
4.5 Calibration Details
4.5.1 General Calibration Procedure
1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration / Calibration Mode. See
See Figure 4-7.
2. Simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3 (P01 appears on the Angle Display) to enter into
Calibration Mode.
Figure 4-7
8 10
1 4
2 5
3 6
9 11
12
3. Press 4 to go to P01.
4. Press 5 to enter into the Sub-level (it goes directly to the last selected Sub-level).
5. Press 4 or 6 to go to PXX. PXX appears on the Angle Display and is followed by the
Configured Value.
6. Press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the arm. Now the operation movement buttons are
enabled.
7. Position the C-arm at the calibration point (measure with a metric tape or use an
Inclinometer).
8. Press Under-table to return to calibration.
9. Press 2 to save data. The Angle Display shows OK.
10. Press 5 to return to P0X.
NOTE: Simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3 to exit Calibration Mode.

4 - 20 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Calibration Details
4.5.2 Calibration Step by Step
4.5.2.1 Calibration of P11 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position

1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration / Calibration Mode.
2. Simultaneously press 1, 3 and 4 (P01 appears on display) to enter into Calibration Mode.
3. Press 5 to enter into P11 Sub-level (it goes directly to the last selected Sub-level).
4. P11 appears on the Angle Display and is followed by the Configured Value.
5. Simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement.
6. Position the C-arm in the configured position (i.e., 45 cm / 17.71 in). Measure with a metric
(imperial) tape from the central axis of the arm to the floor.
9. Press 4 to go to P12 or press 5 to exit the submenu.
4.5.2.2 Calibration of P12 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position

1. Once P12 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the C-
arm. (If you are not coming from the previous step follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General
Calibration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)
2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (i.e., 300 cm / 118.11 in). Measure with a
metric (imperial) tape from the central axis of the arm to the floor.
4.5.2.3 Calibration of P13 - Half Way Height in Horizontal Position

arm. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General
2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (i.e., 110 cm / 43.30 in). Measure with a
metric (imperial) tape from the central axis of the arm to the floor.
4. Press 2 to save data.
6. Press 4 to go to P02 and press 5 again to enter in P21.

4.5.2.4 Calibration of P21 - Minimum Angle CCW (-30°)

1. Once P21 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the
C-arm. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the
General Calibration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)
2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (-30°). Measure with an Inclinometer.
4.5.2.5 Calibration of P22 - Vertical Angle (0°)

2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (0°). Measure with an Inclinometer.
3. Press Under-table to go back to calibration.
4.5.2.6 Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle (90°)

4.5.2.7 Calibration of P24 - Minimum Angle CW (120°)


4.5.2.8 Calibration of P31 - Minimum SID (100 cm / 39 in)

2. Simultaneously press 1+3 to allow movement.
3. Position the C-arm in the configured position (100 cm / 39.37 in). Measure with the metric
Collimator tape to the tabletop. Discount 3 cm of tabletop-detector distance.
4.5.2.9 Calibration of P32 - Maximum SID (180 cm / 70.86 in)

2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (180 cm / 70.86 in). Measure with the
Collimator metric tape to the tabletop. Discount 3 cm (1.18 in) of tabletop-detector
distance.
4.5.2.10 Calibration of P41 - Minimum Detector Angle (-45°)

2. Position the Detector Arm in the configured position (-45°). Measure with the inclinometer
on the Detector surface.

4.5.2.11 Calibration of P42 - 0° Detector Angle

2. Position the Detector Arm in the configured position (0°). Measure with the
inclinometer on the Detector surface.
4.5.2.12 Calibration of P43 - Maximum Detector Angle (+20°)

2. Position the Detector Arm in the configured position (+20°). Measure with the
inclinometer on the Detector surface.
5. Simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3 to exit Calibration Mode.

Figure 4-8
P21 (-30 )
30° P22 (0° )
90°
P41 (-45 °)
P42 (0°) P23 (90° )
30°
P24 (+120°)
P43 (+20 °)
P12
P31 (100 cm/39 in) P13
P11
P32 (180 cm/71 in)

1600 Configuration and Calibration • Adjustments • 4 - 25
4.6 Adjustments
4.6.1 Adjustment Tools
The following special tools have been used for adjustment of the X-ray System (these
tools are not included with the system):
• Collimator Test Tool (Model RMI 161B9).
• Beam Alignment Test Tool (Model RMI 162A).
• SID Test Stand Tool (Inside Case: RMI Model 175).
• Light Meter (Standard).
• Unfors Light Meter (Model: Mult-o-meter, Type 577L or equivalent)
4.6.2 Balance Test of the C-arm
NOTE: This section only applies to systems where the X-ray Tube or the Collimator has
to be replaced by a different X-ray Tube or Collimator (different weight).
4.6.2.1 C-arm Balance in Horizontal Position

1. Turn the unit ON. Place the C-arm in the horizontal position and open the SID to
maximum meters.
2. Press the Rotation button and check that the C-arm is balanced, that is, the C-arm
should not tilt in any direction without force applied at any point. If the C-arm is
correctly balanced, go to Section 4.6.3. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the Top Back Cover of the Tube-Collimator Assembly Support.
b. Install or remove the Counterweight Plates required to balance the C-arm, such
that the Tube-Collimator Assembly end weighs the same as the Detector
Assembly end. See See Figure 4-9. Re-install the Top Cover.
Figure 4-9
Counterweight Plates

4 - 26 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Adjustments
4.6.3 To Align of X-ray Beam
1. With a level, check the vertical/horizontal position of the Column. See See Figure 4-10. If
necessary, modify the position of the Column with the screws attached to the Column
Upper Support.
Figure 4-10
Levels
2. Check the level of the Tube-Collimator Assembly. The mechanical installation provides a
leveled Assembly; however, you should check that the Tube-Collimator Assembly is
parallel with the Detector Head. If necessary reinstall the Tube-Collimator Assembly.
3. Check the level of the Detector Head, first in horizontal position (chest), then in vertical
position (table). If necessary, move the Detector assembly up or down with the four
Detector Assembly leveling screws. See See Figure 4-11. The Tube-Collimator Assembly
must be perfectly aligned with the Detector Head Assembly.
Figure 4-11
Detector
Leveling
Screws
4. Place the C-arm in the vertical position. Place the SID at 1 meter (39.37 inches).

5. Turn ON the Collimator light and center the Collimator in relation to the Detector Face
Plate. The horizontal and transversal position of the light axis projected by the
Collimator Lamp must be in line with the axis or Field Sizes marked on the Detector
Face Plate.
If needed, modify the Collimator position by carefully loosening and tightening the
four Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws (Allen) of the Collimator. See See
Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12
Centering Adjustment
and Safety Screws
6. Position the Collimator Test Tool on the Detector Face Plate.

7. Adjust the Light Field of the Collimator Lamp to line within carbon fibre faceplate. the
rectangle drawn inside the Collimator Test Tool.
8. Center the Beam Alignment Test Tool on the Collimator Test Tool.
9. Make an exposure at 60 kVp / 5 mAs.
10.Acquire the Digital Image in the Control Station and
a. Check that the X-ray Field falls just within the image of the inner rectangle of
the Collimator Test Tool.
If an edge of the X-ray Field falls out of the inner rectangle, there is a
misalignment of the Light Field with respect to the X-ray Field. The maximum
misalignment allowed is 2% of the SID (for a SID of 1m = 2 cm tolerance).

See Section 4.6.3.1 for Alignment of the Light Field with the X-ray Field.
b. Check that the X-ray Beam is perpendicular to the plane of the Image Receptor. If
the Image Receptor is parallel to the Detector Face Plate, the perpendicularity of the
X-ray Beam can be checked using the Beam Alignment Test Tool with the Collima-
tor Test Tool.
Based on the next illustration (see See Figure 4-13), the criteria for a SID at 1 meter (39.37
inches) is:
• If the image of the two balls overlap (A) the X-ray Beam is perpendicular to within 0.5°.
• If the image of the top ball (larger shadow) intercepts the first circle (B), the X-ray Beam
is about 1.5° away from the perpendicular.
• If the image of the top ball (larger shadow) intercepts the second circle (C), the X-ray
Beam is about 3° away from the perpendicular.
In cases (A) and (B) perpendicularity is within the tolerance allowed for a SID at 1 meter / 39
in (top ball is within or intercepting the first circle). The third case (C) needs readjustment.
See Section 4.6.3.2 for perpendicularity adjustment.
Figure 4-13
A B C
c. Check that the X-ray Beam is properly centered with the Image Receptor. The max-
imum misalignment allowed is 2% of the SID (for a SID of 1m = 2 cm tolerance).
4.6.3.1 Alignment of Light Field with X-ray Field

To align the Light Field with the X-ray Field
1. Place the C-arm in the vertical position. The Tube-Collimator Assembly must be perfectly
aligned with the Detector Assembly. Check with a level correct horizontal position of both
assemblies.
2. Place the SID at 1 meter (39.37 in).
3. Position the Collimator Test Tool on the Detector Face Plate. See See Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14
Collimator
Test Tool
4. Turn ON the Collimator light and center the Collimator Test Tool with the light axis
projected by the Collimator Lamp.
5. Adjust the Light Field of the Collimator Lamp to the rectangle drawn inside the
Collimator Test Tool.
6. Check on the acquired Digital Image, the adjustment required to meet the Light Field
with the X-ray Field. Identify the deviation on the axis imaged on the image. See See
Figure 4-15 and See Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-15 - Light Field Misalignment

Acquired Digital Image
Collimated Light Field
Collimated X-ray Field
Figure 4-16 - Good Fields Alignment

Acquired Digital Image
Collimated Light Field = Collimated X-ray Field

7. Do not remove the Collimator Test Tool from its original position and adjust the Light
Field by moving the Collimator Unit and/or the Collimator Lamp.
a. The Collimator Lamp must be ON during Light Field adjustment.
b. Modify the Collimator position by carefully unscrewing and screwing the four
Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws (Allen) until the Light Field coincides
with the axis reference imaged (numbers and dots) on the acquired image. See
See Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17
Centering Adjustment
and Safety Screws
c. If adjustment is still necessary, modify the position of the Collimator Lamp

(refer to the Collimator Manual).
8. Repeat the exposure and procedure until the result is satisfactory. The maximum
misalignment allowed is 2% of the SID (for a SID of 1m = 2 cm of tolerance).
4.6.3.2 Perpendicularity Adjustment of X-ray Beam with Image Receptor

If the perpendicularity is out of tolerance (top ball is out of the first circle), adjust the
perpendicularity as follows:
1. Place the C-arm in the vertical position. The Tube-Collimator Assembly has to be
perfectly aligned with the Detector Assembly. Check with a level correct horizontal
Place the SID at 1 meter (39.37 in).
2. Position the Collimator Test Tool on the Detector Face Plate.

3. Turn ON the Collimator light and center the Collimator Test Tool with the light axis
projected by the Collimator Lamp.
4. Place the Beam Alignment Test Tool centered on the Collimator Test Tool and observe if
the shadow of the Beam Alignment Test Tool is projected in an equal proportion around it.
5. Check on the acquired Digital Image the adjustment required to center the top ball mark.
The shadow around the Beam Alignment Test Tool can also help to make a first correction.
6. Slightly loosen the four Safety Screws (Allen-6) of the Tube-Collimator Assembly. See See
Figure 4-18. If required, perform the following adjustments:
• For horizontal correction, horizontally move the Tube-Collimator Assembly before tight-
ening the four Safety Screws.
• For vertical correction loosen or tighten carefully the four Leveling Screws (Allen-3) of
the Tube-Collimator Assembly before tightening the four Safety Screws.
• The Angle correction is factory adjusted and it is recommended to not perform any addi-
tional correction. If needed, slightly loosen the two Safety Screws of the Pivoting Locking
Ratchet and adjust very carefully the two Set screws of the Ratchet to position left right
the Lock Tooth. After adjustment, tighten the two Safety Screws again.
7. Repeat the exposure and procedures until the result is satisfactory (top ball must be inside
of the first circle).

Figure 4-18
3
Tube Fixing Screws
Lock Tooth
Set Screws
Leveling Screws: The Tube-Collimator Assembly moves

1
slightly up or down from one side.
Fixing Screws: are adjusted in the middle of the slot and can
2
be moved slightly.
Tube Leveling Set Screws and Tube Fixing Screws: are

factory adjusted but can be adjusted to obtain the required
3 level of the Tube. In horizontal position, loosen the Tube Fixing
Screws, adjust to the left or right with the Set Screws, and re-
tighten the Tube Fixing Screws.
Shims (factory installed/adjusted with extra units included in

4 package): These plates can be added or removed to extend/
reduce the length of the Tube-Collimator Assembly.

NOTES
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
AND CALIBRATION

5.2 “Initial Configuration Procedure”
5.3 “Configuration and Test Switches”
5.4 “Filament and Anode Tests”
5.5 “Generator Service Mode”
5.6 “GSM Program Menu”
5.7 “Customized Configuration”
5.8 “Extended Memory Setting”
5.9 “X-Ray Tube Type Selection”
5.10 “X-Ray Tube Data”
5.11 “Calibration”
5.12 “Generator Checklist”

5 - 2 • Generator Configuration and Calibration •

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Safety Warnings and Notices • 5-3
WARNING! Do not supply the mains power until specifically instructed to do so in this
document.
WARNING! The main capacitors of the high voltage inverter retain a large portion of their
charge for approximately three minutes after the unit is turned off.
WARNING! Before making any exposure in auto-calibration, verify that the link between
the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer is installed.
5.1.2 Installation Safety
WARNING! If the mA station for focal spot change is not configured according to the
x-ray tube ratings, the tube filaments may be permanently damaged.
CAUTION! Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is completed.
CAUTION! Auto-calibration can be stopped momentarily by releasing the Handswitch

button whenever no exposure is in process. Do not exit from Auto-
calibration mode before the procedure has been completed.
NOTE: Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the Auto-Calibration button.

After a message informs you that Auto-calibration has been cancelled, the GSM
menu is displayed.
NOTE: To switch ON the whole system (Console + Generator), press the ON button on
the Console Housing. To switch OFF the whole system, select the OFF button on
the Main Menu (application).
NOTE: Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this document.
Perform only the sections required to calibrate this unit.
NOTE: In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory pre-programmed

and cannot be changed.

5 - 4 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Initial Configuration Procedure
5.2 Initial Configuration Procedure

Configuration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout procedures that
must be carried out prior to making x-ray exposures. Functional characteristics of this
Generator are defined at the time of installation.
Calibration data and some configuration data are stored in the extended memory area on a
non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board in the Power
Cabinet.
When the initial setup and checkout is completed the Generator will be ready for Calibration.
WARNING! Do not supply the mains power until specifically instructed to do so in this
document.
WARNING! The main capacitors of the high voltage inverter retain a large portion of their
charge for approximately three minutes after the unit is turned off.
NOTE: Record all the configuration settings.
The Generator configuration is determined by:

• X-ray tube model and use
• System requirements
• Maximum kV, mA, kW
Specific versions of U24-EPROM on the ATP Console CPU Board and U5-EPROM on the
HT Controller Board are based on the Generator configuration. See Figure 5-1.
The system configuration and test switches are shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1
Dip Switch Location Function
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board System Configuration
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board Test
3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board Not used for Configuration
3000SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board System Configuration and Test

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Initial Configuration Procedure • 5-5
Figure 5-1
J7 J8
3024SW2
U24
3024SW3
3024SW1
ATP Console CPU Board - A3024
3000SW2
U5
HT Controller - A3000 Interface Control - A3009
Power Supply
Filament Driver
A3004
Power Cabinet - Front Panel

5 - 6 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Test Switches
5.3 Configuration and Test Switches

ATP Console Dip Switches must be configured with the Generator turned OFF,
and they are read when the Generator is turned ON again.
5.3.1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board
Set the dip switch 3024SW1 in accordance with Table 5-2.

Table 5-2
3024SW1 Position Open (OFF) Closed (ON)

1 60 Hz * 50 Hz *
2 - Normal -- Application mode.
Exposures are inhibited when Door
Interlock Switch is opened.
3 Not Used Not Used
4 Not Used Not Used
Generators with High Speed Starter (LV-DRAC) are always set SW1-1 to 60 Hz. In other Generators set
SW1-1 in accordance with the Power Line Frequency.
5.3.2 3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board
Set the dip switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3
3024SW2 Position Open (OFF) Closed (ON)

1 Skip transmission to Power Module. Normal -- Application mode.
Use only for display purposes or Demo
Consoles where there is no Power
Module. Be sure that J3 connector is
not plugged to the ATP Console CPU
Board.
2 Beep Sound is not emitted by the ATP Beep Sound is emitted by the ATP
Console CPU Board. Console CPU Board.
3 Normal -- Application mode. Service Mode.
4 kV Log (Renard) Scale Mode for kV kV Lineal Scale Mode for kV variation
variation (kV changes in logarithmic (Normal mode) (kV changes one by
steps). one).

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Test Switches • 5-7
5.3.3 Self-running Mode
Continously starting and braking the anode produces an overheating in the x-ray tube
stator (i.e., during the calibration procedure). The Self-running Mode avoids this
overheating.
In the Self-running Mode (switch 3243SW4-6 in the ON position), the anode remains
running for approximately one minute and rotates at 3300 or 10000 rpm (see Table 5-4).
The LV-RRAC enters the Self-running Mode when Preparation is selected three
consecutive times only from the console buttons or from the handswitch, and the time
between two of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than 30 seconds. See Figure 5-2.
Table 5-4
3243SW4-6 Function
6 ON = Self running enabled
Normal = OFF OFF = Self-running disabled
Figure 5-2
1
t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s
2
tsr tsr
3 3
tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm
1 Preparation Signals
2 Anode Rotation
3 Self-running Mode

5 - 8 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Filament and Anode Tests
5.4 Filament and Anode Tests
NOTE: Changeover point for small to large filament must be set to 320mA.
CAUTION! If the focal spot switch-over point is changed after mA calibration, the mA
stations affected must be re-calibrated.
5.4.1 Filament Driver
Make sure the Generator is Off.

Verify that Test dip switch 3000SW2-2 (Filament and Rotor interlock bypass) on the HT
Controller Board is in the Off position.
Turn the console On and verify that both LEDs (DS1 and DS2) on the Filament Driver Board
are On.
5.4.2 Focal Spots Configuration and Test
Determine the mA station where switch-over from Small to Large Focal Spot will take place.
The smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot can be any of the available mA station or
E01 memory location when is required to configure all mA stations for the Small Focal Spot.
This mA station is selected according to the tube rating and/or customer preference.
WARNING! If the mA station for focal spot change is not configured according to the x-ray
tube ratings, the tube filaments may be permanently damaged.
1. With the generator Off, set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in On
position to permit the service mode.
2. Power On the System. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration
button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) of the corresponding X-ray
Tube and press the OK button.

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Filament and Anode Tests • 5-9
Figure 5-3
3. Select the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot using the Increase or Decrease
mA buttons.
4. Press the Toggle button to store the select mA station and then press the Confirm or
Dismiss buttons to confirm or cancel the process. When it is confirmed, the ATP
Console CPU Board emits a double-beep.
5. Exit from calibration mode.

5 - 10 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Generator Service Mode
5.5 Generator Service Mode

The Service Menu allows access to the Generator Service, the Software Upgrade and
Settings menus and the Error Log menus.
1. Switch ON the System (Console + Generator) by pressing the external ON button on the
Console Housing for two seconds. This starts the application and shows the Main Menu.
The functionality of the controls is as follows:
Table 5-5
Control Function
ON / OFF Switch on the Console Switch ON / OFF the whole System

Housing (PC)
OFF Button on the Main Menu of the Switch OFF the whole System
Touch Screen Console (application)
NOTE: To switch ON the whole System (Console + Generator), press the ON button on the
Console Housing. To switch OFF the whole System, select the OFF button on the
Main Menu (Application).
2. Select the Service Mode button on the Main menu.

3. Enter the Service Password (code 2434) on the Service Access Panel.
4. Access the different menus by selecting the required menu button. See Figure 5-4. To
return to the Main Menu, press the Exit button.

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Generator Service Mode • 5 - 11
Figure 5-4
Access Screen from Main Menu
Service
Mode
Menu

5 - 12 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • GSM Program Menu
5.6 GSM Program Menu

The Generator Service Mode (GSM) program allows access to the service screens for Reading
the Exposure Counters, and for Configuration and Calibration procedures. After gaining
access to the GSM program, a black Information Area may appear at the lower right corner of
the screen, showing some messages about the process (e.g., Power Up the Generator).
1. Enter the GSM program by selecting the Generator Service button on the Service Mode
Menu. See Figure 5-5.
NOTE: After pressing the Configuration, Manual Calibration or Auto Calibration buttons and
starting the GSM program the following error message may appear: “Please check
calibration dip switch and toggle with power off.” This means these functions are
disabled because the position of the dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console
CPU Board is not in Service Mode Allowed. Turn OFF the generator, change the
dip switch 3024SW2-3 to Closed (ON) position, turn ON the generator and restart the
GSM program.
Figure 5-5
NOTE: During operation of the GSM program, the selected button is displayed as yellow.
2. The Service screens for Read Exposure Counters, Configuration, Manual Calibration
and Auto Calibration are displayed after selecting the respective button. Repress the
selected button to return to the GSM menu. The Exit button can also be used to return to
the GSM menu, especially if the other buttons are disabled.

Generator Configuration and Calibration • GSM Program Menu • 5 - 13
NOTE: The Configuration menu is closed by pressing any Configuration or Exit

buttons. A double-beep will sound confirming the storage of the values set for
each workstation.
3. Select the Close button to exit from the GSM program.

4. Exposure status indicators for Ready and X-ray On are located on the upper right area
of the GSM screens. The Information Area displays data related to the service mode,
remaining heat units, working mode, errors indicators, etc. See Figure 5-6.
When an error code or message is displayed on the GSM program, select the Reset
Error button to clear its indicator.
Figure 5-6
1 3
2 5
6
7
1 Workstation Selected
2 Information Area
3 Exit Button
4 Exposure Indicators
5 Button of Menu Selected
6 Error Indicator
7 Reset Error Button

5 - 14 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Customized Configuration
5.7 Customized Configuration

This procedure always has to be performed when the ATP Console CPU Board is replaced
with a new one.
1. Enter in the GSM Program and select the Configuration button. See Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7
2. Select the first workstation to be configured, by pressing the respective button (only the
icon of the selected workstation has a different color). The console displays one of the
following values:
Table 5-6
Display Function Value Description

1st Value Tubes 1 Tube-1 - X1600 or X1600 Plus
2nd Value Devices - Working 0 -- Direct Direct (No Bucky) - X1600 or X1600
Mode Plus
1 -- Bucky 1 Bucky-1 - NA
3 -- STD Tomo Standard Tomo - NA
3rd Value Ion Chambers 1 Ion Chamber-1 - NA
3. Set the new value by pressing the corresponding Increase or Decrease buttons. Also set
the selected AEC Areas by default for each Workstation in the system.
4. Exit from configuration mode by pressing the Configuration button. A double-beep will
sound confirming the process.
5. Exposures made from workstations are only enabled with the internal Preparation and
Exposure signals controlled by the Handswitch or Rad Footswitch (connected to the PC
Interface Box).

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Extended Memory Setting • 5 - 15
5.8 Extended Memory Setting
5.8.1 Extended Memory Locations
Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended Memory
Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each Memory Location.
See Table 5-7.
NOTE: For generators with only one Radiographic X-ray Tube, this tube must be
configured, calibrated and used as Tube-1.
Table 5-7
Memory Location Function Value

E02 TUBE-1 -- Tube type
E03 Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)
E04 AEC-1 calibration
E05 High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)
E06 Digital kV Loop Open
E07 Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower
value)
E08 AEC-1 tracking
E12 AEC Density Scale
E13 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E15 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
* Note.-- Memory Locations not listed are not used.
5.8.2 How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory
The Extended Memory data is entered from the Console when the unit is in service mode.
Access to memory locations is indicated below:
1. With the Generator OFF, set the dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU
Board to the On position to enable service mode.
2. Power ON the System and select the Manual Calibration button on the GSM
program.
3. Select any Workstation (WS) using the Up and Down buttons, then press the OK
button to enter into calibration mode. See Figure 5-8.

5 - 16 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Extended Memory Setting
NOTE: In calibration mode, only the kV and mA parameters can be modified. Values for
Time and mAs are factory programmed.
4. Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position, one step for each of the memory
locations. The mA Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01), and they
will continue sequentially as the Increase mA button is pressed.
5. The values stored in each location are shown on the Calibration Value display after the
Read button or the Increase or Decrease buttons are pressed. Since these buttons are also
used to increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added or subtracted
from the reading, to obtain the current stored value. Select the new value by pressing the
Increase and Decrease buttons. Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on
the calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.
6. Store the new value by pressing the Store button (Check-summ function).
NOTE: If the Store button is not pressed after a new value is selected, no modified data is
retained.
7. Exit from the calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button again.
8. Turn the Generator OFF and set the dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU
Board in Off position to place the Generator in normal mode.

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Extended Memory Setting • 5 - 17
Figure 5-8
Calibration
Value Panel

5 - 18 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • X-Ray Tube Type Selection
5.9 X-Ray Tube Type Selection

In order to properly select the X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves for the Tubes connected to
the Generator, perform the following procedure:
1. Enter into calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on the GSM
program. Select one of the workstations related to the X-ray Tube to be configured. Press
OK.
2. Select the respective memory location, E02 for Tube-1 (memory location is shown on the
mA Display).
3. Identify in 5.10 “X-Ray Tube Data” on page 5-19, the X-ray tube that is being installed and
note its tube type number.
4. Set the tube number by pressing the Increase or Decrease calibration buttons until the
correct number is showed on the Calibration Value panel.
5. Store the value by pressing the Store button.
6. Verify that the tube code (ID) shown in the mAs Display is the same as the tube code listed
in 5.10 “X-Ray Tube Data” on page 5-19. The tube code (ID) can only be read for the
selected X-ray Tube after pressing the Store button.
7. If required, repeat this procedure for the other X-ray Tube. Exit from calibration mode.
CAUTION! For Generators with a High Speed Starter, now configure the High Speed X-ray
Tubes by setting the respective dip switches 3243SW1 and / or 3243SW2 on the
Control DRAC Board. (Refer to LV-DRAC - Digital Rotating Anode Controller
document).

Generator Configuration and Calibration • X-Ray Tube Data • 5 - 19
5.10 X-Ray Tube Data

Refer to the Generator manual for a table with specific x-ray tubes and their
corresponding numbers.

5 - 20 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Calibration
5.11 Calibration
CAUTION! Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is completed.
Calibration data is entered in digital form and stored in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-
EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board, thus no battery back-up is required.
NOTE: Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this document.
Perform only the sections required to calibrate this unit.
5.11.1 Digital mA Loop Open
To achieve the most accurate calibration, this procedure has to be automatically performed
by the Generator (Auto-calibration).
Digital mA Loop Open is calibrated by performing the following steps:

1. With the Generator power OFF, set:
• Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in OFF position (enables Filament
and Rotor Interlocks).
• Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in ON position (Digital mA Loop
Open).
2. Turn the Generator ON.
3. Perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in 5.11.2 “Auto-Calibration of Digital
mA Loop Open” for each X-ray Tube in the system.
5.11.2 Auto-Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open
Auto-calibration of the Filament Current Numbers is divided in two procedures related to the
mA stations available for the Small or Large Focal Spots.
It is recommended to start with the Small Focal Spot (first group) and continue with the Large
Focal Spot (second group).
WARNING! Each time the Auto-calibration is started for the small or large focal spot, all
calibration data stored for the filament current numbers of the selected focal spot
are automatically set to 344. Therefore, a new complete calibration of the
filament current numbers for this focal spot is required.
Auto-calibration starts with the minimum available mA station for the selected Focal Spot at
50 kV and follows with the other combinations of mA stations for the Focal Spot at the kV

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Calibration • 5 - 21
break points.
1. Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button on the GSM
menu.
2. Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the
OK button. This workstation has to be one of the previously configured as Direct.
3. Select the Small Focal Spot by pressing the Small button and then press the OK
button. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button (Yes or
No) on the new screen. See Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9
4. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing the respective

button (Confirm or Dismiss) on the calibration screen. See Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10
5. Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lit and the Press Prep
and Expose message appears on the screen. At this moment, the Generator has checked the
mA stations available for the Small Focal Spot. See Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Calibration • 5 - 23
6. Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray Tube is near or at 100% (HU
0% displayed on the screen).
WARNING! Before making any exposure in auto-calibration, verify that the link between
the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer is installed.
7. Keep the Handswitch button fully pressed to perform continuous exposures.
NOTE: In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory pre-programmed

and cannot be changed.
CAUTION! Auto-calibration can be stopped momentarily by releasing the Handswitch

button whenever no exposure is in process. Do not exit from Auto-
calibration mode before the procedure has been completed.
NOTE: Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the Auto-Calibration button.

After a message informs you that Auto-calibration has been cancelled, the GSM
menu is displayed.
If during the Auto-calibration process, an error indication is momentarily shown (e.g.,

tube overload), it means that at this moment, the Generator cannot calibrate the selected
kV / mA combination (because an anode overheated, a space charge occurred, Generator
power limit, etc.). In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the
following available kV / mA combinations for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the
process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated.
If the Heat Unit’s value displayed is more than 60%, exposures are inhibited momentarily
and the message Tube too hot is shown on the screen. This message will disappear and
exposures can be made again when the X-ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat
Unit’s capacity.
At this point, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Unit’s value displayed is close to
the 20% before making any exposure.
The Generator tries to calibrate each kV / mA combination for ten (10) attempts
(maximum). If calibration is cancelled (after ten attempts), the message Auto calibration
failure is shown on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration button to exit from
Auto-calibration mode and return to the GSM menu. Calibration can also be cancelled due
to a space charge occuring during calibration of the lowest kV at the highest mA stations
for the Focal Spot selected. The message Auto calibration failure is also shown on the
screen until you press the Auto Calibration button to exit from Auto-calibration mode
and return to the GSM menu.
WARNING! If auto-calibration is cancelled due to auto-calibration failure, continue the

auto-calibration procedure for the other focal spot. Check at the end of the
auto-calibration procedure which kV/mA combinations have not been auto-
calibrated for each focal spot (these combinations have the filament current
number set to 344).

8. When Auto-calibration is successfully performed, the message Auto Calibration OK is

displayed on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration button to exit from Auto-
calibration mode and return to the GSM menu.
9. Repeat the same procedure for the Large Focal Spot.
10.Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button on the GSM
menu.
11.Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the OK
button. This workstation has to be previously configured as Direct.
12.Select the Large Focal Spot by pressing the Large button and then press the OK button.
13.Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button on each screen.
Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lit. At this moment, the
Generator has checked the mA stations available for the Large Focal Spot.
14.Before starting the exposures, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Unit’s value
displayed is close to the 20%.
15.After performing both procedures (for Small and Large Focal Spots), enter in Manual
Calibration mode and select each combination of the available mA stations for each Focal
Spot at the kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV). Press the Read button to read on the
calibration panel the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each
combination and record the new values in the Data Book.
NOTE: The highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the
lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
16.Exit from calibration mode.

17.Perform the Auto-calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.
18.Turn the Generator power OFF and set the Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller
Board in the Off position (Digital mA Loop Closed).

Generator Configuration and Calibration • Generator Checklist • 5 - 25
5.12 Generator Checklist

1. Introduction
2. Identify
_____ATP Console CPU Board
_____HT Controller Board 4
3. Enter Service Mode
_____Complete
_____Identify Counters and Error Logs
4. Configuration Workstation
_____Complete
5. Complete AEC Configuration
_____Enable AEC
_____ Select Chambers
6. Enter Extended Memory Settings
_____Entering Mode
_____Tube Type
_____AEC Data
7. Anode Rotation Test
_____Complete
8. mA Closed Loop Auto Calibration
_____Small Filament
_____Large Filament
9. AEC Calibration
_____Complete

NOTES
DETECTOR CALIBRATION AND CONFIGURATION
Included is the following:

6.1 “About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller”
6.2 “Adjustments on the LCD Display”
6.3 “Half Value Layer Testing”
6.4 “Detector Head Calibration”
6.5 “AEC Procedure”
Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0001-004 v5.0 M3.0.206 • June 6, 2007

6 - 2 • Detector Calibration And Configuration •
Magellan
Version
2.1.149 December 15, 2005 Manual revision and module creation
2.1.149.1 January 15, 2006 Gain and offset, dark and flat field revision
Minor revisions to dark and flat fields, revisions to

2.1.149.2 February 9, 2006
Gain and Offset, addition of Half Layer Testing
2.1.149.3 February 22, 2006 Revisions to Gain and Offset
2.1.151 March 7, 2006 Minor Revisions
4.0 2.1.151 June 12, 2006 Module Part numbers added
4.1 2.1.168 September 20, 2006 Detector Selector added
4.2 2.1.171 October 30, 2006 Minor revision for Magellan 3.1.171
4.3 2.1.171 November 8, 2006 Revision to Half Value Layer
5.0 3.0.206 June 6, 2007 Updates to AEC and Gain and Offset procedures

Detector Calibration And Configuration • About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller • 6-3
6.1 About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller

The Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC) Controller (700-0108-399) is used to set and maintain the
temperature of the camera CCD at -10°C. It is controlled by the workstation via the RS232
connection at J2. See Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1
The power for the PDM is supplied from a +15 VAC, 6.0 A switching power supply. The
voltage to the PDM power supply is 100/240 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.0 A.
The controller uses a proportional/integral algorithm to maintain the desired CCD temperature
set point. This set point is normally at -10°C and is set via software control from the
workstation. The controller can be turned on or off in the Configuration Manager by selecting
the Generator and Imaging Settings, then Imaging Station Settings, and under the TECC/PDM
section of the dialog box, select Configure. See Figure 6-2.

6 - 4 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller
Figure 6-2

Detector Calibration And Configuration • Adjustments on the LCD Display • 6-5
6.2 Adjustments on the LCD Display

The PDM display will show the following values from the TEC controller.
• CDD temperature set point in °C.
• Current CCD temperature in °C.
• Power supply voltage (12-14 volts).
• Voltage on the TEC (0 to 15 volts).
• Current through the TEC (0 to 6 amps).
• Heat sink temperature in °C.
• Ambient temperature in °C.
The fan on the controller is only active when the controller is cooling the camera CCD.
When the camera CCD has reached the set point value, the TEC voltage will drop into the 4 –
6 volt range with a corresponding drop in the TEC current value. When the TEC cooler is on,
the LCD display will show the current value of the CCD temperature every second. The
voltage required to keep the CCD at its set point value will vary with room temperature. As
the room temperature increases the voltage and current to the TEC will increase to maintain
the CCD temperature. At a normal room temperature of 23°C there is a 33°C temperature
differential across the TEC. As room temperature goes up this differential also goes up
making the controller supply more voltage and current to the TEC to maintain the set point.
There is a trip point in the controller that will shut down the cooler if the heat sink goes above
70°C. Normally the heat sink resides in the 40 – 50°C range with the cooler on.

6 - 6 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • Half Value Layer Testing
6.3 Half Value Layer Testing
6.3.1 Purpose
To define the procedure for Half Value Layer (HVL) testing of x-ray tubes for use with the
Detector Head. This is an important measure of beam characteristic and may affect image
quality
6.3.2 Scope
Half value layer should be tested before and after beam hardening and before and after any
change of the collimator or tube. Half value layer is the amount of aluminium that reduces the
beam intensity by 50%. It is a measure of beam quality.
A shift of the x-ray spectrum to higher 'effective' energies as the beam traverses matter is
called beam hardening. The pre-filtering that occurs, results in a higher effective energy and
thus a larger half value layer. It reduces soft x-rays (or lower energy photons), which
contribute to patient dose, and reduces scatter.
When there is a need to increase fine detail response, the HVL is reduced.
6.3.3 Equipment
• Calibrated radiation meter

• Lead sheet and lead apron (sized larger than 7 cm²).
• Aluminum plates: 5 squares of 0.5 mm Al, 5 squares of 1.0 mm Al
• Masking tape
• Tape measure.
• Hard or soft copy of QAL-03-003a Half Value Layer Worksheet (found in the IDC track-
ing website under IDC – Services Manuals and Procedures).
6.3.4 Procedure for Half Value Layer Testing
1. Ensure that the Collimator is parallel with a flat surface and that the source to image
(surface) distance is set to 100 cm.
2. To reduce backscatter, place the radiation meter's probe parallel to and approximately 30
cm above the surface. Place the lead on the surface directly below the probe, with a
collimation field of about 6 cm square.
3. Set the kVp to 80, and focal spot to small. Set the mAs to a value that will produce about a
100 mR (850 μ Gy) radiation meter reading.
4. Record the above settings, as well as information such as serial number and generator type,
on the QAL-03-003a Half Value Layer Worksheet. Also record the dose reading (for no
aluminium added) under Part 1: Before.

Detector Calibration And Configuration • Half Value Layer Testing • 6-7
5. Tape 1 mm Al across the face of the collimator, make another exposure, and record the
resulting dose.
6. Continue increasing the amount of aluminium added and recording the dose values, until
the resulting dose is half (or just below half) of the original value.
7. Using Excel or graph paper, calculate the HVL. See Example Calculation below.
8. The specification for the Detecotr Head is a HVL between 2.5 mm and 2.9 mm Al at 80
kVp. Add filtration to the tube (to increase HVL) or change the collimator (to decrease the
HVL) until this specification is achieved.
9. Redo the Half Value Layer Testing procedure to confirm the final HVL, and record the
results under Part 2: After.
10.Ensure the Worksheet is completely filled in. Sign and date the document and fax it to IDC,
attention Customer Service, (403) 251-1771.
6.3.5 Records
QAL-03-003a Half Value Layer Worksheet
6.3.6 Example Calculation
The following data was taken:

Table 6-1
Thickness of Al placed in beam (mm) 0 1 1.5 2

Radiation Reading (mR) 93.37 57.48 48.2 42.7
Calculate the mR value that is half of the original unfiltered reading:

93.37 mR / 2 = 46.69 mR
Graph the data points above. On the graph, draw a horizontal line at the above calculated
halved mR reading (for example: 46.69 mR). Determine the mm Al that corresponds to this
value. For the example below, the HVL is 1.6 mm Al.

6 - 8 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • Half Value Layer Testing
Figure 6-3

Detector Calibration And Configuration • Detector Head Calibration • 6-9
6.4 Detector Head Calibration

Configuration of the Calibration is for the Detector Head currently being used for imaging.
The Detector Calibration dialog box provides access to configure the following:
• Flat Field and Dark Field correction
• Geometric correction
• Cropping ROI Offsets
• Device Settings
• Artefacts
• Images
To configure Detector Head Calibrations

1. Select the Delcano icon (see Figure 6-4) on the desktop to open the Delcano application.
See Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-4

6 - 10 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • Detector Head Calibration
Figure 6-5
2. Select Xplorer Calibration to open the Detector Calibration dialog box. See Figure 6-6.

Detector Calibration And Configuration • Detector Head Calibration • 6 - 11
Figure 6-6
6.4.1 Device Settings
In the device settings (see Figure 6-7), set the following:

• The integration time should be set to no less than 4000 ms.
• The Falling-Edge Trigger box should be left checked.
• The serial number of the Detector Head should be entered.
• Gain and offset for the camera must be set before the Flat Field and Dark Field creation.
Figure 6-7
6.4.2 Gain and Offset
The Gain and Offset for the camera apply to the analog to digital converter (ADC) that
digitizes the information from the CCD. The values are adjusted so that the full signal
produced by the CCD occupies the range from between 0 and 200 counts to over the
saturation point of the ADC, which is 16383.

The offset (in mV) is the set point of the camera.

The gain is a multiplying factor.
Gain and Offset must be set before Dark Field and Flat Field correction images are created.
Once the Gain and Offset are entered for the system, they only need to be changed if the
Detector Head or camera electronics are changed.
6.4.2.1 Equipment
DelCano software application
6.4.2.2 Procedure for Determining Gain and Offset

1. Turn on the Detector Head.
2. Turn on the acquisition computer. Shut down Magellan.
3. Start the DelCano application and select Camera 1.
NOTE: If the system is a dual camera system (2200), and both have been connected to the
computer for image acquisition, images from the second detector head may be
accessed by selecting Camera 2 in the Delcano application.
4. Select Xplorer Calibration to display the Detector Calibration dialog box.

5. Set the Gain to 1 and the Offset to 0. Ensure all corrections are UNCHECKED (Flatfield
and Darkfield, Geometric Correction, and Charge Trap removal). Select OK.
6. Ensure the camera temperature is stabilized, usually around 263 K or -10°C.
7. Set the SID to 180 cm. If this is not possible, set the SID to 100 cm. Open the collimator
blades to include the entire imaging area.
8. Set kVp to 80, mAs to 80, and select a large focal spot. For a 100 cm SID, set the mAs to
40.
9. Select the Slice button and then the Continuous Dig button. A graph of the camera
function is displayed.
10.The level should be between 100 and 150 counts (on the Y-axis of the camera function
graph). While holding down the left mouse button, select and drag on the graph to magnify
the area you want to see. If there is no line present on the graph, you must increase the
offset number. If the line is set too high, you must decrease the offset number. Start at 0 and
add or subtract in steps of 5 or 10. Valid input settings are integers between –400 and +400.
11.To adjust the offset, select Continuous Dig again to stop the continuous digitize operation.
Change the offset in the Detector Calibration dialog box, and then select OK.
NOTE: Before adjusting any values in the Detector Calibration dialog box, the continuous
digitize operation must be stopped. Select the Continuous Dig button to stop or start
this function.

12.Recheck the offset by selecting Continuous Dig again and then repeat steps 10 and 11.
Continue until the graph is between 100 and 150 counts.
13.Ensure Continuous Digitize is still running, by seeing small movements in the output.
14.Take the exposure at 80 kVp and 80 mAs, with a large focal spot.
15.The graph will show the exposure with a line rising towards the top of the graph on the
Y-axis. If the line is curved, as in Figure 6-8, the dose needs to be increased. If the line
is not curved, or is off the top of the graph, skip to step 16. Select Continuous Dig to
reset the graph. Increase the mAs and make another exposure.
Figure 6-8 : Unsaturated CCD
16.If the graph still looks like Figure 6-8, repeat step 15.
17.If the line rises rapidly off the graph (Figure 6-9) (and the gain is still equal to 1), then
this is the final gain value and therefore the next step in this procedure can be skipped.

Figure 6-9 : ADC Saturation (≥16383 counts)
18.Observe the level of the straight line as it rises, and note the maximum value. The
maximum value in Figure 6-8 is about 12750 counts – this indicates the gain is not set high
enough. The maximum value needs to be just above 16383 counts, or in other words, one
gain step off the graph. Continue to go up in gain steps until the signal rises to just off the
top of the graph as in Figure 6-9, while using the smallest gain value possible to do this. To
adjust the gain and retest, do the following:
• Select Continuous Dig to stop the continuous digitize operation.
• Change the gain in the Detector Calibration dialog box (see Table 7), and then select OK.
• Select Continuous Dig. If the line is not at the bottom of the graph, wait until it is.
• Re-expose the system.

Figure 6-10 Saturated CCD (≤16383 counts)
19.When the correct number for the gain is achieved, double-check the offset to ensure the
number of counts on the Y-axis with no exposure is set between 100 and 150 counts.
Recheck as in steps 10 to 12.
20.If the offset changes in the previous step, the gain must be checked again. Recheck with
steps 14 to 18.
21.If the system is a dual camera system (2200), and both have been connected to the
computer for image acquisition, select Camera 2 and repeat steps 3 to 20 with the second
detector head.
22.If the gain or offset has been changed, all other calibrations including Flat Field, Dark
Field, F#, and AEC must be redone. Remember to turn on corrections after all changes are
completed.

6.4.2.3 Table of Gain Steps

Table 7
Step Value Step Value Step Value

1 1 12 1.379 23 2.222
2 1.026 13 1.429 24 2.353
3 1.053 14 1.481 25 2.5
4 1.081 15 1.538 26 2.667
5 1.111 16 1.6 27 2.857
6 1.143 17 1.667 28 3.007
7 1.176 18 1.739 29 3.333
8 1.212 19 1.818 30 3.636
9 1.25 20 1.905 31 4
10 1.29 21 2 32 4.444
11 1.333 22 2.105
6.4.3 Procedure for Measuring Exposure
For radiation meters that have unshielded probes, the radiation is measured in free-air to avoid
backscatter, and then the radiation at the desired SID is calculated from these results. The
calculation is as follows:
DESE = DM * (SPD / SID) 2
where
• DESE is the system entrance exposure dose
• DM is the measured dose from the radiation meter
• SID is the source to imager distance in centimetres
• SPD is the source to probe distance in centimetres
For example, for a SID of 180 cm (70 in), we suggest a measuring distance of SPD = 127.3 cm
(50.1 in). This gives a simple factor of 2. In other words, divide any measured reading by 2 to
give the reading at a SID of 180 cm.
For a SID of 100 cm (40 in), a measuring distance of SPD = 70.7 cm (27.8 in) will give the
same factor of 2.
6.4.3.1 To Measure the Exposure

See Figure 6-11 below for a diagram of the set-up.
1. Lay a lead sheet or lead apron on the floor to reduce backscatter.
2. Make a stand for the radiation meter's probe on the lead sheet with phone books or other
such support to allow the probe to be positioned at least 25 cm from the floor (the probe is
positioned perpendicular to the tube axis).

3. Place the radiation meter's probe at the centre of the beam (indicated by the light
collimator) at the calculated SPD distance from the focal spot (127.3 cm for 180 cm SID, or
70.7 cm for 100 cm SID). The distance should be measured to the centre of the chamber.
4. Collimate the x-ray beam to only cover the probe with no more than 2 centimetre margins.
5. Attach a 1 mm copper filter.
6. Set the kVp to 80 and focal spot size to large. Set the mAs to a starting value of 80 for 180
cm SID and 25 for 100 cm SID.
7. Make the exposure and divide the measured exposure by 2 to determine the exposure that
the Detector Head would receive at the faceplate. Change the mAs setting to obtain the
desired exposure of 8 mR (70 µGy) at the faceplate. Record the final mAs.
8. Once at an mAs that will give the closest reading to the required dose, move the source to
fine tune the dose reading to within ±0.1 mR (1 µGy).
9. Measure the final source-to-probe distance. Multiply this value by 2 (or 1.4142) to
determine the corrected SID distance. Record the final corrected SID.
10.Before proceeding with the rest of the procedure, reposition the tube to produce a
horizontal beam at the corrected SID, and open the collimator to fully cover but not exceed
the imaging area by more than 2 cm.
11.If Delcano or Magellan was running during this test, reject any images that may have been
captured due to scatter.

Figure 6-11
127.3 cm (50.1 in)
3 > 25 cm (9.8 in)
1 Source
2 Radiation Meter Probe
3 Support
4 Lead

6.4.4 Dark Field Correction
The purpose of the following is to define the procedure for producing the Dark Field
corrections for use with the CCD camera used in the Detector Heads.
A Dark Field is an “image” taken without any light. Thermal processes within the CCD cause
electrons to be trapped just as if they had been created by the capture of light photons. This is
called dark current. When an image is read from the CCD, there is no way to tell which
electrons are thermally generated and which actually represent captured light. The amount of
dark current is proportional to the temperature of the CCD and the length of the exposure.
That is why the CCD in the camera is cooled to around –10°C. Even so, we need to determine
the level of dark current that we can expect to see in an exposure of a certain length and
correct for it. Dark Fields for use in the Detector Heads are made by averaging many
individual dark frames. The signal to noise ratio of the resulting Dark Field is increased by the
square root of the number of individual dark frames.
It is important to ensure that darkfields are matched to the exposure duration. An 8 second
darkfield will not provide the correct adjustment for a 1 second exposure. Although all CCD
chips are made to the same specification, variations in manufacture will mean that the
correction is different for every system. This procedure must therefore be followed for each
system. It is not acceptable to use the darkfield correction from one system on another system.
Dark current characteristics may change over the life of a system. It is therefore good practice
to update the Dark Field correction for a system as part of regular maintenance.
6.4.4.1 Equipment
Software is needed for producing images and Dark Fields. This procedure will refer to the use
of the DelCano application and the Magellan 3 or Sirius software.
6.4.4.2 Configuring Dark Field Correction

To configure Dark Field correction
2. Start either the DelCano or Magellan 3 software.
3. If using DelCano, select the Xplorer Calibration button. See Figure 6-12. If using
Magellan, first select the Configuration Manager, then, select the Generator and Imaging
Settings and then Imaging Station Settings to open the Configure Imaging Stations dialog
box (Figure 6-13). Select Settings. See Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-12

Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
4. In the Detector Calibration dialog box, (see Figure 6-14) ensure Charge Trap Removal is
turned OFF and Geometric Correction is turned OFF. Select Apply.


6. In the Flat Field and Dark Field Correction area of the Detector Calibration dialog box,
select Configure to open the Flat Field and Dark Field Configuration dialog box. See
Figure 6-15.
Figure 6-15
7. Select the number of images you want the program to take (recommended 64).
8. Set the Integration Time to 125 or to the time in milliseconds that best matches the actual
integration time for the images you expect to correct. The integration time is not the same
as x-ray exposure time since the camera will continue to integrate while the light output
from the scintillator decays.
9. Indicate whether this Dark Field image is for correcting binned or unbinned images.
Binned images are acquired in High Efficiency POD mode and unbinned images are
acquired for High Resolution POD mode. To correct for both types of images, first collect

the binned images and then collect the unbinned images by repeating the next two steps and
changing the checkbox in between.
10.Select Acquire Images. Acquiring images takes several minutes.
11.Select Save Dark Field Image. Give an appropriate file name (including number of
images and integration time) for the Dark Field image and save the image in a directory set
up for correction images. This Dark Field image is specific for this Detector Head unit.
12.Continue with the Flat Field Correction (see Section 6.4.5, “Flat Field Correction”) or
select OK to close the dialog box. If the last Dark Field image acquired was unbinned then
Flat Field Correction will continue automatically.
13.In the Dark Field paths area of the Detector Calibration dialog box, click on the + button
beside the list of Dark Field images. This opens a file selection window where the newly
acquired Dark Field image(s) can be located. Use the ? button to display the Dark Field
image properties (Figure 6-16).Use the - button to delete any inappropriate images. This
step must be completed for your newly created Dark Fields to be used.
Figure 6-16
NOTE: The Apply Flat Field and Dark Field Correction box should be checked for diagnostic
patient images.
14.To apply the Dark Field Correction, ensure the Flat Field Correction has been created,
then select the Apply Flatfield and Darkfield Correction check box in the Detector
Calibration dialog box.
15.Select OK to close the Detector Calibration dialog box.
6.4.5 Flat Field Correction
The following is to define the procedure for producing the Flat Field correction reference
images for use with the Detector Head.
A Flat Field is an image taken with even x-ray illumination. Ideally, every pixel would record
the same intensity level. In practise this is never the case. Different pixels will react slightly
differently to the same amount of light. As well, it is almost impossible to ensure truly even

illumination as the x-ray source, scintillator and optics all play a part in distorting the image.
The Flat Field corrects for much of this non-uniformity by measuring how the pixels vary. Flat
Fields for use in the Detector Head are made by averaging many individual flat frames.
Since a uniform x-ray illumination is impossible to achieve, the correction will also correct, to
some extent, for lack of uniformity in the x-ray field.
It is important that Flat Fields are matched to the exposure conditions. Although all Detector
Head components are made to a fixed specification, variations in manufacture means that the
correction is different for every system. This procedure must therefore be followed for each
system. It is not acceptable to use the Flat Field correction from one system on another
system.
Flat Field characteristics may change over the life of a system. It is therefore good practice to
update the Flat Field correction as part of regular maintenance.
The Flat Field image also depends on the individual x-ray tube and generator, and the Source
to Imager Distance (SID) used. The Magellan 3 software uses a database to predict what SID
will be used for the next image and preloads the Flat Field taken at the closest SID to that.
NOTE: Flat Field calibration usually follows Dark Field calibration.
6.4.5.1 Equipment
Software is needed for producing images and Flat Fields. This procedure will refer to the use
of the DelCano application and the Magellan 3 software applications.
6.4.5.2 Configuring Flat Field Correction

To configure the Flat Field correction
2. Start either the DelCano or Magellan software.
3. If using DelCano, select the Xplorer Calibration button. See Figure 6-17. If using
Magellan, first select the Configuration Manager, then, select the Generator and Imaging
Settings and then Imaging Station Settings to open the Configure Imaging Stations dialog
box (Figure 6-18). Select Settings. See Figure 6-19.

Figure 6-17

Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
4. In the Detector Calibration dialog box, (see Figure 6-19) ensure Charge Trap Removal
is turned OFF and Geometric Correction is turned OFF. Select Apply.


6. In the Flat Field and Dark Field Correction area of the dialog box, select Configure to open
the Flat Field and Dark Field Configuration dialog box. See Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20
7. Use an existing unbinned Dark Field (from the same camera) by selecting the checkbox
Use Existing Dark Field Image, or take a new unbinned Dark Field (see 6.4.4 “Dark Field
Correction”).
8. Move the x-ray tube to the SID that will be used. Set the kVp and mAs to the settings
recommended in Table 6-1 or to those required for your particular task. Open the

collimators to expose the entire imaging area of the Detector Head, but do not expose more
of the device than necessary. Remove the grid.
Table 6-1 - Recommended kVp and mAs settings for different SIDs
SID kVp mAs

100 cm (40 in) 70 3
140 cm (56 in) 70 4
180 cm (72 in) 110 - 120 3-5
210 cm (83 in) 110 - 140 3-5
220 cm (87 in) 110 - 140 3-5
9. Select the number of images you wish to take (usually 16 or 32). The more images that are
taken, the better the correction will be. Select the SID in the SID list.
10.Take an exposure. You will be prompted to take additional images.
11.When all the images are acquired, the Save Flat Field Image button is enabled. Save the
image. Give an appropriate file name (including number of images and SID) to the Flat
Field image and save it in a directory set up for the correction images. This Flat Field image
is specific to this Detector Head unit at the specified SID and the specific x-ray tube and
generator used.
12.You may change the SID and acquire another Flat Field correction image. Flat Field
corrections should be created for each commonly used SID.
13.Select OK to close the Flat Field and Dark Field Configuration dialog box.
14.In the Flat Field paths area of the Detector Calibration dialog box, click on the + button
beside the list of Flat Field images. This opens a file selection window where the newly
acquired Flat Field image(s) can be located. Use the ? button to display the Flat Field image
properties (Figure 6-21).Use the - button to delete any inappropriate images. This step must
be completed for your newly created Flat Fields to be used.
Figure 6-21

NOTE: The Apply Flat Field and Dark Field Correction box should be checked for diagnostic
patient images.
15.To apply the Flat Field Correction, select the Apply Flat Field and Dark Field
Correction checkbox in the Detector Calibration dialog box.
16.Select OK to close the Detector Calibration dialog box.
6.4.6 Running the f# Wizard
After Gain and Offsets and Flat Fields and Dark Filelds are configured you must run the f#
Wizard, located at C:\Magellan2\FnumWizard.exe. To run the f# wizard, a radiation meter
that gives readings in mR and a 1 mm medical grade copper plate are required.
6.4.7 Geometric Correction
1. Insert the accompanying configuration CD into the workstations CD tray.

2. Create a new folder titled IDC in the workstations C: drive.
3. Copy the XMap and YMap from the configuration CD into the newly created folder.
4. From the Detector Calibration dialog box, click on the button to the right of the XMap and
YMap fields to set a path to the XMap and YMap locations on the C: drive.
5. Check Apply Geometric Correction to automatically apply geometric correction to all
incoming images. See Figure 6-22.
NOTE: The Apply Geometric Correction checkbox should be checked for diagnostic
patient images.
Figure 6-22
NOTE: The Configure button is only used in the factory.
6. Check the appropriate rotation to set how all incoming images should be automatically
rotated to deal with Detector Head orientation.

6.4.8 Cropping ROI Offsets
Cropping ROI Offsets remove additional rows or columns of pixels from the edges of an
image. These values are set by inserting the required number of pixels (in multiples of 4) to be
removed from each edge. Cropping ROI Offsets should be used if there are unnecessary
information or pixels around the edge of an image that affects image processing. The
Cropping ROI Offsets is applied only when Geometric Correction is applied. The Cropping
ROI Offsets are applied to the image after the rotation is applied. See Figure 6-23.
Selecting the Reset button sets all the values to 0.
Figure 6-23
6.4.9 Artefact Removal Procedure
Charge Trap Removal should only be checked if the camera has a chip defect configured.
See Figure 6-24. Please refer to the Artefact Removal Procedure.
Figure 6-24
6.4.9.1 Artefact Removal Procedure

This procedure requires the DelCano application.
NOTE: Artefact removal is done after completion of Flat Field and Dark Field correction if
artefacts are present, or anytime a new constant artefact appears.
1. Ensure that the power to the unit is turned on.

2. Start the DelCano Application and select Xplorer Calibration.
3. In the Detector Calibration dialog box uncheck the following:
• Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections
• Apply Geometric Correction
• Charge Trap Removal
4. Make note of which selections where changed and select the Apply button.
5. Ensure the camera temperature is stabilized at approximately -10°C.

6. Make an exposure of the entire imaging receptor at 180 cm SID with the grid removed
using a small focus, 70 kVp and 5 mAs.
7. Select Configure beside the Charge Trap Removal checkbox. See Figure 6-24 above. This
opens the Chip Defect Editor dialog box. See Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25
8. Select New to create new correction coordinates.

9. Find the artefact on the newly acquired image by magnifying and scrolling through the
image piece by piece (to zoom in DelCano, use the mouse wheel holding down the Ctrl
key and use the left button to pan the image). Apply a narrow window and adjust the level
as required to help locate the artefact.
10.After locating the artefact, find the X co-ordinate. Place the cursor on the upper, left tip of
the artefact and read out the X co-ordinate in the lower right hand corner of the DelCano
screen. This is the number that you enter beside the Left field in the Chip Defect Editor
dialog box.
11.Now find the Y co-ordinate by placing the cursor on the superior tip of the artefact and read
out the Y co-ordinate in the lower right hand corner of the DelCano screen. This is the
number that you enter beside the Top field in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box.
12.If the artefact is one pixel in width enter 1 in the Width field in the Chip Defect Editor
dialog box. If wider, find the width of the defect check X co-ordinate and enter the number
of pixels to get the width.
13.On the Y co-ordinate, count from the top number to the bottom number to get the number
of pixels. Enter this number in the Height field in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box.
14.Select OK in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box to compare the removal.
15.Take another exposure at the same settings. Review the image closely and compare with
the prior image to ensure the defect is eliminated.
16.If the artefact is still there as in the previous images, check the coordinates and repeat steps
6 to 15. Note that the removal will not remove every defect 100%. You may also have some
residual effects or some noticeable blurring as a result of the artefact removal.

17.Referring to the notes you made in step 4, reset the Detector Calibration dialog box
accordingly and enable Charge Trap Removal.
18.Select OK.

Detector Calibration And Configuration • AEC Procedure • 6 - 33
6.5 AEC Procedure

Depending on the generator used, the AEC Procedure will be calibrated differently. If using a
CPI Generator, follow Section 6.5.1, “CPI Generator – AEC Procedure”. If using a Sedecal
Generator, follow Section 6.5.3, “Sedecal Generator – AEC Procedure”.
6.5.1 CPI Generator – AEC Procedure
6.5.2 Detector Selector
NOTE: If you are installing the 2200 system with two Detector Heads, it is convenient to
view the Detector Selector instead of the Gen UI when performing the AEC
procedure. To view the Detector Selector and hide the Gen UI, click on the Gen UI
and press the Alt and F4 keys. This displays the Detector Selector, enabling you to
select between Detector Heads. See Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26
NOTE: Generator Calibrations must be completed.
NOTE: All Detector Head Calibrations must be completed (Gain/Offset, Dark Fields/Flat
Fields, f# Calibrations).
6.5.2.1 The AEC Calibration

The purpose of the AEC Calibration is to calibrate the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC).
6.5.2.2 Equipment Needed

To calibrate photo timing the following equipment is needed:
• Attenuator, 15 cm (6 in) of water (water is the preferred attenuator).
• 1.0 mm Cu (99.9% pure)
• Laptop with Genware software
• 9 pin female/female Null modem cable
6.5.2.3 Assignment of Chambers

1. To verify assignment of chambers to the corresponding controls, place a sheet of copper on
a cell.
2. Take an exposure of 70 kVp, 5 mAs, at 100 cm for each individual cell.
3. Verify that when the covered cell is selected, the mAs reported back by the generator is
higher than the uncovered cells.

6 - 34 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • AEC Procedure
4. Repeat this for each cell. If the assignment is incorrect, consult the AEC documentation
and set the correct jumper or dip switch configuration.
6.5.2.4 Balancing of the AEC Ion Chambers

Balance the three AEC cells by doing the following:
1. Collimate the x-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields.
2. Place the 1.0 mm Cu over the center cell and take a low technique exposure (60 kVp, 20
mAs).
3. Record the ms value.
4. Do the same with the left and right Fields and record the ms value. (This verifies that the
left and right cell correlates with what is selected at the Touch Screen.)
5. Adjust the Field A and Field C potentiometers on the AEC preamplifier so that the ms
values correlate with the center cell.
NOTE: Do not adjust the Center Field (B field).
6. Remove the Cu attenuator and tape it to the collimator.

7. Take a low technique exposure and double check the ms value of all three cells. Adjust if
necessary.
6.5.2.5 AEC Calibration Procedure

To perform the AEC calibration:
1. Place the stand in the vertical (table) position. If the stand is an 1500, this must be done in
chest position.
2. Set the tube to a 100 cm (40 in) SID.
3. Insert the 100 cm (40 in) grid into the Detector Head.
4. Place the attenuator on the faceplate (or on a stand of some kind for the 1500). Use two 10
cm acrylic sheets or 15 cm water. Cover all of the AEC Fields with the attenuator.
5. Collimate 13 mm (½ in) past the edge of the attenuator.
6. Turn on the Generator.
7. When prompted, use the password 1973 to put the Generator into Service mode.
8. Attach the null modem cable between the serial port of the laptop and the serial port of the
touch screen.
9. In Service mode select Data Link.
10.Start the Genware software on the laptop. See Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27
11.Select the AEC calibration button (see Figure 6-28) to display the AEC Calibration Points
dialog box. See Figure 6-29.
Figure 6-28

Figure 6-29
12.Select the AEC Setup Tab and do the following:

a. Select Channel 1 for Channel Number.
b. Select Ion for Chamber Type.
c. Select All Fields for Fields.
d. Select 1, 2, and 3 for F.S. Active.
e. Set R, C, L Field Comp to 0.
13.Set F.S. 1 Gain to 10.
Set F.S. 2 and 3 Gain to 10.
Select the FS Options Tab, the following options must be selected:
a. Set RLF Compensation for all appropriate fields to 0.
b. Set Multiple Spot Compensation to 0.
14.Select the Density Tab, and enter the following values as in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2
Density Step Values

1 25
2 50

Table 6-2
Density Step Values

3 75
4 100
-1 25
-2 50
-3 75
-4 100
15.Select the FS Reference Tab to enter the voltage values between 0 and 10 VAC to make a
kV characteristic curve.
In the Radiography Terminal (left side of screen) select the following:

a. 320 mA and a Density of 0.
NOTE: KV will be selected in the FS Reference tab.
b. The centre cell (highlighted green) for the Fields

c. Large Focus for Focus
d. AEC for Techniques
e. Film Screen 2 for Film Screen
f. The receptor that you have programmed for the Receptor.
16.Start Magellan 3.
NOTE: If operating Magellan 2.0.111, Step 17 will need to be completed. If operating

Magellan 2.1.136 or later the film speed has been preset, so proceed to Step 18.
17.Select the Configuration Manager icon (see Figure 6-30) and select the Parameter Editor
(see Figure 6-31). In the Anatomy/Projection Pairs list, select Calibration. See Figure 6-
32.
Figure 6-30

Figure 6-31
Set the film speed for view:

a. HE to 400 film speed and an SID of 100 cm.
b. HR to 200 film speed and an SID of 100 cm.

Figure 6-32
18.Create a Test Patient (Anonymous Study–see Figure 6-33) with the anatomy set to
Calibration and the projection to HE. See Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-33

Figure 6-34
19.In the AEC Calibration Points dialog box of Genware, select Film Screen 2.
20.Select the FS Reference tab.
21.Place the cursor in the 75 kVp window. Selecting this will automatically select the kVp in
the Radiography Terminal.
22.Enter the value of 4.0 in the 75 kVp window and select Apply.
23.Take an exposure. The f# in Magellan should read 0.0. If the f# does not read 0.0, adjust the
Master Gain on the AEC Preamp. Keep adjusting the AEC Master Gain and take exposures
until the f# reads 0.0.
NOTE: Do not adjust the master gain on the AEC Preamp after the f# reads 0.0 for 75 kVp.
24.Select the 65 kVp window.

25.Take an exposure. The f# should read 0.0. If the f# does not read 0.0, adjust the value in the
65 kVp window and select Apply. Keep adjusting the value and take exposures until the f#
reads 0.0. Select Apply after each change in the kVp window value.
NOTE: Do not adjust the master gain on the AEC Preamp.
26.Repeat step 25 for 55 kVp, 50 kVp, 85 kVp, 95 kVp, 110 kVp, and 130 kVp. For 110 and
130 kVp’s add more attenuation to prevent low mAs values (add 5 cm water).
27.Repeat step 15 using film screen 1.
28.Repeat step 18 using film speed 200 for HR.
29.Repeat step 19 using film screen 1.
30.Repeat steps 22 through 26 only adjusting the value in each kV window.
NOTE: Do not adjust the master gain on the AEC Preamp.
31.Exit out of the AEC Calibration Points dialog box and Genware.
32.Place the Generator back into the User Mode.

6.5.3 Sedecal Generator – AEC Procedure
Prior to AEC the Generator Calibration, Focal Spot Configuration and Detector Head
Calibrations must be completed
6.5.3.1 Equipment Needed

The following equipment is required:
• 15 cm (5.9 in) water in collapsible plastic container is the recommended attenuator.
• 1.0 mm Cu.
6.5.3.2 Assignment of Chambers

1. To verify assignment of chambers to the corresponding controls, place a sheet of
copper on a cell.
2. Take an exposure of 70 kVp, 5 mAs, at 100 cm for each individual cell.
3. Verify that when the covered cell is selected, the mAs reported back by the generator is
higher than the uncovered cells.
4. Repeat this for each cell. If the assignment is incorrect, consult the AEC documentation
and set the correct jumper or dip switch configuration.
6.5.3.3 Balancing the Ion Chambers
NOTE: Complete prior to performing the AEC calibration.
Balance the three AEC cells using the following:

a. Collimate the x-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields.
b. Place the copper (1 mm) attenuator over the collimator.
c. Select a low technique exposure (60 kVp at 20 mAs).
d. Select the center cell and take the exposure.
e. Record the ms value.
f. Repeat steps c and d for the left and right cells.
g. Adjust the Field A and Field C potentiometers on the AEC preamplifier so that
their ms values correlate with the center cell.
h. When the three AEC cells are balanced, remove the copper attenuator.
6.5.3.4 To Perform the AEC Calibration

1. Place the stand in the Table position.
2. Set SID to 100 cm (40 in).
3. Insert the 100 cm (40 in) grid.
4. Place the attenuator on the faceplate covering all of the ion chambers.

5. Set the jumper on the AEC Control Board to Position A

• (A3012-01/02/05) use JP3
• (A3012-06/07) use JP2
6. Ensure the dip switch on board 3024 SW2 position 3 is in the closed ON position.
7. Start the Magellan 3 Application. See Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35
NOTE: In versions of Magellan 2.1.149 and later, omit steps 8, 9, and 10 as these steps are
automatically completed.
8. Open the Configuration Manager. See Figure 6-36.
Figure 6-36
9. Select the Parameter Editor and select Calibration in the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree.
See Figure 6-37.

Figure 6-37
10.Display the HE Details by selecting HE and Custom and set the Film Speed on HE to
400. Similarly, select HR and set the Film Speed on HR to 200.
11.Turn on the Generator.
12.Put the Generator into Service mode and select Manual Calibration.
13.Ensure the value in Memory locations E04 is 70. The range for AEC calibration
numbers is from 20–120.
NOTE: A value closer to 70 will increase AEC accuracy.

14.Enter into User Mode by selecting the Go to User Mode button.

15.On the Console:
• RAD Menu: 70 kVp, 320 mA, Large Focus and 1 second back-up time. See Figure 6-38.
• AEC Menu: Center Cell, Density 0, and Medium Film Screen. See Figure 6-39.
Figure 6-38

Figure 6-39
16.Collimate to the edge of the attenuator. Leave 13 mm (.5 in) of light around the
attenuator.
17.In the Magellan Interface start an Anonymous Study. See Figure 6-40.
Figure 6-40
18.In the Anatomy and Projection dialog box, set the anatomy as Calibration and
projection as HE.
19.Make an exposure using the technique described in step 15.
20.Adjust the Master Gain on the preamplifier of the AEC until the f# reads 0.0. If the f#
is not 0, adjust the Master Gain counterclockwise to increase the f# and clockwise to
decrease the f#. Make exposures as necessary to verify the f# at 0.
21.Check other film/screen speeds by selecting them on the Workstation or Touch Screen.
As in Step 10 above, change the film speed for the anatomy Calibration and the view
HE and HR (HR 200 speed for slow, HE for both 400 speed for medium and 800 speed
for fast).

22.Check if the f# still reads 0.0 by making exposures and increasing and decreasing the kVp
by ±10 kVp respectively. If it does not track properly the following procedure should
occur:
a. Go to the Manual Calibration Menu.
b. Check that the Memory Location E08 has a Value of 000. If not, set it to 000.
c. If the f# at 55 kVp has to be decreased and the f# above 80 kVp has to be increased
then increase the Tracking value by one.
d. If the f# at 55 kVp has to be increased and the f# above 80 kVp has to be decreased
then decrease the Tracking value by one.
e. Enter the new value in accordance to the table below, and store it by selecting the
Store button.
f. Remove the water attenuator and exit Calibration/Service mode.
Table 6-3 - kVp Tracking
AEC-kVp +10 +9 +8 +7 +6 +5 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10
Tracking Curve
Value to Enter in 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246
the Memory
Location
NOTE: The Master Gain Potentiometer and the Field B (center cell) Potentiometer should not
be adjusted further. See Figure 6-41.

Figure 6-41 AEC kVp Tracking Curve

DAC Output in Byte (8 Bit) (U3-2 of AEC Control Board)

SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
The following sections are included:

7.1 “Acceptance Procedure”
7.2 “Detector Head Installation Checklist”

7 - 2 • System Acceptance Procedure •
3.0 August 29, 2005 Module revision
3.1 November 3, 2005 Image Update
3.2 January 15, 2006 New Acceptance Procedure
3.3 February 24, 2006 Revisions to Acceptance Procedure
4.0 June 12, 2006 Module Part numbers added
4.1 August 15, 2006 Minor Revision
4.2 December 22, 2006 Revisions to the Acceptance Testing Procedure

System Acceptance Procedure • Acceptance Procedure • 7-3
7.1 Acceptance Procedure
7.1.1 Purpose
To define the procedure and acceptance criteria to be used by IDC staff for verifying
system performance of the Detector Head.
7.1.2 Scope
This procedure is to be performed as part of the physics site acceptance tests at the time of
installation of a system. It must also be performed after adding any desired beam filtration
to the X-Ray Tube.
Parts of this procedure have been copied or modified from an original paper on CR
acceptance tests by Ehsan Samei of Duke University. The author’s permission to use the
material is gratefully acknowledged. We have also incorporated the recommended
procedures for CR acceptance tests proposed by the American Association of Physicists in
Medicine (AAPM) Task Group 10.
This document outlines the quality testing procedures for the digital x-ray systems. The
procedures require an x-ray source and a display device (soft- or hard-copy) previously
evaluated for satisfactory performance. It is recommended that this inspection be
performed annually.
7.1.3 Responsibility
It is the responsibility of IDC staff to follow this procedure when testing new installations
or when performing annual maintenance. The procedure is also recommended for hospital
staff performing QC checks on the system.
7.1.4 Equipment
To perform the Acceptance Procedure, the following equipment is required:

• Copper and aluminium filters (1.0 mm Al, 1.0 mm Cu, 0.5 mm Cu)
• Calibrated radiation meter
• Stand or holder for the radiation meter (ex: phone books)
• Lead sheet or lead apron
• IDC low contrast phantom, or equivalent down to at least 1.5%
• Lead or steel ruler with x-ray visible markings (for edge and size tests)
• Good quality line-pair phantom up to 5 lp/mm frequencies
• Masking tape
• A hard or soft copy of the QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Test-
ing Worksheet)

7 - 4 • System Acceptance Procedure • Acceptance Procedure
• Inspection is performed using the DelCano software to obtain images from the device. Do
not use Magellan or for these tests as they lack the image analysis tools that are required.
7.1.5 Acceptance Testing Procedure
NOTE: The following set of instructions is given for a single-detector head system. For dual-
detector head systems, such as the 2200, perform the full acceptance testing process
for each of the detector heads separately. If both detector heads have been connected
to the computer for image acquisition, images from each detector head may be
accessed by toggling between Camera 1 and Camera 2 in the Delcano application.
7.1.5.1 Start-up
1. Fill in the top portion of the QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing
Worksheet) with the location, detector head serial #, generator type, etc. Each subsequent
step of this procedure follows the Results section of the Certificate of Quality. When filling
in the worksheet, do not leave blanks. If there are no concerns, note that there are no
concerns. For dual-camera systems, two separate copies of the Acceptance Testing
Worksheet need to be filled out.
2. Turn on the detector head.
3. Start the Delcano software.
4. Set the SID (Source-to-Image Distance) to 180 cm, or if that is not possible, set the SID to
100 cm.
7.1.5.2 Physical Inspection/Inventory

1. Check the system serial number against the Acceptance Testing or Prior Compliance
Inspection Reports.
2. Ensure the unit is free from physical defects and is functional. Ensure the grid mechanism
allows smooth insertion and removal of the grid. Remove the grid for all of the following
tests.
3. Make a note on the QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality worksheet of any concerns or, if
there are none, note that there are none.
7.1.5.3 Temperature Control

During the tests described in this procedure, note the temperature of the CCD and ensure that
it remains at -10°C ± 0.5°C at all times. Record the largest variation from -10 °C on the
Certificate of Quality worksheet.
7.1.5.4 Gain and Offset, Flat Field and Dark Field Corrections
Before continuing, ensure the following are completed:
• Gain and Offset have been properly set. See Section 6.4.2, “Gain and Offset”.
• Acquire Dark Field and Flat Field Correction images with no filtration applied. See
Section 6.4.4, “Dark Field Correction” and Section 6.4.5, “Flat Field Correction”.

7.1.6 Exposure Calibration
The tests in this procedure require specific input radiation, as seen in Table 7-1.
Determine the appropriate mAs values to produce this input radiation:
1. Determine if the radiation meter's probe has a shielded backing or not. An un-shielded
probe is usually cylindrical (ex: Radcal), whereas a shielded probe is usually flat (ex:
Unfors).
2. If using a radiation meter that has a probe with no shielded backing, use the procedure
in Section 7.1.6.10 “Procedure for Measuring Exposure” on page 7-18, then continue
after Table 7-1.
3. Attach the shielded radiation meter's probe to the faceplate in the centre of the beam
(indicated by the light collimator). If the detector head is installed under a table, put the
probe on the faceplate under the table. Collimate to a few centimetres around the probe.
4. Tape the filtration to the collimator, as required by Table 7-1. Ensure the copper filter is
closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminium filter is next.
5. Set the focal spot to small. Set the kVp to what is required in Table 7-1. Set the mAs to
the starting value suggested in Table 7-1.
6. Make the exposure. Change the mAs setting to obtain the desired radiation reading.
Record the actual mAs and the radiation reading.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 until Table 7-1 is completed.
8. Remove the radiation meter's probe.
Table 7-1
Radiation required at
Filtration (mm) Starting mAs Actual
Faceplate Actual mAs
mR/µGy
kVp Al Cu mR µGy SID=180cm SID=100cm
50 0 0 15 131 25 8
50 0 0 1 8.8 1.6 0.5
60 0 0 5 44 5 1.6
80 1 0.5 0.1 0.88 0.5 0.5
80 1 0.5 1 8.8 5 1.6
80 1 0.5 5 44 25 8
80 1 0.5 10 88 50 12.5
100 0 1 1 8.8 4 1.2
• Determine the half value layer of the tube. See Section 6.3.4 “Procedure for Half
Value Layer Testing” on page 6-6. Ensure no filters have been added. Record the half
value layer on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet).

7.1.6.1 Dark Noise

CCD sensors convert incoming light photons to electrons, trapping them in place for later
readout. Thermal processes randomly create electrons too, and these are captured in the CCD
along with the electrons produced by light. These thermal electrons represent a source of noise
known as dark current. This Dark Noise test checks that the dark current is being
appropriately corrected.
Figure 7-1
To perform the Dark Noise test

1. Select Xplorer Calibration.
2. Set the Integration Time to 100 milliseconds, Flat and Dark Fields ON, Geometric
Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling-Edge Trigger is checked, as shown above in
Figure 7-1. Select OK.
3. Select Anatomy to display the Anatomy and Projection Selection dialog box.
a. Select the following:
•Anatomy - Calibration
•Projection - Dark Uniformity
•Level - HR
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK
4. Click on the Trigger to acquire an image without an x-ray exposure. The image should be
uniform without any artefacts.

5. The mean pixel value and the standard deviation in the image is automatically
calculated when the Region of Interest (ROI) is selected. To do this, draw a rectangle
on the image by dragging the mouse across the ROI while holding down the left mouse
button. An ROI of approximately 1000 x 1000 pixels in the center of the image
encompasses one million pixels and gives a very good statistical measurement. The
size and position of the ROI as well as its mean and standard deviation are shown in the
box to the right of the Info button as shown in Figure 7-2 below.
Figure 7-2
6. The mean pixel value should be less than 10. If the mean pixel value is higher than 10,
it indicates a problem with the dark field or flat field correction. Update these
corrections and repeat the test.
7. Record the measured values on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing
Worksheet).

8. As integration time has been reduced to 100 milliseconds for this test, you must reset the
value to the default of 4000 milliseconds before proceeding to the next test.
7.1.6.2 Uniformity
CCD sensors are comprised of millions of pixels. It is not possible to manufacture a CCD in
which every pixel has the exact same response to incoming photons. This variation from pixel
to pixel is known as pixel non-uniformity. An additional source of static non-uniformity in the
detector head is the uneven illumination due to the lens characteristics. Over and above these
effects are non-uniformities due to the x-ray source, collimator etc. These latter variable
sources are not readily reversible; however, the static sources may be corrected by a Flat Field
operation. This Uniformity test checks that the pixel non-uniformity and lens fall off are being
appropriately corrected.
Figure 7-3
To perform the Uniformity test

1. Select Xplorer Calibration.
2. Set the Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and Dark Fields ON, Geometric
Correction ON, Charge Trap Removal ON (if Charge Traps are present), and ensure Use
Falling Edge Trigger is checked, as shown in Figure 7-3 above. Select OK.
•Projection - Flat Uniformity

•Level - Select your SID

•Size - Medium
b. Select OK.
4. Open the collimator to expose the entire imaging area. Expose the system to 10 mR (88
μ Gy) entrance exposure, using 80 kVp, 1 mm Al mm and 0.5 mm Cu filter.
5. Ensure the copper filter is closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminum filter is next. Do
not use a grid for the exposures.
6. Examine an ROI that is 1000 x 1000 pixels in the center of the image. The image
should be uniform without any artefacts except those attributable to beam non-
uniformity such as collimator paint lines. Take a look at the average pixel value in the
image and its standard deviation. Two times the standard deviation should be less than
10% of the average pixel value. See Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4
7. Any significant deviation from uniformity is an indication of problems with the Flat
Field operation. If necessary, try updating the Flat Fields and repeating the test.
8. If retaking the Flat Fields does not remove all the artefacts, then retake the Flat Fields
with the filter installed. Next, retake the Uniformity exposure, accessing this new Flat
Field, to ensure the artefacts are removed. Some artefacts may be produced by the filter

itself or by the difference in beam quality between the filtered and unfiltered exposures. By
flat fielding with the filter in place, we can determine if this is so. If artefacts remain after
this, a more serious problem exists and service should be consulted. In addition, take an
extra exposure at a different kVp level (for example, 100 kVp) to confirm that the artefacts
are being removed.
9. Record the measured values of mean and standard deviation on the Certificate of Quality
(QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet).
7.1.6.3 Response Linearity

CCD sensors have a linear response to input radiation. This is very different from the well
known H & D characteristic curve of film. This test ensures that the response is indeed linear.
To perform the Response Linearity Function test
1. Select Xplorer Calibration and ensure the following settings are still in effect. (Set the
Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and Dark Fields ON, Charge Trap Removal
ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked.) Select
OK.
•Projection - System Linearity
•Level - Custom
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK
3. Open the collimator to expose the entire imaging area. Expose the system to approximately
0.1, 1.0, 5.0 and 10 mR (0.88, 8.8, 44, and 88 μ Gy) entrance exposures in a sequence of
four exposures using 80 kVp, 1 mm Al and 0.5 mm Cu filter. Ensure the copper filter is
closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminum filter is next.
4. Record the average pixel value for each image on the Certificate of Quality (QC /
Acceptance Testing Worksheet). Also record the actual radiation readings used during the
test on the Certificate of Quality. The spreadsheet will plot the average pixel value as a
function of exposure. The result should be a straight line with a goodness of fit (R value) of
0.95 or higher. The Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet) will
calculate this value for you.
7.1.6.4 Readout Linearity Function

CCD sensors are read out row by row and column by column. This test ensures that the rows
and columns are being read out in proper sequence. It is very unlikely that a CCD could fail
this test and still produce a usable image. By contrast, scanning systems such as CR readers
can occasionally skip, thereby producing a discontinuity.

System Acceptance Procedure • Acceptance Procedure • 7 - 11
To perform the Readout Linearity Function test

ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked.)
Select OK.
•Projection - Spatial
•Level - Custom
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK.
3. Place a steel ruler across the faceplate, parallel to the long axis of the detector head (or
pointing towards the camera, see Figure 7-5). Open the collimator to expose the entire
imaging area. Expose the system to about a 5 mR (44 μ Gy) entrance exposure, using a
60 kVp unfiltered x-ray beam.
Figure 7-5
4. Examine the edges of the ruler on the image for discontinuities. Ruler edges should be
straight and continuous.To verify this do the following:
a. View the image in high magnification.
b. While pressing the CTRL key, hold down the left mouse button and slowly drag
the mouse over the image, examining the ruler edges.
5. The image must be closely examined to verify uniform line spacing (dropouts are
detectable as lucent straight lines in the open field). Any “missed” lines would

represent a serious error in the camera electronics. To pass this test, no such lines are
allowed. To verify uniform line spacing do the following:
a. View the image in high magnification.
b. While pressing the CTRL key, hold down the left mouse button and slowly drag the
mouse over the image, examining the line spacing.
6. Do not confuse a line of high or low pixel values with a missing line. A line of high or low
pixels is a charge trap and should be corrected using the Artefact Removal procedure. See
Section 6.4.9 “Artefact Removal Procedure” on page 6-30.
7.1.6.5 Geometric Correction

The Detector Heads are optically coupled systems. They use a very wide aperture, wide angle
lens. All such lenses produce a “barrel” distortion which must subsequently be corrected by
applying an inverse distortion. The result should be a perfectly square image. Some further
linear distortion is inevitable, however, as objects on the faceplate are projected onto the
scintillator. The degree of projection distortion varies with the source image distance (SID).
This test ensures the barrel correction is functioning properly and checks that projection
distortion is within the expected limits.
To perform the Geometric Correction test

ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked.) Select
OK.
•Projection - Spatial
•Level - Custom
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK
3. Place a steel ruler in the same position as step 2 in Section 7.1.6.4. Expose the system to
about a 5 mR (44 μ Gy) entrance exposure, using a 60 kVp unfiltered x-ray beam.
4. Adjust window and level settings by moving the mouse up and down or left and right
across the image while holding the right mouse button. Adjust levels such that the
gradations on the ruler can be seen.
5. Use the Region Of Interest (ROI) function to draw a box 20 cm long. Verify that it overlays
markings spaced 20 cm apart. Deviation should be less than 5%.
6. Repeat the test with the ruler placed along the top and bottom edges and left and right sides.
Worksheet).

7.1.6.6 High-Contrast Resolution

The X4C uses a 4096 x 4096 imaging area CCD. This gives a 108 micron pixel size at the
scintillator. Sampling theory shows that the limiting spatial resolution for this system is
4.6 line pairs per millimetre. The X3C uses a 3072 x 3072 imaging area CCD. This gives
a 144 micron pixel size at the scintillator. Sampling theory gives about a 3.4 lp/mm
limiting resolution. This test checks that spatial resolution is within specifications.
Figure 7-6
To perform the High Contrast Resolution test

1. Select Xplorer Calibration. Set the Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and
Dark fields ON, Geometric Correction OFF, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is
checked as shown in Figure 7-6. Select OK.
•Projection - High Contrast
•Level - Custom
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK
3. Place a line-pair pattern device on the centre of the imaging area at 45 degrees from the
edge directions. Collimate to an area double the size of the target.

4. Expose the system with an exposure of about 15 mR (131 μ Gy). Use a 50 kVp unfiltered x-
ray beam. The central beam should be orthogonal to the plane of the line pair target. If it is
not, the lines can act like a grid and reduce the apparent resolution. See Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7
5. Process the image by selecting Enhance. In the Sharpen dialog box, select Box Car
Unsharp, and then move the sliders for Sharpening Strength to 10 and Sharpening
Kernel to 0. See Figure 7-8. It is important to select the method first with the drop down
box and then to set the values with the sliders.

Figure 7-8
6. Set the window and level to optimally visualize the line-pair patterns using 2-3X
magnification. A group is considered resolved when at least one unbroken dark line can
be seen extending through the group. The limiting resolution should be within 10% of
the expected value and should be consistent with prior inspections. Nominal value is 4
line pairs per millimetre for the X4C and 3.2 line pairs for the X3C. An example is
shown in Figure 7-7.
Worksheet).
7.1.6.7 Erasure Thoroughness and Artefact/Defect Check
To perform the Erasure Thoroughness and Artefact/Defect Check

1. Take another high-contrast resolution exposure.
2. Do not change the Xplorer Calibration settings.

•Projection - Erasure
•Level - Custom
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK.
4. Remove the resolution test object. Expose the system to a 1 mR (8.8 μ Gy) entrance
exposure, at 50kVp, collimated to expose the entire imaging area. This exposure must be
done within one minute of the high-contrast resolution exposure.
5. The image should still be uniform with no visible ghosting from the previous exposure, nor
artefacts or defects. Confirm this by measuring the average pixel value in the image and its
standard deviation. Two times the standard deviation should be less than 10% of the
average pixel value.
Worksheet).
7.1.6.8 Noise/Low-Contrast Resolution
Figure 7-9

To perform the Noise/Low-Contrast Test

1. Select Xplorer Calibration. Set the Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and
Dark Fields ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is
checked as shown in Figure 7-9 above. Select OK.
•Projection - Low Contrast
•Level - Custom
•Size - Medium
b. Select OK.
3. Place the low-contrast phantom on the imaging area. Use a 100 kVp beam with 1 mm
of Cu. Collimate to an area double the size of the target.
4. Expose the low-contrast phantom using a 1 mR (8.8 µGy) entrance exposure.
Figure 7-10
5. Adjust window and level to visualize as many holes as possible. See Figure 7-10
above. Record the number of holes visible as a representative of the contrast-detail
behavior. The contrast threshold should be similar to that observed in previous
inspections. For X4C, the target threshold value is lower than 2%. If less than seven
holes are visible, the system fails to meet the required specification. For X3C, the target
threshold value is lower than 3%. Therefore, if less than six holes are visible, the
system fails.

Worksheet). Table 7-2 below shows the contrasts represented by the holes in the IDC low
contrast phantom.
Table 7-2
Number % Contrast
Hole
Visible (@100kVp)
1 Fail 13.95
2 Fail 9.84
3 Fail 6.92
4 Fail 4.89
5 Fail 3.49
6 Fail 2.43
7 Pass 1.75
8 Pass 1.21
7.1.6.9 Documentation
Ensure the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet) is complete, including
signature and date. Fax the Certificate of Quality, along with the Customer System
Acceptance Document, to IDC, attention Customer Service.
7.1.6.10 Procedure for Measuring Exposure
7.1.6.11 Calculation
For radiation meters that have unshielded probes, the radiation is measured in free-air to avoid
backscatter, and then the radiation at the desired SID is calculated from these results. The
calculation is as follows:
DESE = DM * (SPD / SID) 2
where
DESE is the system entrance exposure dose
DM is the measured dose from the radiation meter
SID is the source to imager distance in centimetres
SPD is the source to probe distance in centimetres
For example, for a SID of 180 cm (70 inches), we suggest a measuring distance of SPD =
127.3 cm (50.1 inches). This gives a simple factor of 2. In other words, divide any measured
reading by 2 to give the reading at a SID of 180 cm.

For a SID of 100 cm (40 inches), a measuring distance of SPD = 70.7 cm (27.8 inches)
will give the same factor of 2.
7.1.6.12 Procedure for Measuring Exposure

The following is the procedure for measuring the exposure. See Figure 7-11 below for a
diagram of the set-up.
1. Lay a lead sheet or lead apron on the floor to reduce backscatter.
2. Make a stand for the radiation meter's probe on the lead sheet with phone books or
other such support to allow the probe to be positioned at least 25 cm from the floor (the
probe is positioned perpendicular to the tube axis).
3. Place the radiation meter's probe at the centre of the beam (indicated by the light
collimator) at the calculated SPD distance from the focal spot (127.3 cm for 180 cm
SID, or 70.7 cm for 100 cm SID). The distance should be measured to the centre of the
chamber.
4. Collimate the x-ray beam to only cover the probe with no more than 2 centimetre
margins.
5. Tape the filtration to the collimator, as required by Table 7-1. Ensure the copper filter is
closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminium filter is next.
6. Set the focal spot to small. Set the kVp to what is required in Table 7-1. Set the mAs to
the starting value suggested in Table 7-1.
7. Make the exposure and divide the measured exposure by 2 to determine the exposure
that the X3C would receive at the faceplate. Change the mAs setting to obtain the
desired radiation reading. Record the final mAs.
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 until Table 7-1 is completed
9. Before proceeding with the rest of the procedure, reposition the tube to produce a
horizontal beam at the needed SID of 180 cm or 100 cm, and open the collimator to
fully cover but not exceed the imaging area by more than 2 centimetres.
10.If Delcano was running during this test, reject any images that may have been captured
due to scatter.

Figure 7-11
127.3 cm (50.1 in)
3 > 25 cm (9.8 in)
1 Source
2 Radiation Meter Probe
3 Support
4 Lead
7.1.6.13 Reference Sections

The following apply:

QAL-03-003 Half Value Layer Testing

QAL-03-007 Creation of Dark Field Correction
QAL-03-008 Creation of Flat Field Correction
QAL-03-010 Gain and Offset for X4C systems
QAL-06-010 Gain and Offset for X3C systems
QAL-04-009 Artefact Removal
7.1.6.14 Records
The following apply

The following apply:
QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet)

7 - 22 • System Acceptance Procedure • Detector Head Installation Checklist
7.2 Detector Head Installation Checklist

After the Detector Head and associated equipment (generator/tube crane) are installed, the
following checks and calibrations must be completed.
____Input the Hospital name in Magellan 3. For more information see the “To Configure
the Institution Settings” section in the Administration chapter of the Magellan 3
Administration Manual.
____Set the life size image for the monitor. For more information see the “To Configure
Life-Size Calibration” section in the Administration chapter of the Magellan 3
____Check disk space settings. For more information see the “The Disc Space Monitor”
section in the Service chapter of the Magellan 3 Administration Manual.
____Set the serial number of the Detector Head into the Magellan.ini file.
____Set monitor resolution to 1600 x 1200.
____Setup network connection.
____Setup all PACS, printers, workstations, and work lists. Include image box sizes for
all print servers used. For more information see the “To Add a New PACS”, “To Add a
New Printer”, and “To Add a Worklist Provider” sections in the Magellan 3
____Set up CHUM and check the VPN connection if established.
____Check fan operation on the Detector Head.
____Check the TEC operation.
____Check Trigger operation.
____Set the gain and offset for the camera.
____Check the Half Value Layer.
____Install the geometric correction maps.
____Darkfield and flatfield calibrations.
____Set the cropping ROI.
____Check for artefacts. Perform artefact removal if necessary.
____Set up F number. For more information see the “To Configure the Institution
Settings” section in the Administration chapter of the Magellan 3 Administration Manual.
Also refer to the F Number Wizard.
____Perform the AEC calibration.
____Perform the final acceptance test.

System Acceptance Procedure • Detector Head Installation Checklist • 7 - 23
If the equipment is installed in the United States, the FDA 2579 form must be
completed. It is the responsibility of the dealer installing the equipment to complete
this form.

Notes
MAGELLAN 3 SERVICE
The sections are as follows:

8.1 “System Requirements”
8.2 “Storage Commitment Theory”
8.3 “Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application”
8.4 “Magellan 3 Help”
8.5 “Connecting to the Generator”
8.6 “The Configuration Manager”
8.7 “Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords”
8.8 “Detector Status”
8.9 “Generator and Imaging Station Configuration”
8.10 “Disk Space Settings”
8.11 “The Worklist Manager”
8.12 “The Send Queue”
8.13 “The Print Queue”
8.14 “Study/Image Settings”
8.15 “Grid Detection”
8.16 “The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr)”
8.17 “The Parameter Editor”
8.18 “Managing the Procedures”
8.19 “Import Data”
8.20 “Configuring the Arcoma CMT”

8 - 2 • Magellan 3 Service •
Revision Version Date Description
2.1.139 September 26, 2005 Updates for Magellan 2.1.139 - Draft
2.1.147 November 23, 2005 Update to AEC Procedure, minor adjustments - Draft
2.1.149 December 15, 2005 Release
2.1.151 February 17, 2006 Arcoma information
4.0 2.1.151 June 12, 2006 Module part numbers added
4.1 2.1.158 June 20, 2006 Updates for Magellan 2.1.158
4.2 2.1.163 July 28, 2006 Updates for Magellan 2.1.163
4.3 2.1.168 September 5, 2006 Updates for Magellan 2.1.168
4.4 2.1.168 September 20, 2006 Minor revisions
4.5 2.1.171 October 30, 2006 Minor revision for Magellan 2.1.171
5.0 3.0.206 June 1, 2007 Updates for Magellan 3.0.206
5.1 3.0.206 June 5, 2007 Minor Revision

Magellan 3 Service • System Requirements • 8-3
8.1 System Requirements

The following sections describe minimum PC hardware platforms and accessories
required to run the Magellan 3 software.
The IDC acquisition workstation requires either a 100/120 VAC approx 11.4 A at 5/60 Hz
or 200/240 VAC approx 6.1 A at 50/60 Hz. The IDC workstation must be provided with
an UPS (uninterruptible power supply) for power protection.
The IDC Workstation must be connected to a separating (isolating) transformer that
complies with the requirements of IEC 60989, IEC 60601-1 clauses 6.1 and 6.2.
8.1.1 Computer
• Intel Pentium 4
• 3.2 GHz processor
• 2 GB RAM minimum
• 2 x 120 GB mirrored hard drives
• AGP video card (DVI or VGA capable)
• internal modem
• 21” colour flat panel screen with 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution.
• built-in 10/100/1000 mbit/s NIC (network interface card)
• Windows XP operating system
8.1.2 Detector Head and PDM Power Requirements
Do not exceed the specified voltage, or supply AC power at frequencies other than 50 and
60 Hz.
Detector Head Power Jerome Power Supply:

Distribution Module
• Input: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A
• Output: 16 VDC, 5.0 A

8 - 4 • Magellan 3 Service • Storage Commitment Theory
8.2 Storage Commitment Theory

Storage Commitment is a feature that checks to see if images have been safely stored by a
server. For example, Storage Commitment will check to see if the server has archived images
on a backup CD. This feature is beneficial to ensure that images are not mistakenly deleted
before being archived.
When an image is sent from a workstation to a storage computer, such as a PACS, the
workstation will ask Storage Commitment to verify the image is successfully archived on the
storage computer. When an image has been archived, the image is marked as committed and
ready for future deletion.
Storage Commitment communicates between the workstation and storage computer using a
short-term connection between ports on each computer. These connections are only open for a
(configurable) few seconds or minutes. Storage Commitment creates one of these associations
to send a request for storage commitment. If the Storage Commitment SCP (on the storage
computer) can respond before the connection closes, it sends an immediate response.
Otherwise, it will have to open another association and send a delayed response.
See Figure 8-1 for a conceptual diagram of storage commitment. Following the diagram is an
explanation of how Storage Commitment is utilized in the Send Queue.

STORAGE COMPUTER
MODALITY WORKSTATION
(e.g., PACS)
SEND MANAGER STORAGE

(Storage SCU) Image (Storage SCP)
HARD DISK
DRIVE
Image ID
Image
Request to Resend
Magellan 3 Service
Image
Request
Figure 8-1
STORAGE COMMITMENT Immediate Response STORAGE COMMITMENT

SCU SCP
Delayed Response
Im
ag
e ID
BACKUP
MEDIA
ASSOCIATION KEY CD/DVD
Operations occur before the image is stored
Operations occur after the image is stored
Operation occurs if maximum number of requests

are sent and all responses state storage failure
• Storage Commitment Theory •
8-5

8.2.1 Send Queue (Storage SCU) Request for Storage Verification
NOTE: To use the Storage Commitment feature, add a Storage Commitment server. See
Section 8.12.1.1.2, “To Add or Change a Send Destination” and Section 8.12.1.3,
“Configuring Sending Preferences”.
8.2.1.1 Scenario #1–Successful, Immediate Response

The Send Queue, also called the Storage SCU, sends an image to the Storage SCP on the
storage computer. The Send Queue then asks Storage Commitment to verify safe storage. The
workstation Storage Commitment SCU sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage
Commitment SCP, which checks whether or not the image has been archived.
If the image has been archived and the association to Storage Commitment SCU is still
open, Storage Commitment SCP will send an immediate response stating storage was
successful.
NOTE: Storage Commitment SCU will keep the request association open for the amount of
time that is configured in the Sending Preferences dialog box.
This response causes the image on the workstation to be marked as committed and ready for
future deletion.
8.2.1.2 Scenario #2–Successful, Delayed Response

The Send Queue (SCU) sends an image to the storage computer (SCP).
The Send Queue asks Storage Commitment to verify safe storage. The workstation Storage
Commitment (SCU) sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage Commitment (SCP),
which closes the association. After the storage computer backs up the image during its
scheduled run, Storage Commitment (SCP) sends a response back to Storage Commitment
SCU indicating the image has been successfully stored.
If the image has been archived, and the association to Storage Commitment (SCU) has
been closed, a new association must send a delayed response stating the storage was
successful.
NOTE: Storage Commitment (SCU) will keep the association open for the amount of time
configured in the Sending Preferences dialog box. After the delayed timeout has been
reached, Storage Commitment will automatically default to a response of failed to
store.
This delayed response updates the committed status of the image on the workstation.
8.2.1.3 Scenario #3–Failed, Immediate Response

The Send Queue (SCU) sends an image to the storage computer (SCP). The Send Queue then
asks Storage Commitment to verify that the image is archived. The workstation Storage
Commitment (SCU) sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage Commitment (SCP),
which checks whether or not the image has already been archived.

Magellan 3 Service • Storage Commitment Theory • 8-7
If the image failed to store and the association to the Storage Commitment (SCU) is
still open, Storage Commitment (SCP) will send an immediate response indicating
storage was unsuccessful. Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry by sending another
request to Storage Commitment (SCP).
NOTE: The number of times Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry sending the request
will depend on the number of times configured in the Sending Preferences dialog
box.
Storage Commitment (SCU) keeps track of the responses it receives from Storage
Commitment (SCP). If the maximum number of verification request is reached,
Storage Commitment (SCU) will notify the Send Queue to send the image to the
storage computer again. The cycle is then repeated until a response of success is
returned.
A response of success will update the committed status of the image on the workstation.
8.2.1.4 Scenario #4–Failed, Delayed Response

The Send Queue (SCU) sends an image to the storage computer (SCP). The Send Queue
then asks Storage Commitment to verify that the image is archived. The workstation
Storage Commitment (SCU) sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage
Commitment (SCP), which checks whether or not the image has already been archived.
If the image failed to store and the request association from Storage Commitment
(SCU) is closed, a new association is made to send a delayed response indicating
storage/archiving failed. Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry by sending another
request to Storage Commitment (SCP).
NOTE: The number of times Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry sending the request
will depend on the number of times configured in the Sending Preferences dialog
box.
Storage Commitment (SCU) keeps track of the responses it receives from Storage
Commitment (SCP). If the maximum verification request is reached, Storage
Commitment (SCU) will notify the Send Queue to send the image to the storage computer
again. The cycle is then repeated until a response of successful storage has been relayed.
A response of successful will update the committed status of the image on the
workstation.
8.2.2 AutoDeleting Images
The workstation and storage computer can be configured to AutoDelete images after a
specified amount of time.
Schedule AutoDelete settings in the AutoDelete Configuration dialog box on the SCU
workstation. See the Administration Manual for details.
Images will be AutoDeleted if the image is older than a configurable age and if any of the

following are true:

• The image is rejected.
• The image is sent or printed and Storage Commitment is not enabled.
• The image is committed and Storage Commitment is enabled.
NOTE: AutoDelete settings for the workstation may differ from the AutoDelete settings for
the storage computer. If using third-party software on the storage computer, refer to
its accompanying documentation.

Magellan 3 Service • Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application • 8-9
8.3 Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application
8.3.1 Starting the Magellan 3 Application
It is not required for the system to be powered off at night. Before starting the Magellan 3
Application, the main power to system should be on.
The computer and the Magellan 3 Application do not require daily shut down or
rebooting. If however the computer is shut down, simply restart the computer to
automatically launch the Magellan 3 Application.
WARNING! When the Magellan 3 Application starts, a cool down period must be
observed before using any component of the application. The Detector
Manager icon on the Magellan 3 Application Launcher turns from red to
green when the operating temperature is reached.
WARNING! If Magellan 3 is started prior to the unit being powered on, an error message
appears. If this occurs, exit the Magellan 3 Application, turn on the power to
the unit and restart the Magellan 3 Application.
Before acquiring an image, the Magellan 3 Application must be running.
8.3.2 Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application
It is recommended that the unit and the computer are left running; however, there will be
instances when you must shut down and power up the unit and the computer.
Generally, Magellan 3 should not be shut down without shutting down the computer, so if
you need to shut down Magellan 3, simply shut down the computer.
However, there are times when Magellan 3 must be shut down by a service user, without
shutting down the computer.
To shut down the Magellan 3 application without shutting down the computer, select the
Application Launcher and simultaneously press the Alt and F4 buttons on the keyboard.

8 - 10 • Magellan 3 Service • Magellan 3 Help
8.4 Magellan 3 Help

Magellan 3 Help is an application that is used by administration, technologist, and service
personnel. The application displays information about Magellan 3 software, the workstation,
and includes the Adobe PDF Help File.
8.4.1 Using the Help Application
1. Select the Help application icon. See Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2
2. The Magellan 3 – Help dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3
From the dialog box, select one of the following:

• About – Displays information about the Magellan 3 software. See Figure 8-4.

Magellan 3 Service • Magellan 3 Help • 8 - 11
Figure 8-4
• System Information – Displays network and system information such as the IP

address and computer model.
Figure 8-5
• Help File – displays an Adobe PDF file of the Magellan 3 Administration and Opera-
tor’s Manuals.
3. To exit from the Help application, select Close.

8 - 12 • Magellan 3 Service • Connecting to the Generator
8.5 Connecting to the Generator
8.5.1 Sedecal Generator Connections
The following connections are possible with the Sedecal Generator:
Using the Magellan 3 GenUI with no Console and no DAP

In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the primary port.
Using the Magellan 3 GenUI on Primary Port with no Console and with DAP
In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the primary port and the DAP (Dose Area
Product) is connected to the secondary port.
1. Verify the Sedecal Generator U24 firmware V7R0b13 is already installed in the generator
cabinet.
2. If the new generator firmware V7R01b9 is not installed in the generator cabinet (the
cabinet has the old V7R0b13 firmware), the old firmware needs to be removed and the new
generator V7R01b9 firmware installed.
3. Connect the Magellan 3 GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Primary Port J8 in the
Sedecal Generator.
4. Connect the DAP Null Serial Cable to the Secondary Port J7 in the Sedecal Generator.
8.5.2 CPI Generator Connections
The following connections are possible with the CPI Generator:
Using the Magellan 3 GenUI with the CPI Touch Screen Console
In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the secondary port while the CPI Touch
Screen is connected to the primary port.
To connect the Magellan 3 GenUI and the Generator
1. Connect the CPI Touch Screen Console Cable to the Primary Port J4 in the CPI Generator
interface board.
2. Connect the Magellan 3 GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Secondary Port J11 in the
CPI Generator.
Using the Magellan 3 GUI with no Console and no DAP

In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the primary port.
To connect the Magellan 3 GenUI and the Generator, connect the Magellan GenUI Null
Modem Serial Cable to the Primary Port J2 in the CPI Generator.
Using the Magellan 3 GenUI with no Console and with DAP

Magellan 3 Service • Connecting to the Generator • 8 - 13
In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the secondary port.

1. Plug the cable from the DAP device 1 (tube 1) into J2 of the DAP interface board.
2. Connect the Magellan 3 GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Primary Port J2 in the
CPI Generator.

8 - 14 • Magellan 3 Service • The Configuration Manager
8.6 The Configuration Manager

The Magellan 3 Configuration Manager enables you to modify the settings of the applications
on the Application Launcher, set the parameters of the anatomies, manage the procedures,
importa data and configure the Arcoma CMT.
The Configuration Manager allows you to configure and adjust the following settings:
• Groups, Users and Passwords
• Generator and Imaging Stations
• Disk Space Settings
• Worklist Settings
• Send Settings
• Print Settings
• Study/Image Settings
• Acquisition Interface Settings
• Parameter Editor
• Manage Procedures
• Import Data
• Arcoma CMT Settings
To open the Configuration Manager, select the Configuration Manager icon. See Figure 8-6
and Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-6

Magellan 3 Service • The Configuration Manager • 8 - 15
Figure 8-7

8 - 16 • Magellan 3 Service • Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords
8.7 Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords

Security groups, user lists, and passwords can be added and modified in Magellan 3. Each
group can be assigned different permissions to access various components of Magellan 3.
To Open Groups, Users and Passwords

1. From the Configuration Manager, select Groups, Users and Passwords.
See Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8
8.7.1 To Add a New Security Group
1. From the Configuration Manager, select Groups, Users and Passwords.

2. From the Groups, Users, and Passwords, select Security Groups. See Figure 8-9.

Magellan 3 Service • Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords • 8 - 17
Figure 8-9
3. Select Add New to activate the Group Details fields.

4. Enter the Group Name and the Security Level. This is a value from 1-998 indicating
the level of security for a group. The higher the level of security, the higher the number.
NOTE: The group you create must have a security level lower than the highest level of
the group you are a member of. You cannot give a lower level user permission to
perform actions you do not have permission to perform.
5. In the Group Details field, check the components the user group has access to by
selecting the checkbox next to the permission.
Select Save. The user group is added to the Existing Groups list.
8.7.1.1 Modifying a Security Group

Because a security group has users associated with it, it cannot be removed from the
Existing Groups list. Group Details and permissions of a selected group can be changed,
or a selected group can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing
Groups list. Inactive groups are displayed in red and marked as inactive.
To display the inactive groups select the Show Inactive Groups checkbox.

NOTE: The Administration and Technologist groups are locked; therefore, they cannot be
deactivated or have their name or security level changed. The permissions for these
groups can be modified.
8.7.1.1.1 To Modify a Security Group

1. From the Groups, Users, and Passwords, select Security Groups.
2. Select the security group you want to modify. See Figure 8-10.
3. Do one of the following:
• To deactivate a security group, select the Inactive checkbox.
• To recover an inactive security group, deselect the Inactive checkbox.
• To change the Group Details or permissions for the group, edit the group’s information or
change the permissions as required.
4. Select Save.
NOTE: You can change the permissions of a group lower than the group you are a member
of, but you cannot change the permissions of an equal or higher level group. You
cannot give a lower level user permission to perform actions you do not have
permission to perform.

Figure 8-10
8.7.2 Configuring the User List
You can add a new user, import user information, and modify a user’s information in the
User List.
8.7.2.1 To Create a New User

1. From Groups, Users, and Passwords, select User List.
2. In the User List dialog box (see Figure 8-11) select Add New and do the following:
• Enter the user's Initials (this is a mandatory field).
• Enter the technologist’s identification number.
• Enter a Login Name (this is a mandatory field).
• Enter a Password.
• Enter an E-mail address (optional). This should be filled in if the user is required to
send or receive JPEG images by e-mail.
• Enter a Phone Number.

Figure 8-11
3. In the Group(s) list, select the group(s) to add the user to by selecting the checkbox beside
each name.
4. Select Save.
8.7.2.2 Modifying the User List

Because users have records associated with them, they cannot be removed from the Existing
Users list. User Details and groups of a selected user can be changed, or a selected user can
be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing User list. Inactive users are
displayed in red and marked as inactive.
To display the inactive users, select the Show Inactive Users checkbox.
8.7.2.2.1 To Modify a User

1. From Groups, Users, and Passwords, select User List.
2. Select the user you want to modify. See Figure 8-12.
• To deactivate a user, select the Inactive User checkbox.
• To recover an inactive user, deselect the Inactive User checkbox.
• To change the Group Details or groups for the user, edit the user’s information or change
the groups as required.
4. Select Save.

Figure 8-12
8.7.3 To Change Your Password
1. From Groups, Users and Passwords, select Change My Password. See Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13
2. Enter your Current Password.

3. Enter your New Password.
4. Re-enter your New Password.
5. Select OK to save the changes.

8 - 22 • Magellan 3 Service • Detector Status
8.8 Detector Status

The TEC Controller Manager monitors the cooling status of the camera. The TECCM has a
status icon on the Application launcher. It is a service module and is always running.
Magellan 3 can be configured to communicate with more than one detector head. The
Detector Status will start a TEC Control Manager (TECCM) for each detector head installed.
From the Image Stations dialog box you can add and remove detector heads, configure the
TECCM for each detector head, and configure the Detector Calibration.
The Detector Status icon (see Figure 8-14) on the Application Launcher, can be displayed
with one or two TECCM controls. Each TECCM thermometer will display its own color,
indicating its status.
Figure 8-14

Magellan 3 Service • Generator and Imaging Station Configuration • 8 - 23
8.9 Generator and Imaging Station Configuration

The Generator and Imaging Stations are configured in the Configuration Manager.
To configure the Generator and Imaging Stations:
1. Select Configuration Manager to open the Configuration Manager menu. See
Figure 8-15.
Figure 8-15
2. Select Generator and Imager Settings to open the Configure Imaging Stations Settings.
This menu displays three settings: Generator Settings, Imaging Station Settings and
Scan for Hardware. See Figure 8-16.

8 - 24 • Magellan 3 Service • Generator and Imaging Station Configuration
Figure 8-16
8.9.1 Configuring the X-ray Generator
Magellan must be configured to allow communication between the generator and Magellan 3.
This communication allows Magellan 3 to associate exposure parameters (such as kVp, mAs,
mA, and ms) with the image.
NOTE: The exposure is not initiated by the Magellan 3 Application. The exposure must be
initiated by the x-ray generator.
1. Completely shutdown the Magellan 3 Application (Alt F4), the DelCano Application, and
any other applications that might use the Xplorer control.
2. Download and run the Installer.
3. The following dialog is displayed if generator integration has not already been installed.
See Figure 8-17.

Figure 8-17
4. Select Sedecal Generator, CPI Generator, or Do not install Generator Integration.
Selecting one of the generators displays a dialog box asking if DAP is installed for this
generator. See Figure 8-18. Selecting Yes will automatically install all the necessary
settings to read the DAP information from the generator.
Figure 8-18
5. Choose the number of Detectors that will be installed and select the Next button. See
Figure 8-19.

Figure 8-19
6. If more than one detector is selected, you will be prompted to enter names for each
detector. Enter the names for the detectors as requested and select Next. See Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-20
7. The installation will begin and when completed a dialog box appears confirming
installation success. Select Finish.
8. Reboot the machine.
9. From the Configuration Manager, select the Generator Settings in the Generator and
Imaging Station Settings to open the Magellan Generator Integrations Settings dialog
box. Depending on the generator selected, one of the following dialog boxes is
displayed. See Figure 8-21 for Sedecal Generator and Figure 8-22 for CPI Generator.
Figure 8-21

Figure 8-22
10.Ensure that Null Serial Cable is connected to the Com Port.

11.Select the COM Port, and check the appropriate values for the generator being used.
12.If connecting to the Sedecal Generator, select the Maximum AEC Density from the AEC
Density drop-down list.
13.Check Send Parameters to Generator to send the exposure parameters of the anatomy
and projection pairs to the generator. If this is checked, Connect to Generator must also
be checked. Connecting to the generator will automatically get exposure parameters from
the generator. In the Sedecal Generator Configuration dialog box, check Has DAP if a
Dose Area Product Meter is used.
8.9.2 Adding or Removing a Non-DR Imaging Station
An Imaging Station for a non-IDC detector can be installed.

• To install a non-IDC detector, select Add Non-DR Imaging Station. See Figure 8-23.
• To remove a non-DR imaging station, select Remove Imaging Station. See Figure 8-23.
NOTE: Only a non-DR imaging station can be removed.
NOTE: You may not select a non-DR detector to work with a regular imaging station.
8.9.3 Setting up the Imaging Station
When configuring the Imaging Station, both the Detector and the TECC/PDM have to be
configured. The number of Imaging Stations and TECC/PDMs will equal the number of
detectors installed. For a non-DR imaging station, IDC Detectors and TECC/PDMs cannot be
selected.

8.9.3.1 Naming the Imaging Station

Icons and names may be assigned to the IDC units.
1. In the Generator and Imaging Station Settings menu, select Imaging Station Settings to
display the Configure Imaging Stations. See Figure 8-23.
NOTE: The Configure Imaging Stations dialog box is displayed with one or two Imaging
Station set ups, depending on the number of detector heads installed.
Figure 8-23
NOTE: When generator integration is installed, the generator workstation that the
imaging station corresponds to will be displayed. If no generator is displayed,
there is no generator integration.
2. Enter a name for the Detector Head in the Imaging Station Name field.
3. Select the icon button to select an icon to associate with the imaging station.

8.9.3.2 Configuring the Detector Head

1. The Detector drop-down list should display 1 or 2, depending on the number of detector
heads installed.
2. The serial number is automatically displayed once it is entered into the Serial Number field
in the Detector Calibration Settings dialog box.
3. Select Settings to open the Detector Calibration dialog box. Calibrate the Detector Head
with the necessary values required for selected the selected Detector Head.
8.9.3.3 Configuring the TECC/PDM

For every Detector Head installed a TECC/PDM must also be installed.
1. In the Generator and Imaging Station Settings menu, select Imaging Station Settings to
display the Configure Imaging Stations dialog box.
2. Select the TECC/PDM from the drop-down list.
3. The COM Port is automatically assigned when the hardware has been scanned. If the
hardware was not found the TECC/PDM info displays n/a. When this occurs, try the
following:
• Scan for hardware by selecting Scan for Hardware located on the Generator and Imaging
Station Settings dialog box.
• If it still does not appear, ensure the TECC/PDM is properly plugged in. The scan will
only locate what COM port the device is on.
4. The Serial number of the PDM the serial number of the device will be determined and
automatically displayed once the TECC is running with the entire Magellan suite.
5. Select Configure to open the TECC/PDM Status dialog box. See Figure 8-24.
6. Check the appropriate settings for the TECC/PDM being configured.

Figure 8-24
NOTE: The TEC should be on at all times except for troubleshooting purposes. If turned
OFF, ensure it is turned back on.
7. Check the TEC On checkbox.

8. Uncheck Ignore External Fan Error Messages if the system’s PDM uses a fan that is
recognized (connected through our configuration). If no fan can be detected, an error
message will display stating that the Fan in the PDM has failed. If there is no external
fan being used (the system is using a control box) check Ignore External Fan Error
Messages. This will prevent the error message from displaying.

9. Check Use Digital Grid Detect Board if a digital grid detect board is being used.
10.In the TEC Set-point field, enter a value by clicking on the arrows to the right of the text
box to scroll to the desired temperature. The temperature range is between -20°C and
+20°C. This will normally be set to -10°C and should not be changed except for testing
purposes.
11.The TEC Controller Status is informative and displays the status of the TEC Controller at
any given time.
8.9.4 Detector Selector
If you are installing the 2200 system with two detector heads, it is convenient to view the
Detector Selector instead of the Gen UI when performing the AEC calibration. To view the
Detector Selector and hide the Gen UI, click on the Gen UI and press the Alt and F4 keys.
This displays the Detector Selector, enabling you to select between detector heads. See Figure
8-25.
Figure 8-25

Magellan 3 Service • Disk Space Settings • 8 - 33
8.10 Disk Space Settings

Magellan 3 allows monitors to have multiple drives. To add, remove or change the Disk
Space Settings:
1. Select the Disk Space Settings to open the Disk Space Settings dialog box. See Figure
8-26.
Figure 8-26
2. From the Disk Space Settings dialog box (Figure 8-27), select one of the following:
• Add – to include the other drives in the Drive Settings field. Select Add to open the
Add Settings dialog box. See Figure 8-27. Select the drive to add to the Drive Settings
field from the drop-down list and select OK.

8 - 34 • Magellan 3 Service • Disk Space Settings
Figure 8-27
• Change – to adjust the panic levels of the drive. Click on the row of the drive to adjust and
select Change. The Change Settings dialog box will appear. Also see Section 8.10.1, “To
Change the Disk Space Settings”.
• Remove – to remove a drive from the drive settings field. Click on the row of the drive to
remove, and select Remove.
8.10.1 To Change the Disk Space Settings
1. From the Disk Space Settings dialog box, click on the row of the drive to adjust and select
Change.
2. By using the Up and Down arrows or by entering a numeric value, change the levels of the
Show Caution (yellow) below. The default is 5000 MB. If the disk space falls under the
specified value, the Disk Space icon on the Application Launcher will be outlined in
Yellow. When the disk space is greater than the specified value, the Disk Space icon is
outlined in Green.
3. Similarly, change the levels of the Show Urgent (red) below. The default is 3000 MB. If
the disk space falls under the specified value, the Disk Space icon on the Application
Launcher is outlined in Red.

Magellan 3 Service • Disk Space Settings • 8 - 35
4. Change the levels of the Show Panic Message below. The default is 2000 MB. If the
disk space falls under the specified value, the Disk Space icon on the Application
Launcher flashes from Blue to Red. A warning message is displayed every 30 seconds,
warning that the disk space is almost full.
5. In the Additional message text field, add any warning messages about space and
contact information for service in the event the hard drive is full.
6. Select OK. A confirmation dialog will appear to confirm the changes. See Figure 8-28.
Figure 8-28
NOTE: Additional message is an informative message displaying warning messages

about disk space. This message is site configured, so the site administrator can
add contact information for service in case the hard drive fills up.

8 - 36 • Magellan 3 Service • The Worklist Manager
8.11 The Worklist Manager

The Worklist Manager operates as an intermediary between the Magellan 3 AI and two
possible information sources. The Worklist Manager can be configured to accept studies in
two ways:
• A scheduled study from a DICOM worklist provider. This is typically a component of a
Hospital's Information System (HIS) or Radiology Information System (RIS).
• An unscheduled study that is manually entered at the workstation, as in a drop in or an
anonymous study.
The Worklist Manager communicates the status of performed studies back to the respective
sources. As studies are performed in Magellan 3, they are removed from the Worklist
Manager's scheduled studies list and added to the Performed Studies list. The status of any
scheduled study is communicated to the Worklist Provider via Modality Performed Procedure
Step (MPPS).
8.11.1 Worklist Settings
In the Worklist Settings, you can configure the Worklist Provider, the Scheduled Studies, and
the Port settings.
1. From the Configuration Manager, select the Worklist Settings. See Figure 8-29.
Figure 8-29

Magellan 3 Service • The Worklist Manager • 8 - 37
8.11.2 Configuring the Worklist Connection
The Worklist Connection allows you to Change the Application Entity for the Worklist
Manager, add, change and remove Worklists, and configure the Worklist Query
Conditions for the Selected Worklist Provider.
8.11.2.1 To Change the Application Entity Title for the Worklist Manager
1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Connection.
2. In the Worklist Manager section, select Change beside the AE Title text box to make
the field editable. See Figure 8-30.
Figure 8-30
3. Enter the appropriate information.

4. Select Save.
8.11.2.2 To Add or Change a Worklist Provider

1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Connection.
2. Select New to display the Worklist Provider Configuration dialog box (see Figure 8-31)
or select the Worklist Provider from the Description drop-down list and select Change
to display the information for the selected provider (see Figure 8-32).

Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
3. In the Worklist Provider Configuration dialog box do the following:

• Enter or change the Description for the Worklist Provider. This value has no DICOM
connectivity relevance, but is used as an identifying tag by IDC Magellan 3.
• Enter or change the AE Title value for the DICOM AE (Application Entity) Title defined
on the Worklist Provider to which you want to connect. The DICOM AE Title is a DICOM
specific name used to identify DICOM providers and clients on a network. The worklist
provider you are connecting to will have its own identifying AE Title.
• Enter or change the host name or IP address of the Worklist Provider.
• Enter or change the provider’s TCP/IP port. The TCP/IP port is an integer number used to
specify a particular “network address” for the worklist provider. Typical values may be
104 or 4000; however, the value you enter here depends on the particular provider to
which you are connecting.
• Uncheck Use MPPS if you do not want Magellan to report any MPPS (Modality Per-
formed Procedure Steps) status changes to the Worklist Provider. The default is checked.

4. If adding a new Worklist Provider, select Apply & Next to save the information and
add another Worklist Provider or select OK to save the information.
If changing the Worklist Provider Information, select Apply to save the changes and
then OK.
8.11.2.3 To Remove a Worklist Provider

1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Provider.
2. In the Worklist Connection Configuration dialog box, select the Worklist Provider
from the drop-down list.
3. Select Remove.
4. A dialog box appears asking if you want to remove the Worklist. Select Yes to remove
the Worklist Provider or select No to cancel. See Figure 8-33.
Figure 8-33

8.11.2.4 To Configure the Worklist Query Conditions

1. Select Configure Worklist Connection to open the Worklist Connection Configuration
dialog box. See Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34
2. Select the Worklist Provider from the Description drop-down list.

3. Enter the query conditions for the Worklist Provider. You may choose to have any number
of conditions specified. The Magellan 3 Worklist displays only the studies that meet the
criteria for all the query conditions specified. The filtering conditions are as follows:
• Scheduled Station AE Title – The Application Entity Title of the station where studies are
performed.
• Modality – Any valid modality code. Modality simply means the method of generating
medical images. IDC Magellan 3 uses the standard DICOM abbreviations, such as CR for
computed radiography.
• Scheduled Performing Physician – The exams to be performed by a specific physician.
• Scheduled Station Name – The exams to be performed at a particular imaging station.
This would be useful for hospitals with many imaging stations.
• Scheduled Procedure Step Location – The exams to be performed at a particular location
(either a machine or a hospital department).
• Scheduled Procedure Step Description –The exams that use a specific procedure descrip-
tion. If necessary, contact your system administrator or IDC Customer Service for assis-
tance.

4. Select Apply to save the conditions and select OK.
8.11.2.5 To Test the Connection to a Worklist Provider

1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Provider.
2. In the Worklist Provider Configuration dialog box select the Worklist Provider you
want to test from the Description drop-down list.
3. Select Test Connection to open the Test Connection dialog box. See Figure 8-35.
4. When the test is complete, the status is indicated. Select Close.
5. Confirm the Worklist Provider displayed is the one you want.
6. Select OK.
Figure 8-35
8.11.3 Managing the Scheduled Studies
You can set the Scheduled Studies list to reflect the workflow requirements. You can also
determine the automatic refresh time of scheduled studies and what patient information is
displayed.

To configure the scheduled studies

1. Click on the Worklist Manager to open the Scheduled Studies. See Figure 8-36.
2. In the Scheduled Studies dialog box, select Studies Preferences.
Figure 8-36
3. In the Preferences dialog box (see Figure 8-37) do the following:

Figure 8-37
• Check the Automatically refresh schedule checkbox to automatically refresh the list
of scheduled studies. Enter the interval time to refresh the schedule.
• In the Heading list check the fields that you want to display in the list of Scheduled
Studies. Explanations of the data fields are as follows:
•Patient Name – displayed as last name, first name, middle name.
•Patient ID – a unique identifier assigned to a patient by the HIS/RIS.
•Sex – specifies the patient’s sex. DICOM standard terms are female, male,
and other.
•Date of Birth – birth date of the patient.
•Patient Age – indicates the patient’s age in days if the patient is less that one
month old, months if the patient is from 1 to 24 months, and years if the
patient is older than 2 years.
•SPS ID – Scheduled Procedure Step ID is an identifier that recognizes the
Scheduled Procedure Step.
•SPS Date and Time – Scheduled Procedure Study date and time.

•SPS Description – Scheduled Procedure Step Description is the specific

procedure being performed in the study. This field can include more than one
procedure.
•Accession Number – depending on the site, this is a number assigned to a study
by a HIS or RIS.
•Referring Physician – the physician that referred the patient for this exam.
•Requested Procedure ID – this is a unique text tag used to identify each imaging
procedure.
•Requested Procedure Description – description of the requested procedure as
created by the performing institution.
•Contrast Allergies – any contrast allergies of the patient.
•Medical Alerts – any relevant medical problems of the patient.
4. Select OK.
NOTE: Changing the view of the Worklist Manager list also changes the view in the
Magellan 3 AI.
8.11.3.1 Moving the Scheduled Study Columns

The Scheduled Studies columns can be moved to reflect what data is displayed first.
To move a Scheduled Studies column

1. Select and hold the column heading you want moved. The column heading appears
recessed.
2. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the column until the desired location is
reached.
3. Release the mouse button. The column is moved.
NOTE: All columns can be moved with the exception of the Patient Name. It is locked in the
first position.
8.11.3.2 Resizing the Columns

The columns can be resized, changing the display of the study information.
To resize a column
1. Place the mouse cursor on the edge of the column you want to resize. The mouse cursor
becomes a double arrow.
2. Select and hold down the column border.
3. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag to the left or right, depending on the
column you want to resize.
4. Release the mouse button. The column is resized.

8.11.4 To Configure Other Settings in the Worklist Manager
1. From Worklist Settings in the Configuration Manager, select Other Settings.

2. In the Other Settings dialog box (see Figure 8-38) enter the Port number you want to
listen on for incoming queries.
Figure 8-38
3. Select OK.

8 - 46 • Magellan 3 Service • The Send Queue
8.12 The Send Queue

The Send Queue operates as an intermediary between the Magellan 3 Workstation and
DICOM PACS or other Send Destinations.
The Send Queue Service runs in the background and ensures that studies are sent to remote
destinations as requested by the Magellan 3 AI or the Study Manager. Network problems can
sometimes prevent studies from being sent to a Send Destination. In this case, studies are
queued in the Send Queue and automatically sent later. You can view the queued studies and
direct a study to another destination.
The Send Queue can be configured from Send Settings to communicate with a number of
Send Destinations. Each Send Destination is configured separately in the Send Destination
List and is added to the list. Each destination can be active or inactive. At least one active
destination is selected as the default destination.
The Send Queue can be configured to send studies with lossless compression, and unsent
studies can be automatically re-sent.
Configuring a Send Destination requires the following information:
• DICOM AE (Application Entity) title of the Image Storage Server.
• Image Storage Server TCP/IP address ("IP address") or host name.
• Image Storage Server TCP/IP port.
• Whether the Image Storage Server supports being sent as JPEG compressed images.
8.12.1 Send Settings
In Send Settings you can configure the Send Destination List, Film Size, and Sending
Preferences.
To open Send Settings, select Send Settings from the Configuration Manager. See Figure 8-
39.
Figure 8-39

Magellan 3 Service • The Send Queue • 8 - 47
8.12.1.1 To Configure the Send Destination List

From Send Settings select the Send Destination List. In the Send Destination List
dialog box PACS or other Send Destinations can be added, changed, or removed from the
list. See Figure 8-40.
Figure 8-40
8.12.1.1.1 To Change the AE Title for Magellan 3

1. From the Send Destination List dialog box, select Change next to the AE Title field
making the field editable. The Change button changes to a Save button. Enter the
appropriate information. See Figure 8-40.
2. Select Save.

8.12.1.1.2 To Add or Change a Send Destination

1. In the Configuration Manager, select Send Settings. See Figure 8-41.
Figure 8-41
2. From Send Settings, select Send Destination List. See Figure 8-42.
Figure 8-42
3. From the Send Destination List dialog box select New or Change.
4. In the Send Destination Configuration dialog box (see Figure 8-43) do the following:
• Enter or change a Description of the destination to which images will be sent. This identi-
fies the destination to the user (e.g., 1st Floor PACS).

• Enter or change the value for the DICOM AE Title defined on the Send Destination.
A DICOM AE Title is a DICOM specific name used to identify DICOM servers and
clients on a network. The Send Destination you are connecting to has its own identify-
ing AE title.
Figure 8-43
• Enter or change the Host Name/IP address of the Send Destination.

• Enter or change the TCP/IP Port value in the Port field.
The TCP/IP port is a number used to specify a particular “network address” for the
Send Destination. Typical values may be 104 or 4000; however, the value depends on
the particular destination.

• Check Destination is an Archive to confirm the send destination is an archive system.

This allows the images to be cleaned up by AutoDelete. This information is displayed in
the Performed Studies list of the Magellan AI and the Study Image Manager.
• Check Send lossless compressed to apply a lossless compression technique applied an
image without loss of data to the file, thus image quality is preserved. Unchecking Send
lossless compressed sends the file without any compression.
• Check Burn in VOI LUT to burn in the VOI LUT instead of sending it as a DICOM tag.
Not preferred in most cases.
• Check Burn in Scale Markers to burn scale markers into the edges of the image when the
image is sent to a send destination.
• Select the image bit depth for the Send Destination from the Resample bit depth to drop-
down list (select the highest bit depth that the Send Destination will allow).
• Check Different image uses different series UID if each image is to have a different
Series UID. Leaving this unchecked results in each image in the study having the same
Series UID.
• Check Include Series Description UID to include the contents of the Study Description
tag in the Series Description tag. Leaving this unchecked will keep the Series Description
out of the image header when it is sent to PACS.
• Check both Different image uses different series UID and Include Series Description
UID to include the anatomy and projection of the image in the Series Description tag.
• Choose an option for sending the f#.
•Do not send f# – the f# tag is not sent to the destination, and the tag is deleted
from the header.
•Send f# in exposure tag (0018, 1405) – the default behaviour.
•Send f# in custom tag (4321,1005) – moves the f# from the relative exposure tag
and places it in the custom tag.
• Choose an option for cropping the sent images:
•Crop to mask – crops the image to the specified mask. This is the default.
•No cropping – does not crop the image.
•Crop to nearest film size – image size will be calculated and the image will be
cropped to the nearest film size located in the Film Size List. This option is
only enabled if film sizes have been specified in the Film Size Settings dialog
box.
• Check Storage Commitment Enabled if using a PACS with storage commitment
capabilities.
• Add – Description, AE Title, Host Name/IP, and Port of new server. See Figure
8-44.
• Change – Description, AE Title, Host Name/IP, and Port of existing server. From
the drop-down list, select the server and select Change.

Figure 8-44
5. Select OK.
8.12.1.1.3 To Remove a Destination from the Send Destination List

1. From the Send Destination List dialog box, select the Send Destination that you want
to remove.
2. Select Remove.
3. In the Send Manager Confirmation dialog box choose Yes.
8.12.1.1.4 To Test the Connection of the Send Destination

1. From the Send Destination List select the Send Destination that you want to test.
2. Select Test. A Test Connection dialog box appears giving the status of the connection.
3. While the Send Manager is attempting to connect to the destination, you may Cancel.
Once the testing is complete, the status is displayed. See Figure 8-45.

Figure 8-45
8.12.1.1.5 To Change the Status of the Send Destinations

1. In the Send Destination List, check the Active box for the Send Destinations that are to be
available to the technologist. Unchecking the Active box makes the Send Destination
inactive and unavailable to a technologist. See Figure 8-46.
2. Select Apply to save the changes.
8.12.1.1.6 To Choose the Default Send Destination

1. In the Send Destination List, check the Default box of the Send Destination to be the
default. More than one destination can be set as the default, allowing the user to send to
multiple destinations. See Figure 8-46.
2. Select Apply to save the changes.
8.12.1.1.7 Changing the Order of Sending to Multiple Destinations

When multiple destinations are selected as default Send Destinations, they are placed in order
as they appear on the list of destinations. This is the order that selected studies are sent to the
destinations.

To change the order that selected studies are sent to the send destinations
1. Select and hold the order button next to the Send Destination you want to move.
2. Drag in the direction you want to move the Destination in the list. As you drag, the
order button changes colour and appears recessed. A heavy grey line indicates where
the Send Destination will be moved in the Send Destination List.
3. When the Send Destination is moved to the desired location, release the mouse button.
The Send Destination is repositioned in the list and the default destinations are
renumbered.
8.12.1.1.8 Enabling IDC JPEG, IDC TIFF and IDC DICOMDIR Send Destinations
Magellan 3 can save studies as JPEG, TIFF and DICOMDIR by sending them to the
IDC_SCP. When Magellan 3 is installed, three Send Destinations (IDC DICOMDIR, IDC
JPEG and IDC TIFF) are automatically set up by the installer; however, these destinations
need to be enabled to be available to the user. To enable these destinations
1. In the Send Destination List select the Active boxes beside the IDC DICOMDIR, IDC
JPEG and IDC TIFF destinations to make them active.
Figure 8-46
2. Select Apply.
8.12.1.2 Configuring Film Size

Film size can be configured in the Send Manager so images sent to the remote destinations
are cropped to the nearest film size. Film sizes can be added or removed. Predefined film

sizes are 8x10, 11x14, and 14x17.
To Add a Film Size

1. From Send Settings, select Film Size.
2. In the Film Size Settings (see Figure 8-47) dialog box do the following.
Figure 8-47
• Enter a Film Size Name to identify the film size.

• Check either Imperial or Metric for the measurement units.
• Enter the Height and Width of the film to which to crop the images.
3. Select Add.
To Remove a Film Size

1. In the Film Size Setting dialog box select the Film Size name to highlight it.
2. Select Remove.
8.12.1.3 Configuring Sending Preferences

Network problems can sometimes prevent studies from being sent successfully to a Send
Destination by Magellan 3 or the Study Manager. In such cases, studies can be queued in the
Send Manager and automatically sent again in a specified time period.
8.12.1.3.1 To Configure the Sending Preferences

1. From Send Settings, select Sending Preferences.
2. In the Sending Preferences dialog box Check Automatically retry sending to
automatically retry sending queued images. See Figure 8-48.

Figure 8-48
3. Enter a time interval to resend studies in the Auto resend after text field and specify
Minutes, Hours, or Days in the drop-down list.
4. Storage Commitment is used when performing long term storage or archiving on a
different computer such as a PACS. If the PACS has Storage Commitment capabilities,
enter the following information into the Storage Commitment Manager Details frame.
For more information on Storage Commitment, see 8.2 “Storage Commitment Theory”
on page 8-4.
• Check Send storage commitment requests to enable Storage Commitment
requests to be sent to Send Destinations that have a configured Storage
Commitment server.
NOTE: If enabling Storage Commitment, the Storage Commitment must be configured

for each send destination from both the workstation and the storage computer
location. See 8.12.1.1.2 “To Add or Change a Send Destination” to configure the
send destination from the workstation.
• Enter the AE Title of the Storage Commitment SCU.

• Enter the Port of the Storage Commitment SCU.
• Enter the Immediate Timeout – time in seconds in which the association will
remain open for immediate response
• Enter the Delayed Timeout – time in hours in which a new association can be
made for delayed response. This time interval should be at least as long as
the greater of: the interval between archives on the Send Destination and
the minimum age of studies to be archived on the Send Destination.
• Enter the Maximum Attempts – number of delayed timeouts, failure
responses, and resent requests before the image will be resent.

5. Select OK.

Magellan 3 Service • The Print Queue • 8 - 57
8.13 The Print Queue

The Print Queue operates as an intermediary between the Magellan 3 Workstation and any
number of DICOM printers.
The Print Queue can accept studies or images from the Magellan 3 AI and the Study
Manager.
The Print Queue Service runs in the background and ensures studies or individual images
are sent to remote printers as requested by the Magellan 3 AI or the Study Manager. If
studies cannot be sent immediately, the Print Queue automatically queues the studies so
they can be sent later.
There is no typical setup for printers because the support and usage of a printer’s
characteristics depends on the printer model and version. The appearance of the printed
output will depend on the printer’s characteristics and will vary depending upon your
preferences.
DICOM printers generally correspond to a print server, not an actual printer. A print
server is a computer that acts as a common server to which a variety of printers are
connected. Therefore the parameters specified here must be tailored to the printer and the
print server.
NOTE: It is useful to have the DICOM Conformance Statement for the printer you are
adding.
8.13.1 Print Settings
Configuring a DICOM printer requires the following information:

• DICOM AE (Application Entity) title of the printer
• Printer TCP/IP address ("IP address") or hostname
• Printer TCP/IP port
• Printer supports monochrome printing
• Printer film size and type
• Printer film destination
To open Print Settings, select the Print Settings from the Configuration Manager. See
Figure 8-49.

8 - 58 • Magellan 3 Service • The Print Queue
Figure 8-49
8.13.2 To Configure Printer Settings
From the Configuration Manager select Printer Settings to open the Printer List dialog box.
You can add, remove or copy a printer, change a printer’s settings, and select default and
active printers. See Figure 8-49 above.

8.13.2.1 To Change the AE Title for Magellan 3

1. From the Printer List dialog box, select Change beside the AE Title. See Figure 8-50.
The text field can now be edited and the Change button is replaced with a Save button.
Figure 8-50
2. Enter the appropriate information in the AE Title text box.

3. Select Save.
8.13.2.2 Choosing Active and Default Printers

1. Open the Printer List dialog box (see Figure 8-50) and do the following:
• Check the Active box for the printers that are to be available to the technologist.
Unchecking the Active box makes the Printer inactive and unavailable to a technolo-
gist.
• Check the Default box of the printer you want as the default. Only one printer can be
set as the default.
2. Select Apply and OK.
8.13.2.3 Adding or Changing a Printer

When you add a new printer or change a printer’s settings you can configure the Printer,
the Settings, and the Film Layout Settings for the printer. For information on the general
settings and film layout settings see 8.13.2.3.1 “To Configure a Printer’s Settings” on
page 8.61 and 8.13.2.4 “Film Layout Settings” on page 8.67.

To Add or Change a Printer

1. From the Printer List dialog box select New or Change.
2. In the Printer Settings dialog box (see Figure 8-51) do the following:
Figure 8-51
• Enter or change a Description of the printer. The description is used to identify the printer
to the user (e.g., Kodak-3 Printer).
• Enter or change the value for the AE Title defined on the printer.
A DICOM AE Title is a DICOM specific name used to identify DICOM servers and cli-
ents on a network. The printer you are connecting to has its own identifying AE title.

• Enter or change the Host name/IP address of the destination printer.

• Enter or change the TCP/IP Port value in the Port field.
The TCP/IP port is a number used to specify a particular “network address” for the
printer. Typical values may be 104 or 4000; however, the value depends on the partic-
ular printer.
3. Select Apply to save your settings and select OK.
8.13.2.3.1 To Configure a Printer’s Settings

1. Depending on the item in the Settings box, you can configure the setting by entering
text in the text field or by selecting the arrow to the right of the field to display a drop-
down list of options. For a description of the settings, refer to Table 8-1 below.
2. Select Apply and OK to apply and save the settings.

Table 8-1
Setting Name Description
Print Priority The priority given to the print job (HIGH, MED, or LOW).
Choose between medium types (CLEAR FILM, BLUE FILM, and PAPER) or enter
Medium Type
a medium type in the text box.
PROCESSOR means the exposed film is developed in the film processor.

MAGAZINE specifies that exposed film should be stored in a film magazine.
Film Destination BIN_i (1-30) specifies sorter bins on the printer that has a sorter where “i” is the bin
number, ranging from 1-30. If the printer does not have a sorter, the default
PROCESSOR will be used. A specific ID for the printer can be entered.
Film Session Label A readable label that identifies the film session.
The interpolation type by which the printer magnifies the image in order to fit the
Magnification Type image into the image box on the film. This is printer specific and should be
obtained from the printer’s DICOM Conformance Statement.
This is printer specific and should be obtained from the printer’s DICOM
Smoothing Type
Conformance Statement.
Border Density specifies whether the area around and between images is WHITE
Border Density
or BLACK.
This specifies whether the image box that does not contain an image is WHITE or
Empty Image Density BLACK. If printing five images in a six-up layout, there will be one empty image
box.
This specifies the degree of brightness of light shades in the image. The lower will
produce brighter whites. If set to 0, this density information will not be sent with
Minimum Density
images, and the printer will use its default density. These values express the
brightness in hundredths (e.g., 40 is 0.40 OD).
This specifies the degree of darkness of dark shades in the image. A higher
number will produce darker blacks. If set to 0, this density information will not be
Maximum Density
sent with images, and the printer will use its default density. These values express
the darkness in hundredths (e.g., 300 is 3.00 OD).
Trim specifies whether a trim box is printed surrounding each image on the page.
Trim
YES will print a trim box around each image. NO will not print a trim box.
Configuration Information A printer specific configuration instruction.
Choose between REVERSE and NORMAL. Reverse prints with the black part of
Polarity
images reversed to white and white reversed to black.
Photometric Interpretation Choose between MONOCHROME1 and MONOCHROME2. This is printer specific.
The bit depth that the printer will accept. If the printer will handle a bit depth of 12,
Print Bit Depth
leave it at 12. If not, choose a bit depth the printer will handle.

Always prints the image at true size.
True Size Print Shrink to fit will shrink the image, if necessary, to fit the image box.
Printer default size will shrink or enlarge the image, depending on the printer.
If this option is set to Yes, a Settings button appears. Selecting the Settings
button displays the DICOM Annotations dialog box. To use this feature, the printer
Use DICOM Annotation Box must support BASIC ANNOTATION BOX SOP class. For more information about
annotation settings see 8.13.2.3.2 “Configuring DICOM Annotation Box
Settings” .
If this option is set to Yes, a Settings button appears. Selecting the Settings
Print Information on button displays the Print Information on Images dialog box.
Images For more information about Print Information settings see 8.13.2.3.3
“Configuring the Print Information” on page 8.65
Burn in Scale Markers Selecting Yes will display a measurement scale on the edges of the printed image.
Pad Image to Fill Image Box Guarantees the image will fill the image box when printing True Size.
8.13.2.3.2 Configuring DICOM Annotation Box Settings

The Use DICOM Annotation Box settings specifies whether annotations can be printed
on the film. When Yes is selected in the Use DICOM Annotation Box drop-down list, a
Settings button appears. Selecting this button opens the DICOM Annotations dialog
box. See Figure 8-52.
In the DICOM Annotation dialog box, the Annotation Display Format ID is displayed.
This is defined by the DICOM printer and implies a specific layout of the available
annotation boxes of a film.

Figure 8-52
To Configure Print Annotations on Images do the following:

• Enter or change the Annotation Display Format ID.
• In the Box # drop-down list, select the box number to which you want to add an annota-
tion. The number of boxes available and the location of these boxes is determined by the
individual printer.
Any text can be printed in the annotation. The % symbol is used to substitute information
as described below:
•%P – Print Date (Today)
•%N – Patient Name (Full Name)
•%B – Patient Date of Birth
•%G – Patient Sex (M, F, or O)
•%I – Patient ID
•%D – Study Date
•%T – Study Time (HH:MM)
•%A – Accession number

•%% – “%” Character

•%U – User Tag (% U(gggg,eeee))
• In the Format field, enter any text or code (e.g., %G) from the Input Legend that you
want to appear in the box. Entering %N will display the patient’s name in the annota-
tion box. If you want “Sex: M” to appear on the image, enter “Sex: %G” in the text
field. The Output Example displays how the code will appear on the image.
3. Select OK.
8.13.2.3.3 Configuring the Print Information

The Print Information on Images allows you to specify whether text can be burned on an
image.
In the Printer Settings list, when Yes is selected in the Print Information on Images
drop-down list, a Settings button appears to the right. Selecting this button opens the
Print Information on Images dialog box. See Figure 8-53.
In the Print Information on Images dialog box you can burn in multiple lines of text in
each of the six locations on an image. Locations can be Top Left, Top Center, Top
Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Center, or Bottom Right.

Figure 8-53
The Font Size for the Print Information can be specified by selecting the font in the drop-
down list.
Any text can be specified to be printed. The % symbol is used to substitute information as
described below:
• %P – Print Date (Today)
• %N – Patient Name (Last, First Middle)
• %B – Patient Date of Birth

• %G – Patient Sex (M, F, or O)

• %I – Patient ID
• %D – Study Date (M/D/YYYY)
• %T – Study Time (HH:MM)
• %A – Accession number
• %% – “%” Character
• %C – Image Comment (0020,4000)
• %U – User Tag (%U(gggg,eeee))
• %Y – Anatomy
• %J – Projection
• %E – POD Mode
• %F – f#
• %K – kV
• %M – mA
• %X – mAs
• %S – ms
• %O – DAP (Unit mGy.cm2)
• %L – Level
• %W – Window
8.13.2.3.4 To Configure Print Information on Images

1. From the drop-down list, select a Location for the information to appear.
2. In the All annotations field, enter the text (eg.%N) from the Input Legend of what
you want to appear in the specified location.
3. To add more Print Information in the same location, press Enter and repeat Step 2.
Select OK.
8.13.2.4 Film Layout Settings

Film settings must be set for each specific printer. Consult the printer’s DICOM
Conformance Statement for more information.
8.13.2.4.1 To Configure Available Film Sizes

1. From the Printer Settings dialog box select Film Layout Settings.
2. In the Film Selection dialog box (see Figure 8-54) check all the Film Sizes you want
available for the printer and select a default Film Size.

Figure 8-54
3. Select OK to save the settings or select a film and select the Image Box Settings button to
set the Image Box Size settings for the selected film.
8.13.2.4.2 To Set the Image Formats

1. Select the Film Size that you want to format.
2. Select Image Box Settings to open the Image Box Size Settings dialog box. See Figure 8-
55.
NOTE: If the film size selected is square (e.g., 14INx14IN) only one Image Box Size Setting
Grid is displayed. If the film size is rectangular, two grids are displayed, one for
portrait and one for landscape.

Figure 8-55
3. If necessary, specify the Image Box Size Settings for Portrait and Landscape film
orientations by selecting the Image Box Layouts that you want to be available for that
film size and orientation. For example, 1-up indicates that one image will be printed on
the print medium and 8-up indicates that eight images will be printed on the print
medium in a 2x4 format.
4. For each layout available, enter a measurement for the Width and Height of the image
(in millimeters).
5. Select Apply to apply the settings. Repeat for other Image Box Layouts. Select OK to
exit.
8.13.3 To Remove a Printer from the Printer List
1. From the Configuration Manager select Printer Settings.

2. In the Printer List (see Figure 8-56) select the printer that you want to remove from
the list.

Figure 8-56
3. Select Remove.
4. The Print Manager Confirmation dialog box appears. See Figure 8-57. Select Yes to
remove the printer.
Figure 8-57
8.13.3.1 To Copy the Settings of a Printer

The settings of a printer can be copied to a new printer.
1. From the Configuration Manager, select Printer Settings.
2. From the Printer Description list, select the printer whose settings you want to copy. See
Figure 8-58.

Figure 8-58
3. Select Copy. A new printer is added to the list and is displayed as a copy of the selected
printer.
4. To rename the copied printer, double-click on the printer in the list or select the printer
in the list and select the Change button. This displays the Printer Settings dialog box,
allowing you to rename the printer or edit the printer’s settings.
8.13.3.2 To Test the Printer’s Connection

1. From the Configuration Manager, select Printer Settings.
2. In the Printer List dialog box, select the printer you want to test.
3. Select Test to open the Test Connection dialog box, giving the status of the
connection. See Figure 8-59.

Figure 8-59
4. While the Print Manager is attempting to connect to the printer, you may Cancel. Once the
testing is complete, the status is displayed.

Magellan 3 Service • Study/Image Settings • 8 - 73
8.14 Study/Image Settings

In Study/Image Settings, you can configure Xporter FTP.
To Open the Study/Image Settings

Select Study/Image Settings from the Configuration Manager dialog box to open the
Study/Image Settings dialog box. See Figure 1.
Figure 8-60
8.14.1 To Configure Xporter FTP
1. From the Configuration Manager, select the Study/Image Settings.

2. Select Configure Xporter FTP to open the FTP Options dialog box. See Figure 8-61.
Figure 8-61

8 - 74 • Magellan 3 Service • Study/Image Settings
3. In the Address field enter the FTP address to which you want to connect.
4. In the Port field enter the Port number on which the FTP server is listening.
5. Enter a User Name.
6. Enter a Password.
7. If you use a proxy server to connect to the Internet, check the checkbox next to Use Proxy.
Enter an Address for the proxy server. Enter the Port number on which the proxy server is
listening.
8. Test the connection by selecting Test Connection.
9. Select OK to save the options or select Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving.

Magellan 3 Service • Grid Detection • 8 - 75
8.15 Grid Detection

Specific grids are required for certain exams. In order to ensure the proper grid is in place,
Magellan 3 can detect the following possibilities:
• No Grid.
• Grid focused for 180 cm (72 in).
• Grid focused for QA Phantom.
• Grid in Backwards.
Magellan 3 will check the examination ordered and compare its grid requirement with
what it has detected. If a match is not found, the operator will be prompted to make the
change.
NOTE: An exposure is still possible if the operator chooses to ignore the prompt.
The grid detect board reads the presence of magnets attached to the grid. The values
sensed by the grid detect board are sent as an analog signal to the TECC connnected to
Channel 1 (J7). The TECCM converts this value using a look-up table located in the file
xray_grids.ini. This file should not be modified. The Magellan 3 AI queries the TECCM
for the current grid.
The values that come in on Channel 1 to the TECCM are matched against a look up table
which is located in C:\Magellan2\Conf\TECCM.ini. The information converted in the
TECCM is typically within the provided values:
• No Grid: 961-1023
• 180 cm (72 in): 705 -768
• 140 cm (55 in): 449 -512
• 120 cm (48 in): 321 - 384
• 100 cm (40 in): 193 - 256
• QA Phantom 577 - 640
• Grid Backwards: 832-996
If the values provided by the TECCM are outside the listed values by a small range, it is
possible to adjust the previous values so that everything coincides.
CAUTION! Be careful not to overlap value ranges!

8 - 76 • Magellan 3 Service • Grid Detection
8.15.1 To Enable Grid Detect
1. From the Configuration Manager, select Acquisition Interface.

2. From the Acquisition Configuration dialog box select Institution Settings to open the
Institution Settings dialog box. See Figure 8-62.
Figure 8-62
3. Check enable Grid Detect.

Magellan 3 Service • The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr) • 8 - 77
8.16 The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr)

An image is reprocessed using a Visual Parameter Editor. The Visual Parameter Editor
can be accessed through the Reprocess Image button. Using the editor, you can edit the
image processing parameters of a single image, save changes as the defaults for that
image, or save the changes as default parameters for multiple images.
8.16.1 To Open the Visual Parameter Editor
NOTE: Sent images cannot be reprocessed or modified. Copied images may by

reprocessed and modified.
1. From Performed Studies, open a study.

2. Select the image to edit.
3. Select the Reprocess Image button. See Figure 8-63 and Figure 8-65.
Figure 8-63
4. Reprocessing will remove any existing shutter, crop, markers, points, and text
annotations. A dialog box will prompt for you to confirm the task. See Figure 8-64 and
Figure 8-65.
Figure 8-64

8 - 78 • Magellan 3 Service • The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr)
Figure 8-65
8.16.1.1 To Edit the Parameters in the Visual Parameter Editor

1. From the Visual Parameter Editor, select one of the options from the Contrast Control
drop-down list (Figure 8-66):
Figure 8-66
• Select ICE LUT to create the default LUT for an image with that anatomy/projection/
level/size. Modifying the brightness, contrast, and straightness will create a default ICE
LUT that is used when an exposure is first created.
• Selecting Window Level (W/L) from the drop-down list will display the image with a
window level based on the current brightness and contrast parameters.

2. The Contrast Parameters can be modified by using the buttons on the left side of the
editor. See Table 9 for explanations of each contrast parameter.
Table 9
Contrast Parameters Description
Brightness Determines the brightness of an image. Minus one indicates a

dark image, whereas Plus one indicates a bright image.
Contrast Determines the contrast of an image. The higher the number

the lower the contrast.
Straightness Ten indicates a straight LUT. Zero indicates a curved LUT.
To modify the Contrast Parameters, do one of the following:

• Select the parameter to modify. The selected parameter is indicated by a larger font on
the button. To increase or decrease the values, click on the up or down arrows. See
Figure 8-67 below. The changed values will appear on the contrast button, and the
change can be viewed in the After preview image.
• Click on the slider above the parameter value to open the contrast parameter slider.
See Figure 8-67 and Figure 8-68. Increase or decrease the values by clicking and drag-
ging the slider to the required parameter value, or enter the value in the Value field.
Figure 8-67
slider
active parameter
value
Figure 8-68

3. Select the Enhancement Version as Standard or PureView depending on what has been
configured with your system. See Figure 8-69.
Figure 8-69
4. The following enhancement parameters will be given depending on what enhancement

version has been configured with your system:
• Standard – The Enhancement Parameters can be modified by using the buttons on the left
side of the editor. See Table 10 for explanations of each enhancement parameter. To
increase the Parameter value, click the up arrow on the button.
To modify the Enhancement Parameters do one of the following:
• Select the parameter to modify. The selected parameter is indicated by a larger
font on the button. To increase or decrease the values, click on the up or down
arrows. See Figure 8-70 below. The changed values will appear on the button,
and the change can be viewed in the After preview image.
•Click on the slider above the parameter value to open the contrast parameter
slider. See Figure 8-70 and Figure 8-71. Increase or decrease the values by
clicking and dragging the slider to the required parameter value, or enter the
value in the Value field.
Table 10
Enhancement Parameter Description
Sharpening Amount Amount of sharpening applied to an image. 0 indicates no

sharpening is applied to the image, whereas 10 indicates that the
maximum amount of sharpening is applied to the image.
Sharpening Kernel Determines the size of sharpening kernel. Zero enhances small
details, whereas 10 enhances large details.
Equalization Strength Determines the dynamic range compression. Zero indicates there is
no compression, whereas 100 indicates a high level of compression.
Equalization Kernel Determines the area of the kernel. Zero indicates a small kernel
area, whereas 1000 indicates a large kernel area.
Equalization Iterations Reduces the black border, caused by equalization, from around the
anatomy.
Noise Reduction Reduces the amount of background noise and sharpness in the
image. Zero indicates low noise reduction and 10 indicates high
noise reduction.

Figure 8-70
active parameter
value
slider
Figure 8-71
• PureView – The enhancement parameters can be modified by selecting from the anat-
omy and projection drop-down lists. See Figure 8-72. The selections made from the
drop-down list can be previewed on the After preview field. If your system does not
have PureView, a prompt will inform you a valid license is necessary to use PureView
image enhancements.

Figure 8-72
5. Once the changes made to the image are complete, select one of the following:
• Save to Current – will save the modified parameters of the reprocessed image as the
default for all images with the same anatomy/projection/level/size.
• Save to Multiple – will save the modified parameters as defaults for multiple projections.
After selecting Save to Multiple a Save to dialog will prompt you to select the Anatomy,
Projection, and Level to save the parameters to. This will save the modified parameters as
the defaults for all selected images. If more than one Anatomy, Projection, and Level are
being selected, hold the ctrl key while clicking on the various selections. See Figure 8-73.

Figure 8-73
• Save Image Only – will save only the modified image. Selecting this option will not
change the default parameters.
• Reset – will reset the parameters to their original settings.
• Cancel – will cancel or close the reprocessed image.

8 - 84 • Magellan 3 Service • The Parameter Editor
8.17 The Parameter Editor

In the Parameter Editor you can manage anatomies, projections and levels, and edit A/P pairs.
To open the Parameter Editor, select Parameter Editor from the Configuration Manager. See
Figure 8-74.
Figure 8-74

Magellan 3 Service • The Parameter Editor • 8 - 85
8.17.1 Managing the Anatomies
From the Parameter Editor select Manage Anatomies (see Figure 8-75) to open the
Anatomy Manager dialog box. See Figure 8-76.
NOTE: Locked items in the Anatomy list are configured by IDC and are uneditable.
Figure 8-75
Figure 8-76

8.17.1.1 To Add a New Anatomy

1. Select Add New to activate the Anatomy Details fields. See Figure 8-77.
Figure 8-77
2. Enter the Anatomy Name and the DICOM Code. This is a DICOM value code obtained
from the DICOM specifications.
3. Select Save to add the anatomy to the Anatomy list and the database. Saving the anatomy
allows you to add another anatomy.
8.17.1.2 Modifying an Anatomy

Because an anatomy may be associated with a study, an anatomy cannot be permanently

removed from the Existing Anatomies list. A selected anatomy can be modified by
changing the Anatomy Details, changing the laterality option of the selected anatomy, or
can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing Anatomies list.
Anatomies with laterality are indicated with a mark in the Has Laterality checkbox. If
there is no mark in the checkbox, then the anatomy is treated as unpaired. See Figure 8-78.
Figure 8-78
Inactive anatomies are displayed in red and marked as inactive. A mark in the Inactive
checkbox indicates the anatomy is unavailable. Before using an inactive anatomy to create
a pair or set parameter values for pairs, the anatomy must be reactivated.
To display the inactive anatomies, select Show Inactive Anatomies.
8.17.1.2.1 To Modify the Laterality of an Anatomy

1. Open the Parameter Editor by selecting Parameter Editor in the Configuration
Manager.
2. From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Anatomies.

3. From the Existing Anatomies list, select the anatomy.

• To allow the anatomy to have laterality, select the Has Laterality checkbox.
• To remove the laterality of an anatomy, deselect the Has Laterality checkbox.
5. Select Save. Depending on what change has been done to the laterality, the following will
occur:
• If an anatomy has been changed from laterality to having no laterality, a dialog box will
notify you that the related procedure steps will be automatically updated to have unpaired
laterality. See Figure 8-79.
Figure 8-79
• If an anatomy has been changed from no laterality to having laterality, a dialog box will
notify you that the related procedure steps must be manually updated immediately after
saving. Assign patient laterality be selecting the configuration as right, left or both. See
Figure 8-80 and Figure 8-81.
Figure 8-80

Figure 8-81
• Once completed, select OK.
8.17.1.3 To Modify the Activity or Details of an Anatomy

1. From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Anatomies.
2. From the Existing Anatomies list, select the anatomy.
• To deactivate the anatomy, select the Inactive checkbox.
• To recover an inactive anatomy, deselect the Inactive checkbox.
• To change the Anatomy Details, edit the information as required
4. Select Save to update the selected anatomy's information in the database and to update
the Anatomy list.
8.17.2 Managing the Projections
In the Parameter Editor you can add, edit or deactivate projections.

From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Projections (see Figure 8-82) to open the
Projection Manager dialog box. See Figure 8-83.
NOTE: Locked items in the Projection list are configured by IDC and are uneditable.
Figure 8-82

Figure 8-83

8.17.2.0.1 To Create a New Projection

1. Select Add New to activate the Projection Details fields. See Figure 8-84.
Figure 8-84
2. Enter the Projection Name and the DICOM Code. This is a DICOM value code
obtained from the DICOM specifications.
3. Select Save to add the projection to the Projection list and the database. Saving the
projection allows you to add another projection.
8.17.2.0.2 Modifying a Projection

Because a projection may be associated with a study, a projection cannot be permanently
removed from the Existing Projection list. A selected projection can be modified by

changing the Projection Details or can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the
Existing Projections list. Inactive projections are displayed in red and marked as inactive.
A mark in the Inactive checkbox indicates the projection is unavailable. Before using an
inactive projection to create a pair or set parameter values for pairs, the projection must be
reactivated.
To display the inactive projections, select the Show Inactive Projections.
8.17.2.0.2.1 To Modify a Projection
1. From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Projections.
2. From the Existing Projections list, select the projection.
• To deactivate the projection, select the Inactive checkbox.
• To recover an inactive projection, deselect the Inactive checkbox.
• To change the Projection Details, edit the information as required
4. Select Save to update the selected Projection’s information in the database and to update
the Projection list.
8.17.3 About Anatomy/Projection Pairs
When a study is started in the Magellan 3 AI, the Scheduled Procedure Step is received from
the Worklist Manager. The Procedure maps to an ordered set of Anatomy/Projection pairs.
These pairs have corresponding sets of parameters that determine how the image is acquired
and processed.
For example, if the procedure is Routine Chest, the procedure likely requires two images:
Chest, Postero-anterior and Chest, Left Lateral.
NOTE: Locked Levels in the Anatomy/Projection Pairs list are configured by IDC and are
uneditable.
8.17.3.1 To Create or Remove a Anatomy/Projection Pair

1. In the Parameter Editor, select the Anatomy in the Anatomy/Projection tree for which
you want to add or remove a projection.
2. Select Edit A/P Pair.
3. In the Pair Selection dialog box all projections currently paired with the named anatomy
are checked. See Figure 8-85.

Figure 8-85
4. Check or uncheck the Projection Name to create or remove an anatomy/projection

pair.
5. Select Close.
NOTE: The anatomy and projection must be active before creating a new pair. For more
information about deactivating or reactivating projections and anatomies, see
Section 8.17.1.2, “Modifying an Anatomy” and Section 8.17.2.0.2, “Modifying a
Projection”.

8.17.3.2 To Add a New Level to an Anatomy/Projection Pair

1. Open the Parameter Editor.
2. Expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree and select the anatomy and projection to
which to add the level. See Figure 8-86.
Figure 8-86
3. Select Manage Levels (see Figure 8-87).

Figure 8-87
4. In the Level Manager dialog box (see Figure 8-88) a new level can be added or an
existing level can be edited. Do one of the following:
• To add a level, select Add New and enter the Level Name. Select Save. The parame-
ters assigned to the Anatomy/Projection/Level combination are the default settings.
• To edit an existing level, select the name in the Existing Levels list and edit the Level
Name.
Figure 8-88
5. Select Close.

8.17.3.3 To Copy Parameter Values from Other Anatomy/Projection Pairs

1. Open the Parameter Editor.
2. Expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree and select the anatomy, projection, and level
you want to obtain the parameter values for. When the level is selected, the Parameter
Details for that anatomy/projection/level combination are displayed.
3. Select the Copy From button (see Figure 8-89).
Figure 8-89
4. In the Copy From dialog box (see Figure 8-90) expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs
tree to display and select the anatomy, projection, and level you want to copy the parameter
values from. When the level is selected, the Parameter Details for that anatomy/
projection/level combination are displayed.

Figure 8-90
5. All the parameter values or selected parameter values can be copied. Do one of the
following:
• To copy all the parameter values select Copy All.
• To copy a specific parameter, select the parameter from the list, highlighting it. Multi-
ple items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl button on the keyboard. Select
Copy Selected. The selected parameters from this combination are copied into the
previously selected combination.

8.17.3.4 To Modify Parameter Details for Existing Anatomy/Projection Pairs

1. Open the Parameter Editor. See Figure 8-91.
Figure 8-91
2. Expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree and select the anatomy, projection, and level to
modify. When the level is selected, the Parameter Details for that anatomy/projection/
level combination are displayed. The parameter values displayed are either the default
values for the pair or pre-defined values for the pair at the given parameter level.

3. Modify the processing parameters by selecting the item on the grid and selecting the
button that is displayed. See Table 8-1 for explanations of each processing parameter.
Table 8-1
Arcoma Position Parameters
AutoPosition Allows you to select pre-set positions if the facility has an Arcoma Ceiling Mount
Tube installed. The default is None. To names of the preset positions can be
changed in the Arcoma CMT Configuration dialog box which is accessed by
clicking on the Arcoma icon located in the task bar. See 8.20.2 “To Configure
AutoPosition” .
Contrast
Brightness Determines the brightness of an image. Minus one indicates a dark image,
whereas Plus one indicates a bright image.
Contrast Determines the contrast of an image. The higher the number the lower the
contrast.
Straightness Ten indicates a straight LUT. Zero indicates a curved LUT.
Device Options
Film Speed The film speed normally used with this particular anatomy/projection pair.
Orientation Assists in the automatic selection of Flat Field for stands that can place the
Detector Head in different orientations. Choose between Vertical, Horizontal and
N/A (default). Choose the normal SID and orientation for the anatomy and
projection. Based on the Flat Field images selected in the Detector Calibration
dialog box, Magellan will automatically select the best SID and orientation
combination. Magellan will give SID priority over orientation. E.g., For a 100 cm
upright exposure, the 100 cm vertical Flat Field will be used. Even though this
exposure is upright, a 180 cm vertical Flat Field will not be selected because this
would not give priority to SID.
Grid Determines if the grid is needed.
POD Mode Indicates the Pixel Optimized Dose Mode for this anatomy and projection. The
options are High Efficiency and High Resolution.
SID (cm) Indicates the Source to Image Distance.
Enhancements
Sharpening Amount Amount of sharpening applied to an image. 0 indicates no sharpening is applied

to the image, whereas 10 indicates that the maximum amount of sharpening is
applied to the image.
Sharpening Kernel Determines the size of sharpening kernel. Zero enhances small details, whereas
10 enhances large details.

Table 8-1
Equalization Strength Determines the dynamic range compression. Zero indicates there is no
compression, whereas 100 indicates a high level of compression.
Equalization Kernel Determines the area of the kernel. Zero indicates a small kernel area, whereas
1000 indicates a large kernel area.
Equalization Iterations Reduces the black border, caused by equalization, from around the anatomy.
Noise Reduction Reduces the amount of background noise and sharpness in the image. Zero
indicates low noise reduction and 10 indicates high noise reduction.
Despeckle Turning despeckle ON for large anatomies may decrease high contrast detail
and turning it OFF for small anatomies may increase high contrast detail.
Exposure Settings
Exposure Technique Select from AEC, mA/ms, mAs
kV Choose between 40 and 150
mA Choose between 0 and 1000
ms Choose between 10 and 6300
mAs Choose between 3.2 and 1000
Focal Spot Choose between Small and Large
AEC Field Left Choose between Off and On
AEC Field Center Choose between Off and On
AEC Field Right Choose between Off and On
AEC Density Choose between -4 and 4
AEC Sensitivity Choose between slow, medium, and fast
Generator Workstation This setting allows you to match anatomy and projections with Detector Heads
or workstations. Choose from 1 to 6 Detectors.
Hanging Protocol
Mirror Image Flips the image across a vertical axis. Yes indicates that the image will be
mirrored. No indicates that the image will not be mirrored.
Rotate Determines auto-rotate increments. Zero indicates no rotation, -90 rotates image
90º counterclockwise, 90 rotates image 90º clockwise, and 180 rotates the
image 180º.
Shutter The shape of the auto shutter when an image is displayed. The options are
None, Rectangular, and Polygonal.

Table 8-1
Shuttering
Right Edge, Top Edge, Left Determines the sensitivity of auto-shuttering on the specified edge. It measures
Edge, and Bottom Edge the sensitivity of the shutter such that 0 is not sensitive and 10 is very sensitive.
1600 Plus Positioning
Preset Position Choose a Preset position for the 1600 Plus from the drop down list.The default is
None.
Collimator X Position (mm) Set the collimator position for the X axis in mm.
Collimator Y Position (mm) Set the collimator position for the Y axis in mm.
4. Select Close to save the parameters.

8 - 102 • Magellan 3 Service • Managing the Procedures
8.18 Managing the Procedures

Managing Procedures allows you to activate or deactivate a procedure, import procedures
from a worklist, and add, remove, and duplicate steps from a procedure.
To Manage the Procedures

Select Manage Procedures from the Configuration Manager to open the Manage Procedures
dialog box.
8.18.0.1 To Add an Anatomy/Projection Step to an Existing Procedure

1. Select Manage Procedures from the Configuration Manager to open the Manage
Procedures dialog box.
2. From the Manage Procedures dialog box select a procedure from the Procedures list. See
Figure 8-92.
Figure 8-92
3. Select Add Step to open the Add Step dialog box. See Figure 8-93.

Magellan 3 Service • Managing the Procedures • 8 - 103
Figure 8-93
4. Expand the tree and select an anatomy, laterality, projection and level. To select
multiple projections and levels, hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while making
your selections.
5. Select OK to add the anatomy, projection and level to the Steps list.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all required steps are added.
7. Select OK.
8.18.0.2 Activating or Deactivating Procedures

Because a procedure has studies associated with it, it cannot be removed from the
Procedures list. Procedures can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the
Procedures list. Inactive procedures are displayed in red.

8.18.0.3 To Activate or Deactivate a Procedure

1. From the Parameter Manager select Manage Procedures.
NOTE: To display the inactive procedures select the Show Inactive Procedures checkbox.
2. In the Manage Procedures dialog box select the Procedure in the Procedure Name list and
do one of the following:
• Select the Inactive Procedure checkbox to deactivate the procedure.
• Deselect the Inactive Procedure checkbox to activate the procedure. See Figure 8-94.
Figure 8-94
8.18.0.4 To Delete Procedures and Import Procedures from a Worklist

In preparation for importing procedures from a database, all the existing procedures can be
deleted from the Procedures list by selecting Delete All Procedures.
To import procedures from the hospital’s worklist

1. If necessary, select Delete All Procedures to delete the existing procedures.
2. Select Import From Worklist. Procedures from the worklist will be automatically
imported into the Procedures list. The anatomy and projection steps have to be added for
each of the procedures imported.

8.18.0.5 To Remove or Duplicate an Anatomy/Procedure Step

1. From the Manage Procedures dialog box select the procedure.
2. Select the Anatomy/Projection step. This activates the Remove Step and Duplicate
Step buttons. See Figure 8-95.
Figure 8-95

• To remove an Anatomy/Projection step, select Remove Step.
• To duplicate an Anatomy/Projection step, select Duplicate Step.
8.18.0.6 To Change the Order of Procedure Steps

1. In the Manage Procedures dialog box, select the procedure of the steps you want to
move.
2. Select the Anatomy/Projection step you wish to move.
3. Selecting the Up and Down arrows to move the step up or down in the list.
See Figure 8-96

Figure 8-96

8.18.0.7 To Create a New Procedure

1. In the Manage Procedures dialog box select New to activate the Procedure Name
field. See Figure 8-97.
Figure 8-97
2. Enter the new Procedure Name.

3. Select New to add the Procedure to the Manage Procedures list or select Add Step to
add steps to the new procedure. For more information see Section 8.18.0.1, “To Add an
Anatomy/Projection Step to an Existing Procedure”.

8 - 108 • Magellan 3 Service • Import Data
8.19 Import Data

1. From the Configuration Manager, select Import Data. See Figure 8-98.
Figure 8-98
2. Select Import From to open the Import Data dialog box.

3. Navigate to the file you want to import.
4. Select Open to display the file in the Location field.
5. Select the items to be imported. Selecting Users allows you to import users, selecting
Anatomies/Projections/Values allows you to import anatomies, projections, levels and
parameter values, and selecting Procedures allows you to import procedures.
6. Select Import.

Magellan 3 Service • Configuring the Arcoma CMT • 8 - 109
8.20 Configuring the Arcoma CMT
NOTE: You will only need to configure the Arcoma CMT if the facility has an Arcoma
CMT installed.
To configure the Arcoma CMT settings, select Arcoma CMT Settings from the
Configuration Manager. See Figure 8-99.
Figure 8-99
Once logged on, the Arcoma CMT Control dialog box is displayed. From here you can set
the COM Port connection, Configure AutoPositioning and test the connection to the CMT.
8.20.1 To Set the COM Port Connection
1. From the COM Port drop-down list, select the COM port that you want to connect to.
2. Select OK. The CMT is automatically connected to the COM port selected.
8.20.2 To Configure AutoPosition
Configure AutoPosition allows preset positions to be given a more meaningful and user-
friendly name. To do this
1. Select the Configure AutoPosition button to open the Arcoma CMT AutoPosition
Configuration dialog box.

8 - 110 • Magellan 3 Service • Configuring the Arcoma CMT
Figure 8-100
2. Move the CMT into the preset position you want to rename.
3. Enter the Position Name into the text field beside the Position #.
4. Select OK. The Position number will now be displayed with the new Position Name.
8.20.3 To Test the AutoPosition #
1. Select the AutoPosition # from the Test AutoPosition # drop-down list.

2. Select Send. The selected AutoPosition is displayed in the Send dialog box and the name is
displayed on the CMT.

DETECTOR TROUBLESHOOTING

9.1 “Error Codes”
9.2 “Failed Focus Troubleshooting”

9 - 2 • Detector Troubleshooting •
1.0 June 1, 2007 Module updates.

Detector Troubleshooting • Error Codes • 9-3
9.1 Error Codes

Move the mouse cursor over the Detector Manager icon to display a tooltip indicating
Detector Head error codes.
Table 1
Message Action
Error 2: The Thermo-Electrical Ensure the fan openings on the detector

Cooler Control Voltage has gone are not blocked and that the room
over range. temperature is below +35°C. If this error
persists, please discontinue use and
contact technical support.
Error 3: The Thermo-Electrical Ensure the ambient room temperature is

Cooler Control Voltage has gone above -10°C. If this error persists, please
under range. discontinue use and contact technical
support.
Error 4: The Thermo-Electrical Ensure the fan openings on the detector

Cooler PWM period has gone over are not blocked and that the room
range. temperature is below +35°C. If this error
persists, please discontinue use and
contact technical support.
Error 5: The Thermo-Electrical Ensure the ambient room temperature is

Cooler PWM period has gone above -10°C. If this error persists, please
under range. discontinue use and contact technical
support.
Error 6: The fan on the Thermo- Please discontinue use and contact
Electrical Cooler has failed and has technical support.
shut the cooling off.
Error 7: The fan in the Power Box Please discontinue use and contact
has failed. technical support.
Error 8: One of the Cooling Fans for Replace the fan at the earliest
the Camera has failed. convenience. If this error persists, please
discontinue use and contact technical
support.
Error 9: Both of the Cooling Fans Please discontinue use and contact
for the Camera have failed. technical support immediately.
Error 10: A critical cooling failure Please discontinue use and contact
has occurred. technical support immediately.
Error: A power supply problem has If this error persists, please contact
been detected. technical support.

9 - 4 • Detector Troubleshooting • Failed Focus Troubleshooting
9.2 Failed Focus Troubleshooting

When a Detector Head fails due to poor focus, a number of questions and tests must be
performed to help determine what has gone wrong. This procedure describes many of these
questions/tests and explains why they are necessary.
9.2.1 Resolution Description
Answer the following questions and perform the following test procedure to help IDC Service
Technicians determine why the focus failed.
9.2.2 Materials and Tools
• Delcano software
• High contrast resolution linepair target (preferably more than one)
9.2.3 Work Instructions
9.2.3.1 Typical Test Procedure

The following procedure is a summary of the High-Contrast Resolution section of the
Acceptance Testing Procedure. Ensure that all these steps are being completed correctly when
taking resolution images.
1. Ensure the Detector Head has thermally stabilized. The lens on the Detector Head takes
many hours to stabilize after being exposed to extreme temperatures. We recommend
opening the Detector Head crate but keeping the bag inside sealed for at least half of a day
while acclimatizing to the new room temperature.
2. Open Delcano. If Magellan has been opened, exit the application before opening Delcano.
3. Turn off Geometric Correction by unchecking Apply Geometric Correction.
4. Set the Integration Time to 4000 ms.
5. Remove the Grid. Grids must be removed for focus images.
6. Place the line pair at a 45° angle to the edge of the faceplate. If the corner focus is the
problem, ensure the line pair is orientated radially outwards. Imagine a line from the centre
to the corner and ensure the line pairs are parallel to that line. See Figure 9-1.

Detector Troubleshooting • Failed Focus Troubleshooting • 9-5
Figure 9-1
7. Set the Anatomy to Calibration/High Contrast.

8. Ensure the camera temperature has stabilized to -10°C. It is a good idea to wait at least
10 minutes after the camera has reached -10°C before taking images.
9. Expose the linepairs at a technique of 50 kVp, small focal spot, and enough mAs to
result in the DNs to be more than about 3000 and less than about 13000. For 180 cm
SID, this is generally 40 mAs.
10.Sharpen the image by selecting Enhance. In the Sharpen dialog box, select Box Car
Unsharp, and then move the sliders for Sharpening Strength to 10 and Sharpening
Kernel to 0. It is important to select the method first with the drop down box and then
to set the values with the sliders.
11.View a sharpened image. A linepair is considered resolved if three solid lines can be
seen.
9.2.3.2 Additional Test Procedures

1. Take a resolution image with the Flat Field and Dark Field corrections turned OFF.
The resolution should be less (about 0.2 lp/mm) than the resolution with the Flat Field
and Dark Field corrections turned ON. If there is a significant resolution difference
between Flat Fields and Dark Fields being ON or OFF, then this could point to a

9 - 6 • Detector Troubleshooting • Failed Focus Troubleshooting
problem with the Flat Field corrections. If there is no difference, then continue using the
Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.
2. Take an uncorrected image (no Flat Field/Dark Field, or geometric correction) of free air,
collimated wide open. Save it as "XrayNoCorr" to be uploaded later. Look at the image to
see if anything odd occurred.
3. Take note of the corner focus. If the corner focus is out, move the tube (if applicable) to be
centered on the corner line pair. If you get a good result, the Detector Head is capable of the
correct focus.
4. Turn the TEC off and wait 5 minutes before taking another focus image. The focus should
change dramatically. If it doesn't, then there is something wrong with the cooling of the
camera.
9.2.3.3 Questions
The following questions will help IDC determine why the focus failed. Record all answers/
results in an issue on the IDC tracking site.
1. What is the Detector Head's serial number? Recording the serial number is essential for
determining when the Detector Head was made, what type of camera is involved, etc.
2. Is this a newly installed Detector Head or a replacement? If it is a replacement, why was the
original Detector Head replaced and were there any concerns with the replacement
procedure (e.g., was the gain/offset recalibrated)?
3. Specifically, what has failed? The centre focus, the corners, or all? What is the resolution in
all 5 locations (centre and 4 corners)?
4. What is the room temperature/humidity? Nominal room temperature is between 15°C and
30°C. A highly humid room may cause concerns due to condensation.
5. What is the software version?
6. What stand/table is the Detector Head installed onto? If applicable, does the focus change
between chest and table position?
7. What is the HVL? An abnormally high or low HVL may cause concern. The specification
for the Xplorer is a HVL of between 2.5 mm and 2.9 mm Al at 80 kVp.
8. What is the TEC voltage (TECV)? If the voltage is equal to 0 V or above 8 V, this is a
concern.

TROUBLESHOOTING

10.2 “Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities”
10.3 “Error Codes”
10.4 “Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality”
10.5 “Resetting the EEPROM (U27)”
10.6 “Inverters Factory Configuration”
10.7 “Anticrushing System”
10.8 “Bearings Gap Check Procedure”
10.9 “Trigger Board Replacement Procedure”
10.10 “Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure”
10.11 “Grid Detect Replacement”
10.12 “Replacement of Height Motor Assembly”
10.13 “Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly”
10.14 “Replacement of Height Potentiometer”
10.15 “Replacement of SID Potentiometer”
10.16 “Replacement of Detector Motor”
10.17 “Replacement of Detector Potentiometer”
10.18 “Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display”

10 - 2 • Troubleshooting •
10.19 “Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board”

10.20 “Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus”
10.21 “Replacement of Steel Cable”
10.22 “Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt”
10.23 “Replacement of the X-Ray Tube”
10.24 “Replacement of the Collimator”
10.25 “Replacement of the High Voltage Cables”
10.26 “Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic)”
10.27 “Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation”
10.28 “Replacement of Limit Switches: Height”
10.29 “Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer”
10.30 “Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer”
10.31 “Adjustment of the Inclinometer”
10.32 “Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position”
10.33 “Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed”
10.34 “Software Update in Control PCB”

Troubleshooting • • 10 - 3

10 - 4 • Troubleshooting • Safety Warnings and Notices
10.1.1 Service Personnel Safety
CAUTION! Ensure that the C-arm’s movements will not collide with any people, or with the
ceiling, the floor or with any other equipment.
NOTE: In case of a bump or collision of any type, please position the Arm in Horizontal
position and medium height, then turn OFF the Unit. Wait two minutes and turn the
Unit ON to allow the system to perform a self test that will apply correct values.
WARNING! Do not immediately touch the dissipator. It could be hot and cause servere burns.
WARNING! Do not touch the lamp, the socket or the lamp socket. They could be very hot and
cause severe burns.
CAUTION! Terminal Pins of HV Cables are extremely delicate and are easily damaged.
Handle them carefully. Ensure all pins are all straight and the splits in the pins are
open (parallel to sides).

Troubleshooting • Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities • 10 - 5
10.2 Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities

In case this Unit has to be moved or transported it is necessary to position the Column in
Transport position, that is, with the Safety Locking Rod inserted. Some Receptors, due to
its height, do not allow to position the carriage in the straight position to insert the Safety
Locking Rod. If that is the case, proceed as follows.
1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter in Configuration / Calibration Mode.
2. Simultaneously press “1” and “4” to enable Packing Mode. This mode disables the
Software limits of movements or the Gauge limits. The following message appears on
the display “Caution movement without software restriction, place the equipment and
switch it off.”
CAUTION! Ensure that the Swivel Arm’s movements will not collide with any people, or
with the ceiling, the floor or with any other equipment.
3. If required, position the Unit at a desired height for comfortable dismantling of the
Detector Head and Tube Collimator Assembly.
4. Position the Swivel Arm in the horizontal position and at the correct height in order to
install the Safety Locking Rod.
5. Install the Safety Locking Rod and Turn the System Off.

10 - 6 • Troubleshooting • Error Codes
10.3 Error Codes

Error codes indicate the potential cause of a system failure. They appear on the Control Panel
Display on the Column and will enable the service personnel to identify and fix the problems.
NOTE: In case of a bump or collision of any type, please position the Arm in Horizontal
position and medium height, then turn OFF the Unit. Wait two minutes and turn the
Unit ON to allow the system to perform a self test that will apply correct values.
Table 10-1 Error Codes
Error Description What to do

E01 EEPROM ERROR. Memory error. Failure in Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains,
Integrated Circuit. turn it OFF and replace EEPROM at Control
Panel.
E03 MOVEMENT NOT REQUESTED. Motors start Turn Off/On and re-calibrate. If error remains
motion without software request (virtual error). replace Eeprom.
E04 CONFIGURATION ERROR. One of the following messages appear on display:
Room maximum height too short Reconfigure C12 and C16 to a higher value.
Room Maximum height or Detector height Review and if necessary reconfigure C16, C21
and configure/calibrate C32/P12.
Thorax or Under table height too high. Check C13 and C14. If error remains
reconfigure/recalibrate all height related
configuration and calibration data.
E05 KEYBOARD ERROR. The unit has detected a Check that no object or person is pressing a
motion order (button pressed) during power up. button on the Control Panel or detector handle.
If error remains, check Overlay and PCB at
Control Panel.
E06 BROKEN CABLE. The unit has detected the Check and replace if broken. If the cable is in
steel cable is broken. good condition, check the microswitch at the
Arm carriage.
E07 ANTICRUSHING DISABLED. After power ON, Check that the Jumper in the anticrushing PCB
the unit has detected that the JUMPER at is not installed (refer to section NO TAG). If
anticrushing PCB has been left installed. error remains after removing the Jumper and
turning the unit OFF/ON, check the
The unit is blocked. This error is displayed only Anticrushing PCB software version is V2.R1.1
in software versions V5R1.1 (for units without or up. If not, update the software. If error
motorized detector) and V6R1.1 (for units with remains, replace the anticrushing PCB.
motorized detector) and up.

Troubleshooting • Error Codes • 10 - 7
Table 10-1 Error Codes
Error Description What to do

E08 HEIGHT CALIBRATION ERROR. The unit has Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains,
detected wrong calibration value. Configure (C03) and Calibrate (P01), Height in
horizontal position. If error remains, manually
modify the cam position (upper or lower) at
column. If error remains, check the
microswitches SW3--SW4 functioning and
connections.
E09 ROTATION CALIBRATION ERROR. The unit Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains,
has detected wrong calibration value. Configure (C04) and Calibrate (P02), Rotation
degrees. If error remains, manually turn up or
down the microswitch position. If error remains,
check the microswitches SW5--SW6
functioning and connections.
E10 SID CALIBRATION ERROR. The unit has Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains,
detected wrong calibration value. Configure (C05) and Calibrate (P03), SID
Position. If error remains, relocate cam for SID
100 and or 180 (the one affected). If error
remains, check the microswitches SW1--SW2
functioning and connections.
E11 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER ERROR. Failure Check the Height Potentiometer and replace if
in Height potentiometer. necessary.
E12 ROTATION INCLINOMETER ERROR. Failure Check the Inclinometer and replace if
in rotation Inclinometer. necessary.
E13 SID POTENTIOMETER ERROR. Failure in SID Check the SID Potentiometer and replace if
potentiometer. necessary.
E14 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER ERROR. Height Turn the System OFF/ON. If the error remains,
potentiometer out of calibration range. Calibrate (P01). If error remains, replace Height
potentiometer.
E15 ROTATION INCLINOMETER ERROR. Rotation Turn the System OFF/ON. If the error remains,
Inclinometer out of calibration range. Calibrate (P02). If error remains, replace
Inclinometer.
E16 SID POTENTIOMETER ERROR. SID Turn the System OFF/ON. If the error remains,
potentiometer out of calibration range. Calibrate (P03). If error remains, replace SID
potentiometer.
RAM ERR Turn Off/On and re-calibrate. If error remains Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains,
replace Eeprom. turn it OFF and Replace EEPROM.
NOTE: E14, E15, E16 are new errors from V6R2.5 (Receptor with Servomotor) and
V5R2.5 (Receptor without Servomotor).

10 - 8 • Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality
10.4 Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality

The following instructions describes how to check the proper functionality of the Safety Brake
assembly and the micro switch that notifies the user of an error E06. Error E06 indicates that
the Safety Brake steel cable is broken or loose. To check the proper functionality of the Safety
Brake assembly, a failed Safety Brake cable must be simulated. To create this simulation, the
Anti-crushing PCB must be disabled.
The primary function of the Anti-crushing PCB is to detect a loss of tension in the Safety
Brake steel cable during vertical movement. This indicates that there has been a collision with
the C-arm and another object.
When a collision occurs, the Anti-crushing PCB senses that the tension on the safety brake
cable is loose, and it will reverse the direction of the vertical drive upwards to avoid the
collision. Disabling the Anti-crushing board will allow a collision of the system to be
simulated, without reversion the vertical movement. The collision of the system will continue
until the Safety Brake mechanism is engaged because the safety brake cable is now loose.
When the Safety Brake mechanism is engaged, error E06 will be displayed on the Control
Panel. Verify that error E06 does not clear when you turn the power OFF and then ON.
Chair, stool, or ladder

Cushion
10.4.2 Safety Considerations
• The C-arm weighs approximately 250 kg. The table or chair used must be able to with-
stand 250 kg.
• Ensure no persons are near the area when lowering the C-arm onto the table or chair.
• Entering into calibration mode will bypass the safety mechanisms allowing for free move-
ment of the system. Ensure that the system is used in a safe manner.
DANGER! Do not attempt to make any system movement unless instructed to do so.
NOTE: The images used in this procedure are for reference only. The Detector Head and
Control panel are not fully representative of IDC products.
1. Turn the system ON.

2. Disable the Anti-Crushing PCB by inserting the jumper across both pins of W3. See Figure
10-1.

Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality • 10 - 9
Figure 10-1
W3
3. Set the C-arm to chest position.See Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2
4. Place a chair, a foot stool, or a small ladder (capable of holding the 250 kg weight of
the C-arm) under the tube end of the C-arm. Place a cushion on the object that will
support the weight of the C-arm when the collision occurs. See Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3

10 - 10 • Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality
NOTE: Ensure the cushion is in place, as this will help to correctly activate the Safety Brake
mechanism. If the collision surface is too hard, the Safety Brake mechanism may
shift slightly, making contact with the Safety Brake latch and pin. This will result in
the test being done incorrectly.
5. To create a collision, press the Vertical Down button on the Control Panel to slowly lower
the C-arm down onto the cushioned object. The Safety Brake steel cable will loosen, and
the Safety Brake will engage. The Safety Brake will cause the Safety Brake micro switch to
display an error E06 on the Control Panel. See Figure 10-4. If the E06 error is not displayed
on the control panel, verify that all previous steps in the work instructions have been
followed. If E06 error is still not displayed on the control panel, discontinue use and
contact IDC immediately for further instructions
Figure 10-4
6. Once the collision has been detected, and the loose Safety Brake steel cable has been
verified, turn the system OFF.
7. Remove the W3 jumper from the anti-crushing PCB. This will prevent the error that the
Anti-Crushing circuit is deactivated from being displayed.
8. Turn the system ON. E06 should continue to display on the Control Panel. If this error code
is present, the micro switch is working properly. See Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5

Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality • 10 - 11
9. You will now need to put the system into Packing mode. Turn the system OFF, then
back on. While the system is powering up, press the Lock button in the control panel.
Press the vertical up (top left) and the SID + (top right) buttons simultaneously. Figure
1-6. Refer to the 1600 Service Manual for more details.
NOTE: Entering Packing mode will bypass the safety mechanisms allowing for free
movement of the system. Ensure the system is used in a safe manner.
Figure 10-6
Vertical Up SID +
Lock
10. Ensure the Safety Brake steel cable is positioned correctly on the main motor pulley at
the top backside of the system. Press the Vertical Up button on the Control Panel to
wind the loose steel cable onto the main drive pulley. Ensure this is done slowly
because once the cable becomes tight it will pull the safety brake pin out of the latch.
When this happens, there may be a slight banging noise and the system may jerk a little
as the safety lock brake is disengaged and the arm is lifted completely from its resting
position.
11. Turn the system OFF, then back ON. The error E06 should no longer be displayed, and
the system should be fully functional for operation. If error E06 continues to be
displayed, discontinue use and contact IDC immediately.

10 - 12 • Troubleshooting • Resetting the EEPROM (U27)
10.5 Resetting the EEPROM (U27)

The EEprom memory (U27) contains all the configuration and calibration data of the unit. If
the data needs to be reset for any reason (e.g., E01) perform the following steps:
1. Turn on the Unit.
2. Press and hold 9 (Vxx is being displayed on the Angle display) until CAL appears. Release
all buttons and wait five seconds until the real angle degree appears on the Angle display.
3. Simultaneously press 1+3+4+6. The display shows the message INI EEP. The memory has
been reset.
4. Perform the configuration and calibration process.
5. If the error remains, replace the PCB A8123--XX.
10.5.1 Unit Movements Blocked
If the Unit movements are suddenly stopped, there are two ways to disable the protection
Gauges:
• Safety Lock plus any movement button
If the Unit remains continuously blocked (button lights up), it can be moved by pressing
and holding the Safety Lock button and then pressing the movement button required. See
Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7
+ Any Movement Button
• Jumper in the anticrushing PCB

The jumper is located at the back of the Column. All gauges are controlled through the
Anticrushing PCB.
To disable the Gauges action and enable movement of the Swivel Arm (see Figure 10-8):
1. Unscrew the four screws of the PCB cover located at the back of the column.
2. Pick up the Black Jumper (not connected to both pins in factory).
3. Insert the Black Jumper in both Pins. The Gauges are now disabled.
4. Remove the jumper after relocating the arm position or Error 07 will be displayed after
powering On the Unit.

Troubleshooting • Resetting the EEPROM (U27) • 10 - 13
Figure 10-8
Black Jumper in PCB Remove Black Jumper Insert Jumper in Both Pins

10 - 14 • Troubleshooting • Inverters Factory Configuration
10.6 Inverters Factory Configuration

The Control Box includes three Motor Inverters factory configured. All units are factory
tested and configured according to customer electrical requirements (50/60 Hz). See Figure
10-9.
Figure 10-9
SID Inverter
Rotation Inverter
Height Inverter
Table 10-2 includes the factory configuration data. Due to the weight of the Receptor,
sometimes a fine adjustment can be performed to improve the accuracy of the stop position.
For example; F8 is the parameter for Slow Speed, F26 is the parameter for Positioning Speed
and F27 is the parameter for Precision Speed.
To modify a parameter in an Inverter (the process is the same for all inverters) do the
following:
1. Turn On the Unit with the On/Off switch on the Control Box door. Wait 30 seconds until
the Inverters are ready. Usually 045 appears on display. If 045 does not appear, set it with
up and down arrows. See Figure 10-10.
Figure 10-10
2. Press DSP/FUN, the last configured parameter appears on the Display. For example F26
(or F00 if the Inverter is new).
3. Press UP/DOWN arrows to go to the desired parameter.
4. When the parameter is displayed, press DATA/ENT to check the value related to the
parameter, eg., for F27 the value configured in the Height Inverter is 10.
5. If required, modify the value with the UP/DOWN arrows.
6. Press DATA/ENT to save the modified value.
7. Press DSP/FUN to return to running mode.
NOTE: It is not necessary to press on RUN/STOP.

Troubleshooting • Inverters Factory Configuration • 10 - 15
(Refer to the Inverter Manual for extended information).

Table 10-2 - Inverter Configuration Data
Parameter Height Inverter SID Inverter Rotation Inverter
F_01 1 0.3 1
F_02 0.3 0.3 0.3
F_03 0 0 0
F_04 0 0 0
F_05 (50/60 Hz) 2 for 50 Hz / 5 for 60 Hz 2 for 50 Hz / 5 for 60 Hz 2 for 50 Hz / 5 for 60 Hz
Factory configured to customer
electrical requirements
F_06 Hz (50) -- Hz (60) Hz (50) -- Hz (60) Hz (50) -- Hz (60)
F_07 0 0 0
F_08(Slow Speed) 20 25 30
F_09 6 6 6
F_10 1 1 1
F_11 0 0 0
F_12 10 10 10
F_13 10 10 10
F_14 0 0 0
F_15 0.1 0.1 0.1
F_16 1.5 1.5 1.5
F_17 10 10 10
F_18 100 50 70
F_19 2 2 2
F_20 6 6 6
F_21 1 1 1
F_22 0 0 0
F_23 1 1 1
F_24 0 0 0
F_25 0 0 0
F_26 (Positioning Speed) 10 25 10
F_27 (Precision Speed) 10 12 30
F_28 1 1 1

10 - 16 • Troubleshooting • Anticrushing System
10.7 Anticrushing System

The Unit has
• Light beams installed in the Arm that stop motion if the light beam is cut.
• A Safety Device that reacts to any inadvertent bump to the Arm Assembly (Anticrushing
System).
The Safety Device is designed to protect the patient or object, should the arm come in contact.
In the rare case of a collision with the Arm, it will automatically stop and then reverse (in low
speed for 1.5 seconds in rotational movement or for 3 seconds in a vertical movement).
The following is an explanation of when the unit stops or reverses.
Anticrushing System: If the Anticrushing System is activated when the Arm of the C-arm is
moving down or rotating, it will always reverse the movement, to avoid hitting something
between the detector and the floor. See Figure 10-11.
Figure 10-11
If the Anticrushing System is activated when the Arm of the C-arm is moving up, it will
reverse or stop depending on the following situations.
• The system only reverses down automatically when the Anticrushing System is activated
and the angle is between --30º and 50º (the angle interval where the detector could be
under the table). In every other case it stops. See Figure 10-12.
Figure 10-12

Troubleshooting • Anticrushing System • 10 - 17
• In the rest of the angle ranges (from 51º - 120º) the system automatically stops. See
Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-13
NOTE: If the Unit remains blocked, the lock light comes on continuously. The unit can
be moved by pressing and holding the Safety Lock button and then pressing the
movement button required.

10 - 18 • Troubleshooting • Bearings Gap Check Procedure
10.8 Bearings Gap Check Procedure

There are four bearings on the back of the main carriage that must be properly tightened
against the linear guide.
1. Check to see if the gap between the bearings and the guide is correct. The gap between any
of the four bearings and the guide must be less than 0.3 mm. Figure 10-14 below.
Figure 10-14
0.3 mm
2. The gap must be measured using a Caliper Shim. Figure 10-15 below.
Figure 10-15

Troubleshooting • Bearings Gap Check Procedure • 10 - 19
3. Using a dynamonetric wrench, check to see that the screws are properly tightened with
15 Nm torque. Use an open wrench to hold the eccentric nut, avoiding any movement
of the nut. Figure 10-15 below.
Figure 10-16

10 - 20 • Troubleshooting • Trigger Board Replacement Procedure
10.9 Trigger Board Replacement Procedure

1. Detach the cables from the trigger PWB.
• PMT
• Cable to Camera
2. Remove the old PWB and mount the new PWB.
3. Attach the cable from PMT (6 pin connector) to PWB J1
4. Attach the trigger cable (3 pin end) to J2.
5. Run the cable to the camera and plug the four pin end into the top PWB, J3 of the camera.
Figure 10-17
Trigger Cable J2
VR1
PMT Cable J1
VR2
TP1
TP4
TP6 L1 L2

Troubleshooting • Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure • 10 - 21
10.10 Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure
10.10.1 Issue Description
To troubleshoot image quality service issues that come from the field, a number of images
are required.
The following procedure describes the techniques and processes that must be followed
when gathering images for troubleshooting image quality.
10.10.2 Resolution Description
Most image quality issues cannot be resolved without some basic images. The images that
must be gathered in this procedure are:
• uncorrected dark noise image
• uncorrected x-ray image
• Flat Field and Dark Field corrected image
• Flat Field, Dark Field, and geometric corrected x-ray image
• a clinical image showing the problem, if applicable
IDC requires the above images in order to diagnose where the problem is occurring. Each
of the shots required is a separate component of the final image. Seeing separate images
will allow each image to be inspected and enable us to trace the problem back to a
particular location. This should allow a faster response time from IDC to help resolve the
issue.
These images and information are required to ensure a quality response from IDC.
Without these images, IDC cannot determine if a Detector Head should be replaced, and
we will not issue an RMA number unless all specified images have been obtained.
N/A
10.10.4 Safety Considerations
N/A
10.10.5.1 Create an Issue

If an issue has not already been created for this problem, create one in the Tracking site

10 - 22 • Troubleshooting • Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure
under the applicable customer/site project, and clearly state the following information:
1. Detector Head serial number
2. System type (e.g., 1600, 1590)
3. The problem or issue
4. All exposure factors including grid, SID, etc.
5. A clinical image showing the problem (if applicable)
10.10.5.2 Saving Images

Create a folder titled DH Evaluation in C:\Magellan2\service. This is where all the required
images will be saved. This folder can be accessed at a later date, if the images are not received
by IDC.
10.10.5.3 Uncorrected Dark Noise Image

An uncorrected dark noise image is an unprocessed dark noise image, taken without any
corrections applied. To take this image:
1. Open DelCano, not Magellan. If Magellan has been opened, exit the application before
opening DelCano.
2. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn off Flat Field and Dark Field correction by unchecking
Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.
4. Ensure the Integration Time is 4000 ms. If the value is different than what is currently
entered, note the original length in the tracking site issue and return the time to the original
length after capturing the dark noise image.
5. Select Apply.
6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set the Anatomy/Projection/Level to
Calibration/Delcano/HR. Select OK.
7. Select Trigger to capture the image.
8. Save the image as DarkNoCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.
10.10.5.4 Uncorrected X-ray Image

An uncorrected x-ray image is an unprocessed x-ray image of free air (nothing in the field),
taken without any corrections applied. This image must be included to assess image quality.
To take this image do the following:
1. Remove the grid. If possible, set the SID to 180 cm. If you are unable to set the SID to 180
cm, set to 100 cm. Ensure the collimator is exposing the entire imaging area.
opening DelCano.

3. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn off Flat Field and Dark field correction by
unchecking Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.
5. Select Apply.
6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set the Anatomy/Projection/Level to
7. Take an image of free air (nothing in the field) at 50 kVp and 32 mAs, with a small
focal spot, when the SID is set to 180 cm. If the SID is set to 100 cm, take the image of
free air at 50 kVp and 16 mAs.
8. Save the image as XrayNoCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.
10.10.5.5 Flat Field and Dark Field Corrected Image

A Flat Field and Dark Field corrected image is an unprocessed image of free air (nothing
in the field), taken with only Flat Field and Dark Field correction applied. To take this
image do the following:
1. Remove the grid. Set the SID to 180 cm, if possible. If you are unable to set the SID to
180 cm, set to 100 cm. Ensure the collimator is exposing the entire imaging area.
opening DelCano.
3. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn on Flat Field and Dark Field correction by checking
a. If there is more than one Flat Field file in the Flat Field path frame, write down
the location of all the files. You will need these locations later in the procedure.
b. Locate the Flat Field exposure that corresponds to your detector position. This
is identifiable by the SID, and detector position. Select the Question Mark but-
ton to confirm the information.
c. Remove every Flat Field file that does not apply to the Detector’s orientation/
SID. To remove a file, select the filename, then select the minus button.
5. Select Apply.
6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set Anatomy/Projection/Level to
7. Take an image of free air (nothing in the field) at 50 kVp and 32 mAs, with a small
focal spot, when the SID is set to 180 cm. If the SID is set to 100 cm, take the image of
free air at 50 kVp and 16 mAs.
8. Save the image as XrayCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.

10 - 24 • Troubleshooting • Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure
9. Add the individual Flat Field files. Select the Plus button beside the Flat Field path. Find
the Flat Field file that was previously removed by referring back to the list of file locations
noted. Repeat until all of the Flat Field files are present.
10.10.5.6 Flat Field, Dark Field, and Geometric Corrected X-ray Image
A Flat Field, Dark Field, and Geometric corrected x-ray image is an unprocessed image of
free air (nothing in the field), taken with Flat Field, Dark Field and Geometric correction
applied. To take this image do the following:
1. Remove the grid. If possible, set the SID to 180 cm. If you are unable to set the SID to 180
cm, set to 100 cm. Ensure the collimator is exposing the entire imaging area.
opening DelCano.
3. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn on Flat Field and Dark Field correction by checking
a. If there is more than one Flat Field file in the Flat Field path frame, write down the
location of all the files. These locations will need used later in the procedure.
b. Locate the Flat Field exposure that corresponds to your detector position. This is
identifiable by the SID, and possibly the detector position. Select the Question
Mark button to confirm the information.
c. Remove every Flat Field file that does not apply to the detector’s orientation/SID.
To remove a file, select the filename, then select the minus button.
4. Turn on Geometric correction by checking Apply Geometric Correction.
5. Select Apply.
6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set Anatomy/Projection/Level to
7. Take an image of free air (nothing in the field) at 50 kVp and 32 mAs, with a small focal
spot, when the SID is set to 180 cm. If the SID is set to 100 cm, take the image of free air at
50 kVp at 16 mAs.
8. Save the image as XrayGeoCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.
9. Add the individual Flat Field files. Select the Plus button beside the Flat Field paths frame.
Find the Flat Field file that was removed earlier. Repeat until all of the Flat Field files are
present.
10.10.5.7 Uploading Images

Upload the images (not .jpeg files) onto the tracking site. The images may also be saved to a
CD and couriered, with the appropriate tracking site issue number or problem description, to
IDC, Attention: Service.
10.10.5.8 Record the Investigation

Record the outcome of the investigation in the appropriate issue on the Tracking site. If the

issue has been resolved, record what was done to resolve the problem. If the Detector
Head needs to be returned to IDC, record the RMA # in the issue.

10 - 26 • Troubleshooting • Grid Detect Replacement
10.11 Grid Detect Replacement

Replacement of the Grid Detect board should take one service engineer approximately one
hour.
The following steps are required to prevent further damage to an existing board or damage to
the new board.
1. Move the detector head to an appropriate working height for servicing.
2. Remove the end covers and the front panel skins from the Detector Head.
3. Remove the bolts from the four corners on the back of the face plate and at the end of the
support frame and remove the handle.
4. Remove the 4 x M5 bolts holding the faceplate onto the ion chamber support frame. (Be
careful not to stress or damage the grid detect cable.)
5. Unplug the grid detect cable from the grid detect board on the face plate.
6. Remove the damaged board from the faceplate.
7. Bend the mounting tabs located on the faceplate for the Grid Detect board 1 or 2 mm
toward the front of the faceplate to allow for extra clearance.
8. Replace the Grid Detect board, plug in the cable, and replace the covers.
9. Open the TECCM in Magellan 3 and see if the values correspond to the look up table listed
above.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly • 10 - 27
10.12 Replacement of Height Motor Assembly
10.12.1 Subassembly
Height Motor Assembly at Upper Column
10.12.2 Required Tools
One of the following is required to help support the stand:

• Three meter (118 in) length of rope or similar (sling) to prevent the Unit from tilting if
the procedure is performed with the Unit in vertical position
• Piece of wood, 30 cm height (12 in) or similar if the procedure is performed with the
Unit resting on a piece of wood on the floor (due to the low ceiling height).
10.12.3 Procedure
WARNING! If the ceiling height in the room is below 280 cm (110 in), perform the
procedure with the unit lying on a piece of wood or similar.
NOTE: If possible, insert the Safety Locking Rod in the carriage to block the carriage. If
this is not possible two people are needed to support the carriage when releasing
the Steel Cable.
CAUTION! To prevent damage to the Detector Head and the skins, it is recommended to
remove the Detector Head from the unit before performing this procedure.
1. Insert the Safety Locking Rod (if possible).

2. Remove the Detector Head from the stand.
3. Remove the upper back cover of the stand.
4. Unscrew and remove the Upper Stand Support (not the Wall Support) from the Unit.
5. Install a 3m (118”) rope or similar (sling) between the Wall Support and the Carriage
(insert the rope in the carriage) to prevent the Unit from tilting or falling.
6. Manually push up the carriage to release the steel cable tension and then remove the
fixing screw for the steel cable at the back of the stand. Unroll the cable. If the Safety
Locking Rod is not inserted, the Arm (Carriage) will go down. Carefully let it rest on
the floor or on a support.
7. Unscrew the six bolts that fix the motor to the stand.
8. Disconnect the cable connections for the potentiometer and motor power.
9. Manually lift the defective motor (the Pulley and the Potentiometer Assembly
included) out from the top. See Figure 10-18.

10 - 28 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly
Figure 10-18
Motor and Pulley
Rope or similar
10. Place the Motor Assembly on a working surface and remove the Top Cover of the
defective Motor.
Figure 10-19
Steel Cable Screw Upper Column Support

(Previously disassembled)
Motor Fixing Screws
Pulley
Tooth Belt
Tooth Belt Tensioner
Plate
M17 Fixing Screw for
Potentiometer Mounting P
Potentiometer Cable
11.Release the Potentiometer Support Screws and release the Tooth Belt from the
Potentiometer Gear (see Figure 10-19 above).
12.Remove one allen screw at the back of the Pulley and remove it (with its shaft) from the
defective Motor. (Use a Plastic Head hammer to bump out the shaft).

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly • 10 - 29
13.Remove the Potentiometer Assembly screws from the defective Motor and take the
Potentiometer Assembly out (cable and connector included).
14.Reinstall the Potentiometer Assembly in the new Motor (leave it loose).
15.Insert the Shaft/Pulley, including the Potentiometer Tooth Belt in the new motor.
16.Reinstall the Top Cover from the defective motor on the new Motor.
17. Install the new Motor in the stand and connect the Motor and Potentiometer Assembly
connectors.
18.Wire the Steel Cable around the spiral pulley in a clockwise direction and install the
Steel Cable screw. The Unit may need to be powered on and the carriage moved to
release the tension in the Steel Cable.
19.Carefully remove the rope and reinstall the Upper Column Support with the Wall
Support.
20.Power on the Unit and place the Carriage at middle travel.
21.Set the Potentiometer Shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter
(volts) in the Potentiometer Contacts and move the Potentiometer Shaft to 2.5 Volts.
22.Place the Tooth Belt over the gear and place the Mounting Plate in its final position.
The belt should be straightened by hand without any pressure. The belt must be straight
enough so the teeth remain in place, but loose enough so the potentiometer will not be
pulled and consequently damaged. It is better to leave it a little bit loose rather than
tight. If you apply a normal finger pressure in the middle of the belt, it should bend
around 2 to 3 mm. For fine positioning use the Tensioner Plate Screws. When correctly
positioned, tighten the screws.
23.Calibrate maximum, half and minimum height for the stand. See 4.5 “Calibration
Details” on page 4-19. When calibrating the Potentiometer readout (it appears during
the calibration process after pressing store button), the displays shows OK and then the
potentiometer readout. The minimum height should not be lower than 20 (typically 23)
and the maximum height should not be higher than 80 (typically 78). If everything is
well adjusted the value for half height should be very close to 50. If the values are not
within the limits, repeat step 3 in the Calibration procedure and turn the Potentiometer
Shaft to increase or decrease all these values.
24.Reinstall the upper back cover.
NOTE: If the Height Motor has to be replaced on the floor, perform the following steps.
At least three persons are needed to lay the Unit on the floor.
CAUTION! To prevent damage to the Detector Head and the skins, it is recommended to
remove the Detector Head from the unit before performing this procedure.
1. Remove the Detector Head from the stand.

2. Turn the Arm in the Vertical position and lower the carriage as much as possible to
keep the gravity center close to the floor.

10 - 30 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly
3. Power off the Unit.

4. Remove the upper back cover of the Column.
5. Unscrew the Floor anchoring screws and then the Upper Column Support.
6. Carefully, lay the Unit down. Rest the upper part on a piece of wood and the base on the
floor. See Figure 10-20.
Figure 10-20
Motor and Pulley

Carriage
Upper Back Cover
Wood
7. Follow from Step 5 of previous procedure.

8. When the new motor is assembled and the Unit is in vertical position, re-install the base
anchoring screws.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly • 10 - 31
10.13 Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly
10.13.1 Required Tools
To comfortably perform this procedure, two working benches should be used to support
the Unit.
NOTE: A minimum of two people and a complete working day are needed to perform
this task.
10.13.2 Procedure
1. Position the machine to middle height and insert the Safety Locking Rod.
2. Rotating to the Chest position (if possible) greatly facilitates the job.
3. Remove the Tube and the Detector Head.
4. Remove the cover for the rotation gear.
5. Place the working benches below the arm.
7. Remove the arm from the carriage by first removing the three screws located at the
lower right side, then the screws at the back of the arm with the exception of the corner
screws. These will be removed last, to avoid the arm from bending. See Figure 10-21
and Figure 10-22.
Figure 10-21
Arm Fixing Screws

(Do not forget to reinstall the
Rotation Gear
screws in the same position)

10 - 32 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly
Figure 10-22
Unscrew first the

lower screws
8. Remove the arm, resting it on the working benches.

9. Unplug the two connectors and the ground cable from the arm.
10. Separate the arm further from the column.
11. Dismount the rotation motor.
a. First loosen the screws that push the motor to the gear.
CAUTION! Be careful, as this will allow the motor to rotate free.
b. Remove the four fixing screws.

12.Remove the motor and position the new one in place, fix it with the four screws and tighten
the screws that push the motor to the main gear.
13.Connect cables J1, J6 and GND.
14.Replace the arm. Ensure the screws around the bearing are the six screws with the small
head.
15.Install the covers for the rotation bearing.
16.Install the Tube and Detector Head.
17.Calibrate the maximum and minimum height. See 4.5 “Calibration Details” on page 4-19.
18.Recalibrate the Unit. See “Detector Calibration And Configuration” on page 6-1.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Potentiometer • 10 - 33
10.14 Replacement of Height Potentiometer
10.14.1 Subassembly
Height motor assembly at upper column.
10.14.2 Procedure
1. Power on the Unit and position the Arm so that the carriage is at the middle height of
the total travel (typically 105 cm from the centre of the carriage to the floor).
Figure 10-23
Tooth Belt
Potentiometer Gear
Potentiometer Cable
Tooth Belt
Tensioner Plate
M17 Fixing Screw
for Potentiometer
Mounting Plate
3. Remove the upper back cover of the stand.

4. Release the Tensioner Plate to disengage the Tooth Belt from the Potentiometer Gear
and remove both screws of the U shaped Potentiometer Mounting Plate (open Wrench
of M17). See Figure 10-23 above.
5. Disconnect the other end of the Potentiometer Cable from its aerial connector, cut the
tie wrap and pick up the Potentiometer Assembly.
6. Loosen the two Grub screws (do not totally remove them) inserted in the Gear that
fixes the Gear to the potentiometer and remove the Gear.
7. Remove the Potentiometer from the Tensioner Plate. Do not loosen the round and
locking washers.
8. Unsolder the Potentiometer wires. Note where each wire is connected so the wires can
be re-soldered in the same position for the new Potentiometer.

10 - 34 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Potentiometer
9. Solder the wires on the new Potentiometer. Take note that the wire marked as number 2 is
the one for the cursor.
10.Mount the new Potentiometer in the Tensioner Plate. First insert the round washer, then the
locking washer. Position the potentiometer where the previous one was mounted and
tighten the screws.
11.Mount the Mounting Plate in the stand, insert the gear in the potentiometer shaft and
tighten the two Grub screws.
12.Tighten the two Potentiometer Mounting Plate screws (M17). Place a Tie wrap to route the
Potentiometer cable and connect it.
13.Power on the Unit and place the Carriage at middle travel.
14.Set the Potentiometer shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter
(volts) in the potentiometer contacts and move the potentiometer shaft to 2.5 Volts.
15.Place the Tooth Belt over the gear and place the Mounting Plate in its final position. The
belt should be straightened by hand without any pressure. The belt must be straight enough
so the teeth remain in place, but loose enough so the potentiometer will not be pulled and
consequently damaged. It is better to leave it a little bit loose rather than tight. If you apply
a normal finger pressure in the middle of the belt, it should bend around 2 to 3 mm. For fine
positioning use the Tensioner Plate Screws. When correctly positioned, tighten the screws.
16.Calibrate maximum, half and minimum height for the stand. See 4.5 “Calibration Details”
on page 4-19. When calibrating the potentiometer readout (it appears during the calibration
process after pressing store button), the displays shows OK and then the potentiometer
readout. The minimum height should not be lower than 20 (typically 23) and the maximum
height should not be higher than 80 (typically 78). If everything is well adjusted the value
for half height should be very close to 50. If the values are not within the limits, repeat step
3 in the Calibration procedure and turn the potentiometer shaft to increase or decrease all
these values.
17.Reinstall the upper back cover.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of SID Potentiometer • 10 - 35
10.15 Replacement of SID Potentiometer
10.15.1 Subassembly
SID Potentiometer at Arm End
10.15.2 Procedure
1. Place the tube carriage in the middle of the total travel of the SID.
2. Power Off the Unit.
3. Remove the Arm Back Cover.
Figure 10-24
SID Potentiometer Standard Version SID Potentiometers for Systems
with Automatic Collimator
Pot Gear
Fixing Screw for Potentiometer Support Chain Gear
4. Unsolder the wires that feed the broken potentiometer. See Figure 10-24.
5. Take the new Potentiometer, solder the wires.
6. Set the Potentiometer in the middle position (five turns) or power up the machine,
connect the multimeter and set 2.5 Volts with the Potentiometer’s shaft.
7. Place the Potentiometer support so that the Potentiometer’s gear is in touch with the
chain gear. Do not apply force. They should be touching just enough for the movement
to be transmitted to the Potentiometer. Ensure the Potentiometer is kept at its middle
position.
8. Tighten the screws fixing the support.
9. Reinstall the Arm Back cover.
10.Power up the Unit and recalibrate the SID. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on
page 4-3.

10 - 36 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Detector Motor
10.16 Replacement of Detector Motor
10.16.1 Subassembly
Detector Motor at arm end.
10.16.2 Procedure
1. Place the Detector Head in the Chest position and lower it so that it can be cushioned and
unable to rotate freely.
3. Remove the Detector Motor Back Cover.
Figure 10-25
Terminal Block
Motor Plate Support Screws

Motor Support Screws (4)
Motor Gear
Fixing Screw for Pot Support
4. Release the Potentiometer Support screws to separate the Potentiometer Gear from the
Motor Gear. See Figure 10-25 above.
5. Remove the Electrical connections from the Terminal block.
6. Unscrew the Motor Plate support screws (2).
7. Unscrew the Motor Support screws (4).
8. Carefully take out the motor ensuring the Detector Head is supported so it does not rotate.
9. Install the new motor. Be careful with the Motor Gear and the Potentiometer Gear. Do not
apply force. They should be touching just enough for the movement to be transmitted to the
Potentiometer. Tighten the Potentiometer Support screws.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Detector Motor • 10 - 37
10.Connect the Motor cables to the Terminal Block and Ground.

11.Turn On the unit and position the Detector at --45.
12.Turn the potentiometer clockwise to the maximum and then turn 1/8 counterclockwise.
13.Using a level, check the correct readout of the Detector angle.
14.Power off the Unit and reinstall the Arm Back cover.
15.Power up the Unit and recalibrate the Motor Angle. See 4.1 “Configuration and
Calibration” on page 4-3.

10 - 38 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Detector Potentiometer
10.17 Replacement of Detector Potentiometer
10.17.1 Subassembly
Detector Motor at arm end
10.17.2 Procedure
1. Place the system in Thorax position.

2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the Detector Back Cover.
Figure 10-26
Motor Gear
Pot Gear Potentiometer
Fixing Screws for Pot Support
4. Release the Potentiometer Support screws to separate the Potentiometer Gear from the
Motor Gear. See Figure 10-26 above.
5. Unsolder the wires that feed the broken potentiometer.
6. Replace the broken Potentiometer with the new one and re-solder the wires. Do not apply
force to the Motor Gear and the Potentiometer Gear. They should be touching just enough
for the movement to be transmitted to the Potentiometer. Tighten the Potentiometer
Support screws.
7. Turn On the Unit and position the Detector at --45º.
8. Turn the Potentiometer clockwise to the maximum and then turn 1/8 counterclockwise.
9. Using a level, check the correct readout of the Detector angle.
10. Power off the UNit and reinstall the Arm Back cover.
11. Power up the Unit and recalibrate the Motor Angle. See 4.1 “Configuration and

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display • 10 - 39
10.18 Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display
10.18.1 Subassembly
Tube Collimator Assembly
10.18.2 Procedure
1. Place the system in Chest position.

2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the X-ray Tube Cover (screws at the back of the cover and pull).
Figure 10-27
PCB Support Screws
PCB Display
Control PCB
4. Remove the PCB Support Screws and disconnect all the connectors at the Control
PCB. Figure 10-27.
5. Replace the Control PCB or the Display PCB and connect all connectors.
6. Reinstall the cover.
7. Perform the Configuration and Calibration processes. See 4.1 “Configuration and

10 - 40 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board
10.19 Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board
10.19.1 Subassembly
Column Back
10.19.2 Procedure
1. Place the Detector Head in chest position.

3. Remove the PCB Cover at the back of the column (a small square cover with four screws).
Figure 10-28
PCB Support Nuts
PCB Anticrushing
Connectors
4. Disconnect all the connectors at the PCB and remove the PCB Support Nuts. See Figure
10-28 above.
5. Replace the Anticrushing PCB and connect all connectors.
6. Reinstall the cover and power on the Unit.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus • 10 - 41
10.20 Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus
10.20.1 Subassembly
Control Box X Plus LP
10.20.2 Procedure

2. Open the Control Box.
3. Disconnect all the connectors at the PCB Interface X Plus and remove the PCB Support
Nuts.
4. Replace the PCB Interface X Plus and connect all connectors. See Figure 10-29.
Figure 10-29
PCB Interface
X Plus

10 - 42 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Steel Cable
10.21 Replacement of Steel Cable
10.21.1 Subassembly
Height Motor Assembly at Upper Column and Carriage
10.21.2 Procedure
WARNING! Before releasing the steel cable, insert the safety locking rod in the carriage to
block the carriage. If this is not possible, ensure that the support arm can rest on a
strong and reliable support.
1. Remove the Detector Head.

2. Power On the Unit.
3. Move the Carriage up or down and insert the Safety Locking Rod.
5. Press the up or down button to release tension in the Steel cable and then unscrew the
fixing screw for the Steel cable at the back of the column. Unroll the cable. If the Safety
Locking Rod is not inserted, the support arm will go down. Ensure it is resting on a strong
and reliable support.
6. Remove the Safety Washers and the Pin attached to the end of the Steel Cable at the
carriage.
7. Install the new Steel Cable by winding the Steel cable around the spiral pulley in clockwise
direction and tighten the Steel Cable Screw at the carriage with the Safety Washers. See
Figure 10-30.
8. Reinstall the upper back cover.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Steel Cable • 10 - 43
Figure 10-30
Steel Cable Screw
Pin
Safety Washers

10 - 44 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt
10.22 Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt
10.22.1 Subassembly
Height Motor assembly at upper column and carriage
10.22.2 Procedure
Follow procedure outlined in 10.12 “Replacement of Height Motor Assembly” on page 10-
27. It includes the disassembly of both the Pulley and the Tooth Belt.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of the X-Ray Tube • 10 - 45
10.23 Replacement of the X-Ray Tube
10.23.1 Subassembly
Tube-Collimator Assembly
10.23.2 Procedure

2. Remove the Tube-Collimator cover.
3. Carefully disconnect the High Voltage cables from the Tube by first loosing the Grub
Screw located at the Ring Nut, then unscrewing Ring Nut and pulling out the
Termination Plug of the High Voltage cable.
Handle them carefully. Ensure all pins are all straight and the splits in the
pins are open (parallel to sides).
4. Remove the X-Ray Tube cover and disconnect the Stator / Thermostat cables.
5. Remove the Collimator back cover and disconnect the Collimator Lamp Cable.
6. Remove the four Centering Adjustment Screws of the Collimator and remove the
Collimator.
7. Remove the four allen screws of the Collimator Adaptation Ring and remove the X-
Ray Tube.
8. Replace the X-Ray Tube and reinstall the assembly in reverse order.
Figure 10-31
Ring Nut
Grub Screw
HV Cable
Terminal of HV Cable

10 - 46 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of the X-Ray Tube
Figure 10-32
X-ray Tube Cover
Stator/Thermostat Cable
Collimator Cover
Centering and Safety Screws
Collimator Cable of Collimator

Troubleshooting • Replacement of the Collimator • 10 - 47
10.24 Replacement of the Collimator
10.24.1 Subassembly
10.24.2 Procedure
1. Turn the System Off and remove the Tube-Collimator cover.

2. Remove the Collimator back cover and disconnect the Collimator Lamp Cable.
3. Remove the four Centering Adjustment Screws of the Collimator and remove it.
4. Replace the Collimator and reinstall the assembly in reverse order.

10 - 48 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of the High Voltage Cables
10.25 Replacement of the High Voltage Cables
10.25.1 Subassembly
10.25.2 Procedure

2. Remove the Tube-Collimator cover.
3. Carefully disconnect the High Voltage cables from the Tube by first loosing the Grub
Screw located at the Ring Nut, then unscrewing by hand the Ring Nut and pulling out the
Termination Plug of the High Voltage cable.
Handle them carefully. Ensure all pins are all straight and the splits in the pins are
open (parallel to sides).
4. Disconnect the High Voltage Cables from the Generator in the same manner.
5. Assemble the mounting accessories of each Termination Plug following the Cable
manufacturer instructions.
6. Before installing the cables in the Generator Tank and in the X-Ray Tube, prepare the High
Voltage terminals that will be installed in the X-ray Tube(s) receptacles. To do this, apply
Silicone Paste over the entire surface of the Plug including the Pins and the Tube receptacle
and placing 1cm of oil in the HV Cable receptacle in the Generator.
7. Carefully connect the Anode and Cathode cables into the respective X-ray Tube receptacles
(Apply Silicone Paste on the X-Ray Tube Receptacle). Ensure that all connections are
made correctly (keep correct Anode and Cathode orientation). Securely hand-tighten the
Ring Nut and tighten the Grub Screw located at the Ring Nut.
8. Put approximately 1cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV Transformer receptacles.
9. Carefully connect the Anode and Cathode cables from the X-ray Tube(s) into the respective
HV Transformer receptacles. Ensure all connections are made correctly (keep correct
Anode and Cathode orientation). Securely hand-tighten the Ring Nut and tighten the Grub
Screw located at the Ring Nut.
10.Replace the X-Ray Tube and reinstall the assembly in reverse order.

Troubleshooting • Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic) • 10 - 49
10.26 Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic)
10.26.1 Subassembly
10.26.2 Procedure
WARNING! Do not immediately touch the dissipator. It could be hot and cause servere
burns.
WARNING! Do not touch the lamp, the socket or the lamp socket. They could be very hot
and cause severe burns.

2. Remove the Collimator Back cover.
3. Remove the lamp protection heatsink.
4. Carefully remove the faulty lamp.
5. Replace the lamp with an identical lamp.
6. Ensure that the lamp pins are completely inserted in the lamp-holder.
7. Check on Light Field / X-Ray field correspondence.
8. If necessary remove the lamp, rotate it 180º axially and re-insert.

10 - 50 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation
10.27 Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation
10.27.1 Subassembly
Arm
10.27.2 Procedure
1. Power on the Unit and move the Detector Head to the Chest position.
3. Remove the Rotation Gear cover to gain access to the Rotation Limit Switches.
4. Remove the switches and replace.
Figure 10-33

Troubleshooting • Replacement of Limit Switches: Height • 10 - 51
10.28 Replacement of Limit Switches: Height
10.28.1 Subassembly
Carriage
10.28.2 Procedure

2. Remove the small square cover located at the back of the carriage to gain access to the
Height Limit Switches. Remove the switches and replace.
Figure 10-34
Carriage
Square Switches Cover

10 - 52 • Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer
10.29 Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer
10.29.1 Subassembly
Height Motor Assembly (Column Upper Part)
10.29.2 Procedure
1. Power on the Unit and position the Arm so that the carriage is at the middle height of the
total travel (typically 105 cm from the centre of the carriage to the floor).
Figure 10-35
Tooth Belt
Potentiometer Gear
Potentiometer Cable
Tooth Belt
Tensioner Plate
M17 Fixing Screw
for Potentiometer
Mounting Plate

4. Release the Tensioner Plate to disengage the Tooth Belt from the Potentiometer Gear.
5. Power on the Unit and place the Carriage at middle travel.
6. Set the Potentiometer Shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter
7. Place the Tooth Belt over the gear and place the Mounting Plate in its final position. The
belt should be straightened by hand without any pressure. The belt must be straight enough
so the teeth remain in place, but loose enough so the potentiometer will not be pulled and
consequently damaged. It is better to leave it a little bit loose rather than tight. If you apply
a normal finger pressure in the middle of the belt, it should bend around 2 to 3 mm. For fine
positioning use the Tensioner Plate Screws. When correctly positioned, tighten the screws.
8. Calibrate maximum, half and minimum height for the stand. See 4.5 “Calibration Details”
on page 4-19. When calibrating the Potentiometer readout (it appears during the calibration
process after pressing store button), the displays shows OK and then the potentiometer

Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer • 10 - 53
readout. The minimum height should not be lower than 20 (typically 23) and the
maximum height should not be higher than 80 (typically 78). If everything is well
adjusted the value for half height should be very close to 50. If the values are not within
the limits, repeat step 3 in the Calibration procedure and turn the Potentiometer Shaft to
increase or decrease all these values.
9. Reinstall the upper back cover.

10 - 54 • Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer
10.30 Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer
10.30.1 Subassembly
SID Motor Assembly (Arm)
10.30.2 Procedure
1. Place the system so that the tube carriage is at the middle of the total travel of the SID.
2. Power system down.
3. Remove the Arm Back Cover.
Figure 10-36
Fixing Screw for Pot Support Pot Gear Chain Gear

4. Set the Potentiometer Shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter
5. Place the Potentiometer support so that the Potentiometer’s gear is in touch with the chain
gear. Do not apply force. They should be touching just enough for the movement to be
transmitted to the Potentiometer. Ensure you keep the Potentiometer at its middle position.
6. Tighten the screws fixing the support.
7. Reinstall the Arm Back cover.
8. Power up the Unit and recalibrate the SID. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on
page 4-3.

Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Inclinometer • 10 - 55
10.31 Adjustment of the Inclinometer
10.31.1 Subassemblies
Arm Assembly
10.31.2 Procedure
1. Remove the central back Cover of the Arm.
Figure 10-37
2.Power up the Unit and position the Arm in horizontal position (check with a level).
3. Loose the Inclinometer fixing screws.
4. Turn the Inclinometer’s position in order to obtain 0°. The photo shows its correct
position.
5. Tighten the Inclinometer screws.
6. Power off the Unit and assemble the Cover.

10 - 56 • Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position
10.32 Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position
10.32.1 Subassemblies
Arm Assembly
10.32.2 Procedure
NOTE: This section only applies to systems where the X-ray Tube or the Collimator has to be
replaced by a different X-ray Tube or Collimator (different weight).
1. Power on the Unit. Place the Swivel Arm in horizontal position and open the SID at
maximum meters.
2. Press the Rotation button and check that the Swivel Arm is balanced. The Swivel Arm
should not tilt in any direction without force applied at any point.
If the Swivel Arm is incorrectly balanced perform the following steps:
a. Remove the end cover of the Arm.
b. Install or remove the Counterweight Plates required to balance the Swivel Arm,
such that the Tube-Collimator Assembly end weighs the same as the Detector
Assembly end. Re-install the Top Cover.
Figure 10-38
Counterweight Plates

Troubleshooting • Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed • 10 - 57
10.33 Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed
10.33.1 Subassembly
Receptor Assembly
10.33.2 Procedure
NOTE: This section only applies to systems where the speed of the Receptor must be
modified. The speed may have to be reduced as the Receptor does not stop at 0°
or 90° due to the force of inertia.
1. Open the Control Box Door.

2. Identify the PCB Interface X Plus A8124-07, located in the Control Box.
3. Measure the Voltage between GND PWR and TP3 (Figure 10-39). Turn the
Potentiometer screw R13 clockwise or counterclockwise to set the voltage higher or
lower. The adjustment in voltage will increase or decrease the speed rotation of the
detector.
4. Repeat this procedure measuring at GND PWR and TP4 and adjusting the speed with
the screwdriver at R16.
Figure 10-39
PCB Interface X Plus TP3

TP4
R13
R16
GND PWR

10 - 58 • Troubleshooting • Software Update in Control PCB
10.34 Software Update in Control PCB
10.34.1 Subassembly
10.34.2 Tools
Special Serial Cable RS232. PC (Laptop) with RS232 serial port. Program “Flip V2.4.4” (to
load software on to the board). URS LP Control Board A8123--04.
10.34.3 Procedure
1. Install the software for microcontrollers ATMEL serial programming in the PC (flip 2.4.4).
Save the dll file AtRs232no.dll on C:\Program files\Atmel\bin.
2. Connect the cable to the PC serial port and to the J10 control board connector.
3. To program the microcontroller set the W1 and W2 switches on B position and the supply
connected to J6.
a. Select Start > Programs > flip
b. Select Device > Select and mark T89C51RD2.
Figure 10-40
c. Select Setting >Communications >RS232. Choose the serial port, the baud rate
(38400) and select Connect.

Troubleshooting • Software Update in Control PCB • 10 - 59
Figure 10-41
d. Ensure the Level is 0. If not, choose Level 0 and select SET.

e. Select File > Load HEX and choose the new control board software and select Open.
f. Select the “SXXXX.hex” file for Motorized detector systems or “SXXXX.hex” for non-
-motorized systems.
g. Press Run.
3. After programming the microcontroller return W1 and W2 to A position.
VERY IMPORTANT:
After the software modification, configure and calibrate the equipment and change the
inverter configuration values. See 10-2 “- Inverter Configuration Data” on page 10-15.
Take special note of the following:
• F02 was “0.5” for height, SID, and rotation inverter and now it should be 0.3 for all.
• F15 was “0.3” for height, SID and rotation inverter and now it should be 0.1 for all.
• F27 was “30” for height inverter and now it should be 5.

NOTES
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
This chapter provides guidelines and intervals for the proper preventative maintenance of the
system. Included in this chapter is
11.1 “Scheduled Maintenance”

11 - 2 • Preventative Maintenance •
0.1 March 15, 2007 Module created using existing information
1.0 June 6, 2007 First release

Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance • 11 - 3
11.1 Scheduled Maintenance

Film-based x-ray systems are subject to daily Quality Control to ensure the chemistry is
stable, temperatures are correct, film is not fogged and mechanical components such as
film transport rollers, are clean and free of contaminants. With digital imaging, Quality
Control becomes unnecessary because chemistry is not a factor.
Computed Radiography systems still require regular Quality Control because imaging
plates wear and the scanning mechanism is subject to dirt and contaminants. Digital
Radiography systems, involve solid state x-ray imaging. Digital Radiography exclude
moving parts, any chemistry, and consumables. The need for daily Quality Control is
removed. IDC systems require preventative maintenance to be performed every six
months by qualified service personnel.
IDC is in the process of producing a phantom for regular Quality Control checks;
however, it is not required to perform the Quality Control checks more than every six
months. Availability of the phantom is expected in late 2006.
The remainder of the section defines the scheduled activities that will be carried out as
part of an overall maintenance agreement.
IDC does not accept any responsibility for equipment that has not been
serviced and maintained in accordance with the instructions provided,
including any instructions that have been altered or modified.
CAUTION! For scheduled departmental power tests, the main power should be turned off
until testing is complete.
11.1.1 Lock-out Procedures
Emergency stop buttons shall not to be used during maintenance or servicing operations in
place of required lock-out procedures. The equipment shall only be serviced by trained
service personnel. Service personnel shall be knowledgeable of and follow their
organizations required lock-out procedure. This procedure should state that the equipment
shall not be serviced without locking the electrical disconnect in the open position.

11 - 4 • Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance
11.1.2 Scanning for Volume Errors
1. In the Start Menu, select My Computer.
Figure 11-1
2. Right-click the disk drive you want to scan. See Figure 11-2 below.
3. Select Properties.

Figure 11-2
4. Select the Tools Tab.
Figure 11-3
5. Select the Check Now... button to scan for volume errors.

6. In the Check Disk Local Disk dialog box, check both boxes labelled “Automatically fix file
system errors” and “Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors”. See Figure 11-4. Any
corrupted sectors or sites will be repaired with the scan.
Figure 11-4
7. Select Start.
NOTE: Scanning for volume errors may take several minutes.
11.1.3 Running the Windows Disk Defragmenter
1. In the Start Menu, go to My Computer. See Figure 11-1.

2. Right-click the disk drive you want to defragment.
3. Select Properties. See Figure 11-2.
4. Select the Tools Tab. See Figure 11-3.
5. Select the Defragment Now... button to run the Disk Defragmenter.
6. Select the disk drive you want to defragment in the top window pane.

Figure 11-5
7. Select the Defragment button. Data will be reorganized on the disk drive to allow for
more free space.
NOTE: Defragmenting may take several minutes.
11.1.4 Care and Cleaning
For optimal performance, IDC recommends that the working area be kept clean and that
air intake and outflow ports on the Detector Head be kept clear.
When cleaning the system:
• Use a non-abrasive, soft cloth.
• Never soak the unit or allow cleaning fluids to drip or run.
• Exercise care and caution around fan guards, grid door, and Control buttons. Do not
allow foreign material or cleaners to enter openings.
• Never use the following cleaning tools or chemicals:
•hard brushes or scrapers
•strong acids or alkaloids
•acetones (includes lacquer thinner)
•hexane

•Dettol®: may diminish the stability of the surface coating

To perform maintenance on the system:
1. Switch the unit OFF.
2. Wipe external surfaces with an approved cleaning liquid from the list below:
• most alcohol and ammonia based cleaners
• bleach
• mild, non-abrasive cleansers such as Fantastic® or Formula 409®.
3. Wipe the cleaned surface with a cloth lightly moistened with clean water to remove
residual cleaner and dirt.

Preventative Maintenance • Preventative Maintenance Checklist • 11 - 9
11.2 Preventative Maintenance Checklist

To be performed every six months:
Software Maintenance
____ Scan for volume errors. See above Section 11.1.2, “Scanning for Volume Errors”.
____ Run the Windows Disk Defragmenter. See above Section 11.1.3, “Running the
Windows Disk Defragmenter”.
____ Create a backup CD of c://Magellan2/datafolder and c://winnt/Magellan.ini
(Windows 2000) or c://windows/Magellan.ini (Windows XP)
____ Perform a High-Contrast Resolution Test. See Section 7.1.6.6, “High-Contrast
Resolution”.
System Maintenance
DANGER! Never attempt to clean the internal parts of the system. Ensure all openings
and doors are shut. System maintenance must be undertaken by a highly
qualified maintenance personnel.
____ Inspect system grids for damage or artifacts.

____ Verify proper operation of the grid slide assembly.
____ Clean and inspect the two system ventilation fans. These two are located in the
Detector Head.
NOTE: Clean and clear ventilation fans are critical for proper image quality. Use
compressed air to clear fan debris. Do not use a vacuum.
____ Check that all electrical connections are secure and that all cable clamps and strain
reliefs are in place. Check that connectors do not have exposed wires and check
cable sheaths for wear and fraying. Check that all cables are correctly routed. See
above
____Movement components - Check correct operation of the controls, detents, limits and
movements in all possible positions.
____Steel cable - Verify that the steel cable is in good condition and appearance. Replace
the Cable if any steel wire is damaged.
____Rails - Clean the Column Rails with a cloth moistened in clean water and lubricate
both rails with a cloth moistened with lubricant oil. In case of noise during movement,
clean and lubricate again.
____Chains / Guides / Bearings - Clean and lubricate these types of components.
____Brakes / Locks - Check correct operation of the Brakes / Locks. Replace if necessary.
____Functional Checks / Adjustments - Perform a Functional Check of all room
equipment. Perform the respective adjustments of the equipment if necessary.

11 - 10 • Preventative Maintenance • Preventative Maintenance Checklist
Computer Maintenance
See above Section 11.1.4, “Care and Cleaning” for appropriate cleaning products.
____ Clean keyboard and mouse.
____ Clean and inspect the computer fans and filters.
NOTE: Use compressed air to clear fan and filter debris. Do not use a vacuum.
To be performed every twelve months:

____ Complete Acceptance testing procedures. See Section 7.1.2, “Scope” in Magellan
System Acceptance.
To be performed every five years:

____ Replace the lithium battery on the CPU motherboard.

Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance Frequency • 11 - 11
11.3 Scheduled Maintenance Frequency

This section defines the scheduled activities that will be carried out as part of an overall
maintenance agreement.
11.3.1 Purpose
The purpose of this Periodic Maintenance is to guarantee a continued safe performance of

the Unit, to increase serviceability, to reduce costs (down time, repairs, etc.) and to assure
safety (personal risk).
The following checks and maintenance procedures, at the suggested intervals, are the
manufacturer’s recommendation for the most effective Periodic Maintenance schedule for
this Unit. Service tasks here described must be performed exclusively by service
personnel specifically trained on medical X-ray Generators.
11.3.2 Frequency
The recommended preventative maintenance cycle for the system should include four
inspections per year, spaced at three month intervals. Two of these preventative
maintenance inspections should be a physical, on-site inspection. The other two
preventative maintenance inspections should be a remote, diagnostic connection. These
on-site and remote preventative maintenance inspections should be alternated.
11.3.2.1 Stand Preventative Maintenance Procedure
WARNING! Never attempt to clean or handle any part of the unit when it is on. Switch it
off and disconnect it from the mains before cleaning or inspecting.
On-Site Preventative Maintenance Service - execute every twelve months:

1. Exterior cleaning – Clean exterior covers with a clean cloth moistened with warm
water and a mild soap solution. To rinse, wipe with a cloth moistened with warm water.
Inspect all covers and handles for operation concerns, physical damage, and missing
hardware. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind.
DANGER! Never attempt to clean the internal parts of the unit. The unit must always be
kept shut unless a specific renewal part is required. This procedure must be
undertaken by a highly qualified maintenance personnel.
2. Electrical Checks – Check that all electrical connections are secure and that all cable
clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Check that connectors do not have exposed wires
and check cable sheaths for wear and fraying. Check that all cables are correctly
routed.
3. Check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.
4. Verify proper operation of all system buttons and doors.

11 - 12 • Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance Frequency
5. Inspect system grids for damage or artifacts.

6. Verify proper operation of the grid slide assembly.
7. Clean and inspect the two system ventilation fans. These two are located in the detector
head.
8. Measure the power supplies.
9. Check Windows 2000 error log for errors. Clear the log file after complete analysis.
10.Check IDC Magellan 3 errors logs. Clear the log file after complete analysis. Clean
keyboard, mouse ball, and mouse interior rollers.
11.Verify monitor has the proper luminance as per procedure.
12.Clean and inspect computer fans, filters and system interior.
13.Make an archive copy of the system settings on a floppy disc.
14.Perform an image quality test as per procedure (Acceptance Test), and compare it to the
previous test.
Workstation Preventative Maintenance Service - execute every six months:

1. Check the Windows 2000 error log for errors. Clear the log file after complete analysis.
Performed by local IT.
2. Scan the main disc drive for volume errors using Windows system utilities. Performed by
local IT.
3. Verify system fragmentation is under 5%. Run Windows disk defragmenter as required.
Performed by local IT.
4. Verify antivirus definitions are up to date. Performed weekly by local IT.
5. Check image storage directory for old images. (Make a list and verify with the customer if
these images are required and archived before removing.)
6. Download the system settings to the IDC database for backup purposes (Optional)
(Automatic if CHUM is activated).
Every 5 years:
Replace the lithium battery on CPU motherboard
11.3.2.2 Optional 80 KW Generator Preventative Maintenance Procedure
Every twelve months and whenever a related certifiable X-ray component is replaced:
1. Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapor-proof compound.
2. Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main cabinet as needed. See
the Operators Manual for detailed cleaning procedures.
3. Perform the X-ray tube auto-calibration routine reference. Refer to the CPI generator
manual.

Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance Frequency • 11 - 13
4. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator. Disconnect the tube
thermal switch(es) and verify the correct error message. Verify that the X-ray
exposures are inhibited.
5. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this installation.
Every twelve months only:

1. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any damaged components.
a. The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if used, including
the membrane switch assembly.
b. The cable between the control console and the generator main cabinet and
between the remote fluoro control (if used) and generator main cabinet.
c. The handswitch and fluoro foot switch (if used) and the cables connecting these
to the console.
2. Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible damage: missing or
loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged cables etc.
3. Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the ventilation holes or louvers on
the generator cabinet.
Every five years:

Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console and on the generator
CPU board in the main cabinet.

NOTES
PARTS LIST

12.1 “Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure”
12.2 “Renewal Parts”
12.3 “Detector Head Parts”

12 - 2 • Parts List •

Parts List • Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure • 12 - 3
12.1 Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure
12.1.1 Material Requests
In an effort to ensure the correct and timely fulfillment of your replacement parts orders, IDC
requires any material requests be reviewed by our Technical Support Team prior to the
placement of your order. This will help to determine if the components requested will
actually resolve your specific technical issues.
12.1.2 Placing an Order
Once your request is logged and approved, we will require:

1. An official company purchase order to be sent via fax or e-mail.
Our acceptance of a verbal PO# is solely at the discretion of management, according to
the situation. A follow-up hard copy is always required within 24 hours.
2. The part number, description, and quantity.
3. The name of the IDC technical support person who approved the order.
4. Your shipping information and desired shipping method (based on urgency).
5. The model and serial number of the specific component containing the part(s), e.g.,
generator, table, tubestand, wallstand, collimator, x-ray tube. The serial number ensures
the replacement part to be shipped will match the unit’s revision and version, and will
update our records.
6. Name and contact information of the person ordering the parts.
7. An e-mail address to receive the tracking information.
8. The original Sales Order number (if available).
12.1.3 Order Processing
NOTE: No warranty replacement parts order will be processed without a PO# and the
component serial number.
Once all of the above is received, your order will be processed and shipped.
The cutoff time for IDC supplied parts orders is 14:00 MST, Monday through Friday.
Orders for other supplied parts will be promptly processed, however due to geographic
locations the cutoff times may vary. The RMA number has to be clearly visible on the
outside of the packaging.
Although some types of parts orders can be hand-processed through our Technical
Support Department for an additional hour on weekdays, we will attempt to fulfill the
order but can not provide any guarantee.
Tracking Numbers will be sent to the specified e-mail address on the purchase order by
the morning following shipment. We will extend every effort to provide tracking

12 - 4 • Parts List • Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure
information for materials drop-shipped from the supplier.

If an item is unavailable for shipment, an IDC Service Parts Coordinator will contact you with
any applicable updates.
12.1.4 Warranty Parts Return Procedure
When the return of an original part or a replacement part is required for analysis or exchange,
an RMA (Return Materials Authorization) number and a completed RMA form will be
required and included along with the packing list for your return shipment.
Any item shipped “Freight Collect” will be refused.
Any item not returned within 30 days will be invoiced.
IDC will not accept unauthorized returns; we will return these to you at your expense.
Protecting the value of returned products by packaging and shipping them correctly is your
responsibility. IDC reserves the right to deny warranty coverage for any damage caused by
failing to meet the following packaging requirements:
• All parts must be packed securely inside the external shipping carton to prevent mechani-
cal damage.
• External packaging must be sufficient to protect the contents from the usual hazards of
shipping.
NOTE: An incomplete or inaccurate RMA Form will prevent us from collecting the essential
information to help us improve our products and serve our customers more
efficiently.

Parts List • Renewal Parts • 12 - 5
12.2 Renewal Parts

FRU 1 = Replacement parts should be in stock.
FRU 2 = Not necessary to have it in stock.
FRU -- = All parts available in factory stock.
Table 1
Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference Remarks
A0 X-Plus Head A8101-01
A1 Tube RX Cover 1 2 N 10336-XX Specify color
A2 Hand Brake Handle 1 2 N 54402008
A3 Handle 1 2 N 54404106
A4 Control PCB URS LP 1 2 N A8123-04
A5 PCB Plus LP Display 1 2 N A8141-01
A6 Overlay 1 2 N 55801411
A7 Display LCD 1 2 N 54207036
Figure 12-1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

12 - 6 • Parts List • Renewal Parts
Table 2
B0 Swivel Arm A8102-11
B1 Motoreducer SID 1 2 N 52402021
B2 POT (10 Turns) 2W 10K ohm 1 2 N 52719003
B3 Inclinometer 1 2 N 50501016
B4 Photo-Sensor 2 2 N 53412101
B5 Simple Chain 2250 MM 1 2 N 53930010
B6 High Precision Switch (SW1-SW2 for SID) 2 2 N 50605014
B7 POT 10K 1 Turn 1 2 N 52719006
B8 Motoreducer Detector 1 2 N 52402081
B9 High Precision Switch (Receptor) 2 2 N 50605014
B10 Bearing 25X37X7 1 2 N 51501005
Handle Maneta Elesa 1 2 N 54402011 (Not Mot Receptor)
Figure 12-2
B2 B10 B5 B3 B1 B4
B6
B8
B9
B7

Table 3
C0 Carriage A8103-01
C1 High Precision Switch (SW3 Lower Lock / 4 2 N 50605014
SW4 Upper Lock & SW5-SW6 for ROT)
C2 Motoreducer Turn 0.37 kW 1 2 N 52402024
C3 Excentric Bearing 8 2 N 51501207
C4 Excentric Bearing 4 2 N 10497-02
C5 Spring 4 2 N 10372-01
C6 PCB Anticrushing 1 1 N A3531-01
Figure 12-3
C2
C3
(8)
C6
C4 (4)
C1
C5
C1

Table 4
D0 Column X-Plus 8105-01
D1 Tooth Belt 10-T5-340 1 2 N 53940115
D2 POT (10 Turns) 2W 10K ohm 1 2 N 52719003
D3 Motoreducer Height 1 2 N 52402028
Figure 12-4
D2
D1
D3

Table 5
E0 Control Box A8130-05
E1 PCB Sedecal X-Plus Interface 1 1 N A8124-07
E2 Servo Detector Movement 1 2 N 52403011
E3 Input Line Transformer 1 2 N 50509036
E4 Converter POT=1.5KW 2 2 N 52403003
E5 Converter POT=0.75KW 1 2 N 52403004
E6 Fuse SB 10A 250V F1-F2 2 2 N 53801008
E7 Fuse SB 2A 250V F3 3 2 N 53801010
E8 Fuse SB 4A 250V F4 2 2 N 53801013
E9 Fuse SB 8A 250V F5 2 2 N 53801014
E10 Fuse 0.4V 250V SB F6, F7 3 2 N 53801015
E11 Relay Shrack K2 1 2 N 51403050
E12 Relay 24 VDC K1 1 2 2 51403049
E13 Fan 1 2 N 53103008
E14 Emergency Switch 1 2 N 53613019
E15 Switch Green Lamp 16A, 250 VDC 1 2 N 50613012

Figure 12-5
E1 E2 E11 E12 E7, E8, E9 E3 E13
E4 E10 (2) E5 E6 E4 E14 E15

Table 6
F0 Receptor A8117-10
F1 Overlay (Receptor Handle) 1 2 N 55801369
F2 Emergency Switch 1 2 N 50613016
Figure 12-6
F1
F2
Table 7 - Other Renewal Parts

Tools
Carriage Regulation Tool 1 2 N 15004-01
RS232 Cable (Software Update) 1 2 N A7658-01
Wheels Kit (Column Positioning Aid) 1 2 N A8176-01
Collimator - Manual Short Cables 1 2 N A8172-01
Collimator - Manual Long Cables 1 2 N A8173-11
Collimator - Automatic Short Cables 1 2 N A8174-31
Collimator - Automatic Long Cables 1 2 N A8175-51

12 - 12 • Parts List • Detector Head Parts
12.3 Detector Head Parts

Table 12-1 displays available parts for IDC Detector Heads.
Table 12-1
IDC Assembly IDC Sub-Assembly Manufacturer/

Description
Part Number Part Number Part Number
740-008-001 Detector X4C-CK
740-0007-017 Detector X3C-CD
740-0007-18 Detector X3C-ALD
740-000X-00X Detector X3C-ALK
740-0008-009 Detector X3C-CK
740-0008-008 Detector X3G-K
430-0132-000 Camera cooling cable; internal
430-0133-000A Camera cooling cable; external; terminated at
one end only
430-0139-000 Cable termination kit for 430-0133-000A
includes:
420-0000-033 Molex/39-01-2121 • 12 position connector
410-0013-002 Molex/39-00-0041 • Male pins (12)
430-0130-000 Camera power cable; internal

430-0131-000A Camera power cable; external; terminated at one
end only
includes:
402-0000-021 Molex/39-01-2081 • 8 position connector
410-0013-002 Molex/39-00-0041 • Male pins (8)
430-0101-001 Fibre optic cable

430-0135-000 TEC and grid detect cable
700-0240-199 Hot link card
740-0007-005 Power Distribution Module Assembly

Parts List • Detector Head Parts • 12 - 13
Table 12-1
IDC Assembly IDC Sub-Assembly Manufacturer/

Description
Part Number Part Number Part Number
740-0008-005 Camera board set (X3C-CK, X3C-ALK and X3G-
K)
700-0501-099 • Camera communication board (X3C-CK,
X3C-ALK and X3G-K)
700-0520-099 • Camera driver board (X3C-CK, X3C-ALK and
X3G-K)
740-0007-010 Camera board set (X3C-CD and X3C-ALD)
(R2)
700-0500-199A • Camera communication board (X3C-CD and
X3C-ALD)
700-0510-199 • Camera driver board (X3C-CD and X3C-
ALD)
740-0009-001 Camera board set (X4C-CK)
700-501-099 • Camera communication board (X4C-CK)
700-0521-199 • Camera driver board (X4C-CK)
Table 12-2 displays available options for IDC Detector Heads.

Table 12-2
IDC Assembly IDC Sub-Assembly Manufacturer/Part

Description
Part Number Part Number Number
430-0134-000A Digital grid detect cable
includes:
402-0414-003 JST/EHR-3 • 3 position connector
402-0415-001 JST/SEH-001T-PO.6 • Male pins (3)
700-0250-399 Digital grid detect board

NOTES
SUPPORT
This chapter explains how to use the IDC’s support network.

The sections are as follows:
13.1 “Product Support”
13.2 “Service”

13 - 2 • Support •
1.0 August 26, 2005 Revision after Module Creation.
1.1 October 25, 2005 Minor Changes.
4.0 July 31, 2006 Added module part number.
4.1 August 30, 2006 European contact information added.
4.2 October 30, 2006 Minor revision.
4.3 November 15, 2006 Information specific to local service provider added.

Support • Product Support • 13 - 3
13.1 Product Support

The primary role of IDC Support is to provide technical support to the local IDC
authorized dealer, IDC authorized service organization, or hospital in-house service. For
customer support, the customer’s first call should be to you, the local service provider. If a
problem is beyond your capability, our call escalation procedure allows you to quickly
involve IDC.

13 - 4 • Support • Service
13.2 Service
The Detector Heads contain no serviceable parts.
When calling for assistance, please have the following information at hand:
• The model and serial number of your system (this information is on the label affixed to the
imaging stand).
• Your name and the facility from which you are calling.
• The Magellan 2 software release version number.
• The Purchase Order Number, if placing a request for service or parts out of warranty.
• A detailed description of the problem including the frequency of occurrence and details of
corrective attempts made to date. Please have this manual available for reference during
your call.
Alternatively you may log on to the issue tracking site at
http://tracking.imagingdynamics.com to select your project and enter the details.
NOTE: Before returning any material directly to IDC, please call the Help Desk to obtain a
RMA number (Return Material Authorization). At this time, you will be given any
special instructions for shipping such as international waybills, special crating
requirements, etc.
NOTE: Goods arriving at IDC’s shipping dock without RMA numbers will not be accepted.
Goods arriving damaged due to improper packing/crating will not receive warranty
return credit and may result in invoicing to recover cost of repairs.
13.2.1 IDC Support and Hours of Coverage
8:00 am–5:00 pm MST Monday to Friday (holidays excluded)

Call toll free:
Help Desk 1.866.975.6737 (1.866.XPLORER)
After Hours 1.877.275.9399 and leave a voice message
E-mail service@imagingdynamics.com
NOTE: Overtime billing may apply. In such cases, a purchase order number is required.

SCHEMATICS
The following schematics are included at the end of this manual:

• Sedecal X-Plus 54302080
• X-Plus/IDC Adaptation IM - 353
• Motor Brake Adaptation IM - 358
• URS Plus LP Control A8123-04
• URS Plus LP Interface A8124-07
• URS Plus LP Display A8141-01
• Anticrushing A3531-01
• Generator Cabinet 54301052
• ATP Console A6188-22
• PC Serial Console I/F - 036
• Room Warning Light Interface I/F - 008
• AEC Compatibility IM - 015
• 1600 System block diagram

NOTES
INDEX
Symbols anatomy
add new 8-86
% symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-64, 8-66
manage 8-85
A anatomy and procedure
remove or duplicate step 8-105
AC power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 anatomy/projection pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
Acceptance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 add level 8-94
accession number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 add step 8-102
acetones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 copy parameter values 8-96
acids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 modify parameter details 8-98
Acquisition Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Application Entity Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
activating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103 Arcoma CMT
active PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52, 8-59 position parameters 8-99
add step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102 artifact removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
adding a new printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
AE Title, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47 artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
AEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 auto resend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) automatically refresh schedule . . . . . . . . . 8-43
density 8-100 autoposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
field left, field center, field right 8-100
sensitivity 8-100 B
air intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
binned images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
alkaloids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
border density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
aluminum filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79, 8-99
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

15 - 2
burn in scale markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 DelCano Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

burning in the VOI LUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50 delete
procedures 8-104
C despeckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Camera Communication Cable (Fibre optic) 3-77 Dettol® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Camera Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 1-12 device options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
camera temperature . . . . . . . . 6-22, 6-27, 6-30 diagnostic patient images . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
CCD technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in
CDD temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Medicine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
change DICOM AE Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-60
password 8-21
E
charge trap removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Chip Defect Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Ehsan Samei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Class I Type B equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
cleaning liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 electrical power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 electromagnetic interference . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
collimator x position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101 Electrostatic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
collimator y position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101 electrostatic sensitive device . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
column, resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 empty image density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
columns, changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
compact generator equalization
line powered 3-29 iterations 8-80, 8-100
component list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 kernel 8-80, 8-100
computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 strength 8-80, 8-100
Computer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 Erasure Thoroughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
computer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 EtherNet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 existing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
configuring DICOM Annotation Settings 8-63 exposure
configuring Xporter FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73 settings 8-100
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 technique 8-100
contrast allergies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
copper filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 F
crate disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 f# options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
creating new correction coordinates . . . . . 6-31 falling-edge trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
cropping ROI offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Current CCD temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 film
speed 8-99
D film destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
dark field correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9, 6-19 film session label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
dark field images paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 film size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
date of birth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 flat and dark fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
DC JPEG send destination . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 Flat field correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
deactivating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103 flat field images paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
default PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 flatfield correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
default send destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 focal spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100

15 - 3
FTP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74 L

FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74 Lab 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 lacquer thinner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Linearity and Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
G
lithium battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 loading dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Generator Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 local building codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
generator workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 lossless compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Geometric correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 LV-DRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
geometric correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29, 7-6
GND and/or Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 M
grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 mA value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
grid requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75 Magellan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
group details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 magnification type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
mammography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
H
managing the procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
handling and transportation of the detector head 3- mAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
48 mAs value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
hanging protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 maximum density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Heat sink temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Measuring the Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
hexane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 medical alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
High-Contrast Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 medium type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
HIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 minimum density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Hospital's Information System . . . . . . . . . 8-36 mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Host Name/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61 Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Modality Performed Procedure Step . . . . 8-36
I Modality Performed Procedure Steps . . . . 8-38
IDC Detector Head Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
AEC Pre-amp 3-65 MPPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36, 8-38
Emergency stop wires 3-65 ms value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Installing the Detector Assembly 3-64
Image Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 N
Image Receptor Dimensions . . . . . .1-11, 1-12 network interface card . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3
import neutral power supply conductor . . . . . . . . 1-25
procedures 8-104 noise reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80, 8-100
inactive PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
inactive send destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 O
Institution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76 Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
integration time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ionization chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
K
outflow ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
kV value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
kVp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

15 - 4
P Q
PACS (Picture Archiving and Communications queued images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
PACS description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48 R
pad image to fill image box . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 Radiographic Stand Dimensions . . . . . . . . 1-10
paperwork requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Radiology Information System . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Parameter Manager RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3
anatomies 8-85 Readout Linearity Function . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 receiving dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
patient age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 recommended kVp settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
patient ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 recommended mAs settings . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
patient name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 referring physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
photometric interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 refreshing scheduled studies . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Physical Inspection/Inventory . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
POD (Pixel Optimized Dose) mode . . . . . 8-99 removing a PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 removing a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45 removing a worklist provider . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Power Distribution Module . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-13 removing a worklist server . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Power supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 removing additional columns of pixels . . . 6-30
powering up the Xplorer 1600 . . . . . . . . . 3-78 removing additional rows of pixels . . . . . . 6-30
preset position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101 Requested Procedure Description . . . . . . . 8-44
preventive maintenance inspections . . . . 11-11 Requested Procedure ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
print bit-depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 resampling bit depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
print demographics on images . . . . . . . . . 8-63 resetting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
print information configuration . . . . . . . . 8-65 return material authorization . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
print priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
printer AE title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 RMA number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
printer description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
printer, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Room Door Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
procedures Room requirements 1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
activating or deactivating 8-103 rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
change order of steps 8-105 rotation of incoming images . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
create new 8-107
delete and import 8-104 S
manage 8-102
Scheduled Performing Physician . . . . . . . 8-40
processing parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
Scheduled Procedure Step Description . . . 8-40
projection
Scheduled Procedure Step Location . . . . . 8-40
create new 8-91
Scheduled Station Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
manage 8-89
Scheduled Studies - managing . . . . . . . . . 8-41
modifying 8-91
scintillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19, 3-7
projection/anatomy pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
Scintillator Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
protective earth ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
protective mask and gloves . . . . . . . 1-19, 3-7
scrapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
proxy server address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
security group
add 8-16

15 - 5
modify 8-17 T
Sedecal Generator TCP/IP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-49
Back Cover Installation 3-25 TEC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
cabinet covers 3-32 TEC Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
cable connections 3-27 TEC set-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
cable routing 3-28 TECCM temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Extended Memory data 5-15 Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Extended Memory Locations 5-15 temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Fastening Bar 3-28 testing a printer’s connection . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Generator Service Mode 5-12 testing the connection to a Worklist Provider 8-41
Service Menu 5-10 testing the FTP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
X-Ray Tube Data 5-19 Testing the Send Destination Connection . 8-51
X-Ray Tube Type Selection 5-18 thallium doped cesium iodide . . . . . . 1-19, 3-7
Sedecal Generator Calibration Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC) Controller . 6-3
Digital mA Loop Open 5-20 transportation temperature range . . . . . . . . 2-4
Sedecal Generator Configuration trigger cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Auto-Calibration 5-20 trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Generator Service Mode 5-12 True Size Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Test Switches 5-6 true size print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Send Destination, removing . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51 tube auto-calibration routine . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Send Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
send destinations, changing order . . . . . . 8-53 U
Send Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Send Manager Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46 unbinned images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Sending Preferences, configuring . . . . . . 8-54 universal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Serial Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 use DICOM annotation box . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 user list
server description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 configure 8-19
sex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 modify 8-20
sharpening using a proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
amount 8-80, 8-99 using different series UID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
kernel 8-80, 8-99
V
Shell Diala Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
shutter, shuttering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 vapor-proof compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Shutting Down Magellan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 video card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3
SID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 Virtual Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Site Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 voltage levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
smoothing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 Voltage on the TEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
SPS Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
SPS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 W
SPS ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Windows 2000 operating system . . . . . . . 2-12
Storage and Shipping Conditions . . . . . . . . 2-4 Worklist Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Worklist Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
straightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-79, 8-99 Worklist Provider - adding . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
structural strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Worklist Provider - changing . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

15 - 6
Worklist Provider - query conditions . . . . 8-40 Configuration of C32 - Maximum Horizontal

Worklist Scheduled Station AE Title . . . . 8-40 Position 4-15
workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Configuration of C33 - Half Way Height 4-15
Configuration of C61 - Minimum Angle 4-15
X Configuration of C62 - Detector Detent at 0°
X co-ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 4-15
XMap locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Configuration of C63 - Maximum Angle 4-16
Xplorer 1600 control box 3-16
Adjustments 4-25 Control Box Inverters 3-40
Anchoring the Column Base 3-22 HV Cables connections 3-46
Brake Power Cable 3-41 installation 3-19
Calibration Mode 4-19 Light Field Alignment 4-28
Calibration of P11 - Minimum Height 4-20 perpendicularity adjustment 4-31
Calibration of P12 - Maximum Height 4-20 Power cables 3-42
Calibration of P13 - Half Way Height 4-20 pre-installation requirements 3-18
Calibration of P21 - Minimum Angle 4-21 safety locking rod 3-19
Calibration of P22 - Vertical Angle 4-21 Safety Locking Rod removal 3-46
Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle 4-21 stand control box installation 3-24
Calibration of P24 - Minimum Angle 4-21 Swivel Arm balance test 4-25
Calibration of P31 - Minimum SID 4-22 Trigger Board Adjustments 3-79
Calibration of P32 - Maximum SID 4-22 Trigger Board Electronics 3-79
Calibration of P41- Minimum Detector Angle Trigger Settings 3-80
4-22 unpacking the column 3-16
Calibration of P42 - 0° Detector Angle 4-23 unpacking the generator 3-17
Calibration of P43 - Maximum Detector Angle wiring the stand 3-40
4-23 X-ray Tube Installation 3-44
Collimator installation 3-44 Xplorer 1600 Plus positioning . . . . . . . . 8-101
configuration 4-5, 4-7, 4-9 Xplorer1600
Configuration Mode 4-10 wall support 3-22
Configuration of C11 - Inches / CM 4-10 X-ray generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Configuration of C12 - Maximum Height 4-10 X-ray radiation exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Configuration of C13 - Thorax Height 4-11 X-ray Tube
Configuration of C14 - Undertable Height 4- Safety Thermostat 3-34
11 x-ray tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 6-27
Configuration of C15 - Table Height 4-11 X-ray tube connection
Configuration of C16 - Detector Height 4-11 Anode cables 3-32
Configuration of C17 - Detector Width Left 4- fans 3-33
12 high voltage cables 3-32
Configuration of C18 - Detector Width Right LV-DRAC 3-33
4-13 Stator cable 3-33
Configuration of C19 - SID Point 4-13
Y
Configuration of C21 - Safety Height 4-14
Configuration of C31 - Minimum Horizontal Y co-ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Position 4-14 YMap locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

SEDECAL X-PLUS_1
SEDECAL X-PLUS_2
ROOM WARNING LIGHT INTERFACE
PC SERIAL INTERFACE
AEC COMPATIBILITY
X-PLUS IDC ADAPTATION
GENERATOR CABINET
A3531-01_Anti Crushing
ATP CONSOLE
1.1 X1600 Series (X3C and X4C) System Block Diagram
,17(51$/*5281'7267$1'
'(7(&725+($'
9+]
),%5(237,&&20
*5,''(7(&79'&
$(&9'&
7(&9'&
&$0(5$32:(5 9'& *(1(5$725
-
&$75-7(& 72

*5,''(7(&79'& (/(&75,&$/%2;
&$7+2'(0$;.9
$12'(0$;.9
67$7259$&
'(7(&725
7*3'0 9'&+($'
:25.67$7,21 32:(56833/<
9
+] 9 ,17(51$//<
+] 32:(5('
9
;67$1'
(/(&7521,&6%2;
9'&
,17(5)$&(%2;&$%/(
9'&
&21752/&$%,1(7
560)
9'& 67$1'&21752/
9$& &$%/(6
9'&
3&,17(5)$&(%2;
0,1,&2162/(
9'&
+$1'6:,7&+
;67$1'
&2/801
+$1'6:,7&+&$%/(
9$&
&2//,0$725
127(32:(56833/<$1'3'0
$5(&217$,1(':,7+67$1'(/(&7521,&6%2;
;5$<78%(
*5281'&$%/(

IDC - 1600ServiceManual901 0005 026v1.0jun0607

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

IDC - 1600ServiceManual901 0005 026v1.0jun0607

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

1600 SERIES

Manual Number: 901-0005-026 v1.0 • June 6, 2007 • PN: 902-0017-001 v1.0

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0001-001 v2.0 • June 6, 2007

Copyrights and Trademarks

IDC Corporate Address

IDC European Address

IDC Europe B.V.

IDC Asian Address

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0013-019 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

IDC Customer Service

Dealer Phone Number

IDC Dealer Technical Support

IDC Help Desk 1.866.975.6737 (1.866.XPLORER)

After Hours (holidays and after 5pm MST, 1.877.275.9399

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0013-019 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Patient Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Radiation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Connecting the Detector Head and PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle (90°). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Procedure for Half Value Layer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Exposure Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Setting up the Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

About Anatomy/Projection Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-002 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

The following information is included:

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-003 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

0.1 March 15, 2007 Module created using existing information.

1.0 June 6, 2007 First release.

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-003 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

1.1.1 Who Should Use This Manual

1.1.2 Manual Conventions

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-003 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

1.2 Regulatory Information

1.2.1 Standards Compliance

This system meets the following requirements

Part 1-1: General requirements for IEC 60601-1-1: 2000

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1-1: 2002

Medical electrical systems:

Medical electric equipment:

Part 1-4: General requirements for IEC 60601-1-4:1996 + A1: 1999

This system has been certified by:

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-003 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

1.2.2 Indications for Use

WARNING! Only certified and properly trained, authorized personnel should be

WARNING! The appropriate x-ray imaging exposure parameters should be consistent

1.2.3 Regulatory Forms

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-003 v1.0 • June 6, 2007

1.3 1600 Component Details

Table 1-1 : Component Table

Component Name Manufacturer Model/Part Number Manuals

' 217+()5217)$&(2)7+(67$1'723&$3 '